Porsche 911 Carrera Manual

Porsche Personbil 911 Carrera

Læs nedenfor 📖 manual på dansk for Porsche 911 Carrera (310 sider) i kategorien Personbil. Denne guide var nyttig for 20 personer og blev bedømt med 4.5 stjerner i gennemsnit af 2 brugere

Side 1/310
911 Carrera
Owner’s Manual
®
1
© Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG
Porsche, the Porsche crest, 911, Carrera, Targa,
PCCB, PCM, PDK, PSM and Tequipment are regis-
tered trademarks and the distinctive shapes of
Porsche automobiles are trademarks of
Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG.
All rights reserved.
Printed in Germany
Orientation guides in the
Owner’s Manual
The orientation guides in the Owner’s Manual are
highlighted in yellow.
Overall Table of Contents
At the start of the Owner’s Manual you will find an
overview of the overall contents of the Owner’s
Manual.
Section Contents
There is a summary of topics with the corre-
sponding page numbers at the beginning of each
main chapter.
Index
There is a detailed, alphabetical index at the end
of this Owner’s Manual.
WKD 997 021 10 5/09
2
Dear Owner,
We would like to thank you for your purchase of a
Porsche Sports car.
Judging by the car you have chosen, you are a mo-
torist of a special breed, and you are probably no
novice when it comes to automobiles.
Remember however, as with any vehicle, you
should take time to familiarize yourself with your
Porsche and its performance characteristics. Al-
ways drive within your own unique capabilities as
a driver and your level of experience with your
Porsche. Ensure that anyone else driving your
Porsche does the same. To prevent or minimize in-
jury, always use your safety belts. Never consume
alcohol or drugs before or during the operation of
your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual contains a host of useful in-
formation. Please take the time to read this manu-
al before you drive your new Porsche. Become fa-
miliar with the operation of your Porsche car for
maximum safety and operating pleasure. The bet-
ter you know your Porsche, the more pleasure you
will experience driving your new car.
Always keep your Owner’s Manual in the car, and
give it to the new owner if you ever sell your
Porsche.
A separate Maintenance Booklet explains how
you can keep your Porsche in top driving condition
by having it serviced regularly.
A separate Warranty and Customer Informa-
tion Booklet contains detailed information about
the warranties covering your Porsche.
For U.S. only:
If you believe that your vehicle has a fault which
could cause a crash, injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-
fying Porsche Cars North America, Inc. (Porsche
Cars N.A.).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety prob-
lem exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a re-
call and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA can-
not become involved in individual problems be-
tween you and your dealer, or Porsche Cars N.A..
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-
424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.savercar.gov.
Your car has thousands of parts and components
which have been designed and manufactured in
accordance with Porsche’s high standards of
engineering quality and safety.
Warning!
Any alteration or misuse of the vehicle can
lead to accidents and severe or fatal
personal injuries.
Any alteration of the vehicle may negate or
interfere with those safety features built into
the vehicle. Modifications may be carried out
on your vehicle only if approved by Porsche.
Your Porsche is intended to be used in a safe
manner obeying the local laws and in the
light of driving conditions faced by you, and
in accordance with the instructions provided
in this Owner’s Manual.
fDo not misuse your Porsche by ignoring those
laws and driving conditions, or by ignoring the
instructions in this manual.
Caution!
The fitting of racing tires (e.g. slicks) for
sporting events is not approved by Porsche.
Very high cornering speeds can be achieved
with racing tires. However, the resulting
transverse acceleration values would jeopar-
dize the adequate supply of oil to the engine.
Porsche therefore will not accept any
warranty or accept any liability for damage
occurring as a result of non-compliance with
this provision.
fDo not fit racing tires (e.g. slicks) for sporting
events on your vehicle.
3
Regularly check your vehicle for signs of
damage.
Damaged or missing aerodynamic compo-
nents such as spoilers or underside panels
affect the driving behavior and therefore
must be replaced immediately.
Your car may have all or some of the components
described in this manual.
Should you have difficulty understanding any of
the explanations of features or equipment installed
in your vehicle, contact your authorized Porsche
dealer. He/She will be glad to assist you. Also
check with your dealer on other available options
or equipment.
Throughout this booklet, left is designated as the
driver’s side of the vehicle, and right as the pas-
senger’s side of the vehicle.
Text, illustrations and specifications in this manual
are based on the information available at the time
of printing.
It has always been Porsche’s policy to continuous-
ly improve its products. Porsche, therefore, re-
serves the right to make changes in design and
specification, and to make additions or improve-
ments in its product without incurring any obliga-
tion to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
We wish you many miles of safe and pleasurable
driving in your Porsche.
Warning!
For your own protection and longer service life of
your car, please follow all operating instructions
and special warnings. These special warnings use
the safety alert symbol, followed by the words
Danger, Warning and Caution. These special
warnings contain important messages regarding
your safety and/or the potential for damage to
your Porsche. Ignoring them could result in seri-
ous mechanical failure, serious personal injury or
death.
fDo not alter your Porsche. Any alteration could
create dangerous conditions or defeat safety
engineering features built into your car.
fDo not misuse your Porsche. Use it safely, and
consistently with the law, according to the driv-
ing conditions, and the instructions in this man-
ual.
Alteration or misuse of your Porsche could
cause accidents and serious personal injury
or death.
Note to owners
In Canada, this manual is also available in French.
To obtain a copy contact your dealer or write to:
Note aux proprietaires
Au Canada on peut se procurer un exemplaire de
ce Manuel en français auprès du concessionaire
ou du:
Porsche Cars Canada, Ltd.
Automobiles Porsche Canada, LTEE
5925 Airport Road
Suite 420
Mississauga, Ontario
Canada L4V 1W1
Telephone number for customer assistance:
1-800-PORSCHE / Option 3
4
Sport tires
Sport tires (ultra high performance tires) are ap-
proved for use on public highways and comply
with all statutory requirements and safety criteria.
The design of the tire is also geared towards use
on racing circuits (driver safety training courses,
sports driving schools, Club Sport events) and
provides distinct advantages here in terms of dry
grip and wear compared to conventional road
tires.
The major features are a reduced tread depth and
a special tread pattern and carcass.
The design features of this sports tire result
in the following effects compared with other
summer tires when used under normal
driving conditions:
Sport tires have a smaller tread depth, and
thus can reach their wear limit sooner.
As with all tires, the attainable mileage de-
pends on the individual driving style and the
conditions of use.
Exercise caution when driving on wet roads,
paying special attention to hydroplaning situa-
tions (stagnant water, puddles, lane grooves).
Sport tires have a lower tread depth than nor-
mal tires and you must therefore adapt speed
accordingly when driving on wet surfaces.
The driver’s skill level must be commensurate
with the vehicle performance levels in the up-
per range limits, due to increased safety risks
in the upper range limits.
fAt oudside temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C)
change to snow tires.
fNotify anyone using your car of these charac-
teristics and possible effects.
Danger!
Risk of accident through loss of road surface
contact, control over the vehicle and braking
ability, leading to serious personal injury or
death.
The reduced tire tread depth means that
there is an increased risk of aquaplaning on
wet roads.
fWhen driving on wet or mud-covered roads re-
duce speed significantly.
Danger!
Risk of accident from worn tires.
Sport tires have a smaller tread depth, and
thus can reach their wear limit sooner.
It is important to check tire wear frequently
to avoid risk of serious personal injury or
death from worn tires.
fCheck tire wear frequently.
Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake
(PCCB)
fPlease see the chapter “BRAKES” on Page 58.
The high-performance brake system is designed
for optimal braking effect at all speeds and
temperatures.
Certain speeds, braking forces and ambient
conditions (such as temperature and humidity)
therefore might cause brake noises.
Wear on the different components and braking
system, such as brake pads and brake discs,
depends to a great extent on the individual driving
style and the conditions of use and therefore
cannot be expressed in actual miles on the road.
The values communicated by Porsche are based
on normal operation adapted to traffic. Wear
increases considerably when the vehicle is driven
on race tracks or through an aggressive driving
style.
fPlease consult an authorized Porsche dealer
about the current guidelines in effect before
such use of your vehicle.
5
Setting and operating vehicle
components when driving
Warning!
There is a danger of accident if you set or op-
erate the on-board computer, radio, naviga-
tion system, telephone or other equipment
when driving.
This could distract you from the traffic and
cause you to lose control of the vehicle re-
sulting in serious personal injury or death.
fOperate the components while driving only if
the traffic situation allows you to do so safely.
fCarry out any complicated operating or setting
procedures only with the vehicle stationary.
Portable Fuel Containers
Danger!
Portable fuel containers may leak, whether
they are full or partially empty. Fuel leaking
from a portable container carried in your ve-
hicle could, in case of an accident, cause a
fire or explosion, resulting in serious person-
al injury or death.
fNever carry additional fuel in portable contain-
ers in your vehicle.
Ground Clearance
Caution!
Risk of damage. The vehicle may touch the
ground as a result of reduced ground clear-
ance.
fDrive carefully and slowly on steep slopes (e.g.
parking lots, curbs, uneven roads, lifting plat-
forms etc.).
fAvoid steep ramps.
Engine Exhaust
Danger!
Engine exhaust is dangerous if inhaled.
Engine exhaust fumes have many compo-
nents which you can smell. They also contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is a colorless
and odorless gas.
Carbon monoxide can cause unconscious-
ness and even death if inhaled.
fNever start or let the engine run in an en-
closed, unventilated area.
It is not recommended to sit in your car for pro-
longed periods with the engine on and the car
not moving.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Warning!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and cer-
tain vehicle components contain or emit chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause can-
cer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproduc-
tive harm.
Hot Exhaust Pipes
Warning!
Risk of burn injury when standing near or
coming into contact with the exhaust pipe.
The exhaust pipe is hot when the vehicle is running
and remains hot for some time after the vehicle is
turned off.
fTo prevent injury, make a point of noting where
your vehicle’s exhaust pipe is, avoid placing
your legs near the exhaust pipe, and closely
supervise children around the vehicle when the
exhaust pipe could be hot.
A hot exhaust pipe can cause serious burns.
6Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Sport tires..................................................... 4
Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB)...... 4
Setting and operating vehicle components
when driving.................................................. 5
Ground Clearance.......................................... 5
Before driving off... ....................................... 8
Break in hints for the first
2,000 miles/3,000 kilometers...................... 10
Operation, Safety.............................. 13
Keys........................................................... 15
Security Wheel Bolts .................................... 15
Doors ......................................................... 18
Central Locking ........................................... 19
Alarm System,
Passenger Compartment Monitoring ............. 23
Power Windows........................................... 25
Mirrors........................................................ 27
Rear Window Defogger, Door Mirror Heating.. 29
Seat Adjustment and Head Restraints............ 30
Seat Memory............................................... 33
Heated Seats .............................................. 35
Seat Ventilation............................................ 36
Rear Seat Backrests.................................... 37
Steering Wheel Adjustment........................... 37
Steering Wheel Heating................................ 38
Multi-Functional Steering Wheel..................... 39
Sun Visors................................................... 40
Safety Belts................................................. 41
Airbag Systems ........................................... 44
Child Restraint Systems................................ 50
LATCH System
Child seat bracket on the passenger’s seat.... 54
Child Restraint Anchorages........................... 55
Rollover Protection System........................... 56
Sports Exhaust System ................................ 57
Parking Brake.............................................. 57
Brakes........................................................ 58
ABS Brake System (Antilock Brake System).... 61
Clutch Pedal................................................ 62
Porsche Traction Management (PTM)............. 63
Sport Mode................................................. 64
Porsche Stability Management (PSM)............. 66
Porsche Active Suspension Management
(PASM)........................................................ 69
Retractable Rear Spoiler............................... 69
Interior Lights.............................................. 71
Parking Aids................................................ 72
Ignition/Starter Switch with
anti-theft Steering Lock................................. 74
Starting Procedures..................................... 77
Stopping Engine........................................... 78
Emergency Flasher Switch............................ 79
Light Switch................................................. 80
Welcome Home Lighting............................... 81
Automatic Headlight Beam Adjustment........... 81
Turn Signal / Headlight Dimmer /
Parking light / Flasher Lever......................... 82
Windshield Wiper / Washer Lever .................. 83
Automatic Speed Control.............................. 86
Cupholder ................................................... 88
Ashtray ....................................................... 89
Cigarette Lighter.......................................... 90
Storage in the Passenger Compartment ....... 91
Luggage Compartment Lid and
Engine Compartment Lid ............................. 93
Luggage Compartment (Vehicles without
Porsche Traction Management PTM)............. 95
Luggage Compartment (Vehicles with
Porsche Traction Management PTM)............. 96
Trunk Entrapment........................................ 97
Porsche Communication Management (PCM). 98
Car Telephone and Aftermarket Alarms ....... 100
iPod, USB and AUX.................................... 101
Fire Extinguisher ....................................... 102
HomeLink................................................. 103
Automatic Air Conditioning System,
Heated Rear Window/
Door Mirror Heating........................ 105
Automatic Air Conditioning System ............. 106
Central and Side Vents............................... 109
Fresh-air Intake ......................................... 109
Heated Rear Window/Door Mirror Heating... 110
Instruments, On-Board Computer,
Warnings ....................................... 111
Instrument Panel USA Models..................... 112
Instrument Panel Canada Models................ 114
Engine Oil Temperature.............................. 116
Automatic Speed Control Indicator light ...... 116
Instrument Illumination............................... 116
Trip Odometer........................................... 117
Table of Contents 7
Speedometer ............................................ 118
Changing over between Miles / Kilometers .. 118
Tachometer............................................... 119
Turn Signal Indicator Light .......................... 119
High Beam Indicator Light........................... 119
Gear Shift Indicator “A”
(in vehicles with manual transmission).......... 119
Cooling System ......................................... 120
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK)................... 121
Fuel.......................................................... 122
Clock ........................................................123
Outside Temperature ..................................123
Engine Oil Pressure.................................... 124
Check Engine (Emission Control) .................125
On-Board Computer (BC) ............................126
Warnings on the instrument panel
and the on-board computer......................... 158
Shifting Gears................................. 167
Manual Transmission, Clutch....................... 168
Drive-Off Assistant ..................................... 169
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK)................... 170
Mobile Roofs.................................. 177
Lifting/Sliding Roof .................................... 178
Convertible Top ......................................... 181
Emergency operation of the convertible top. 183
Windstop................................................... 190
Hardtop .................................................... 194
Targa........................................................ 200
Roof Transport System............................... 204
Maintenance, Car Care................... 205
Exercise Extreme Caution when Working
on your Vehicle.......................................... 206
Coolant Level............................................. 207
Engine Oil.................................................. 208
Engine Oil Level......................................... 208
Engine Oil Recommendation........................ 210
Brake Fluid Level........................................ 212
Fuel Economy............................................ 214
Operating your Porsche in other Countries... 214
Fuel Recommendations .............................. 216
Portable Fuel Containers............................. 217
Fuel Evaporation Control............................. 217
Emission Control System............................ 218
How Emission Control Works ...................... 219
Washer Fluid.............................................. 220
Power Steering.......................................... 221
Air Filter.................................................... 222
Combination Filter...................................... 222
Fluids/Oils for Manual Transmission
and Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK)............. 222
Wiper Blades............................................. 223
Car Care Instructions.................................. 224
Practical Tips, Emergency Service... 233
Exercise Extreme Caution when Working
on your Vehicle.......................................... 234
Tires/Wheels ............................................. 235
Loading Information ................................... 246
Wheel Bolts............................................... 248
Changing a wheel....................................... 249
Flat Tire..................................................... 251
Lifting the Vehicle with a Lifting Platform or
Garage Lift ............................................... 254
Spacers 911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S ......... 255
Electrical System ...................................... 257
Battery..................................................... 261
Replacing the remote-control battery .......... 266
Emergency Starting with Jumper Cables ..... 267
Bulb chart................................................. 269
Lights, Replacing Bulbs.............................. 269
Headlights................................................ 270
Number Plate Light.................................... 277
Changing Light-Emitting Diodes and
Long-Life Bulbs ......................................... 277
Adjusting Headlights.................................. 278
Towing ..................................................... 280
Vehicle Identification,
Technical Data ............................... 283
Vehicle Identification.................................. 284
Technical Data .......................................... 286
Diagrams ................................................. 299
8Before driving off...
Dear Porsche Owner
A lot has gone into the manufacture of your
Porsche, including advanced engineering, rigid
quality control and demanding inspections.
These engineering and safety features will be
enhanced by you...
the safe driver...
who knows his/her car and all controls,
who maintains the vehicle properly,
who uses driving skills wisely and always
drives within her/his own capabilities and the
level of familiarity with the vehicle.
You will find helpful hints in this manual on how to
perform most of the checks listed on the following
pages.
If in doubt, have these checks performed by your
authorized Porsche dealer.
Before driving off...
Check the following items first
fTurn the engine off before you attempt any
checks or repairs on the vehicle.
fBe sure the tires are inflated correctly.
Check tires for damage and tire wear.
fSee that wheel bolts are properly tightened
and not loose or missing.
fCheck engine oil level, add if necessary.
Make it a habit to have engine oil checked with
every fuel filling.
fCheck all fluid levels such as windshield
washer and brake fluid levels.
fBe sure the vehicle battery is well charged and
cranks the engine properly.
fCheck all doors and lids for proper operation
and latch them properly.
fCheck, and if necessary replace worn or
cracked wiper blades.
fSee that all windows are clear and unob-
structed.
fCheck air intake slots and area between lug-
gage compartment lid and windshield. Ensure
that these areas are free of snow and ice, so
the heater and the windshield wipers work
properly.
fIf a child will be riding in the vehicle, check
child seat/child seat restraint system to ensure
that restraints are properly adjusted.
fChild restraint systems will not fit into the
Sports bucket seat.
Do not install a child restraint system in the
Sports bucket seat.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be equipped
with the LATCH system and thus the airbag
system cannot be manually deactivated.
fCheck all exterior and interior lights for opera-
tion and that the lenses are clean.
fCheck the headlights for proper aim, and if
necessary, have them adjusted.
fCheck under the vehicle for leaks.
fBe sure all luggage is stowed securely.
Emergency equipment
It is good practice to carry emergency equipment
in your vehicle.
Some of the items you should have are:
window scraper, snow brush, container or bag of
sand or salt, emergency light, small shovel, first-
aid kit, etc.
Before driving off... 9
In the driver’s seat...
fCheck operation of the horn.
fPosition seat for easy reach of foot pedals and
controls.
To reduce the possibility of injury from the
airbag deployment, you should always sit back
as far from the steering wheel as is practical,
while still maintaining full vehicle control.
fAdjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors.
fBuckle your safety belts.
fCheck operation of the foot and parking brake.
fCheck all warning and indicator lights with
ignition on and engine not running.
fStart engine and check all warning displays for
warning symbols.
fNever leave an idling car unattended.
fLock doors from inside, especially with chil-
dren in the car to prevent inadvertent opening
of doors from inside or outside.
Drive with doors locked.
On the road...
fNever drive after you have consumed alcohol
or drugs.
fAlways have your safety belt fastened.
fAlways drive defensively.
Expect the unexpected.
fUse signals to indicate turns and lane changes.
fTurn on headlights at dusk or when the driving
conditions warrant it.
fAlways keep a safe distance from the vehicle in
front of you, depending on traffic, road and
weather conditions.
fReduce speed at night and during inclement
weather.
Driving in wet weather requires caution and re-
duced speeds, particularly on roads with
standing water, as the handling characteristics
of the vehicle may be impaired due to hydro-
planing of the tires.
fAlways observe speed limits and obey road
signs and traffic laws.
fWhen tired, get well off the road, stop and take
a rest. Turn the engine off. Do not sit in the ve-
hicle with engine idling.
Please see the chapter “ENGINE EXHAUST” on
Page 5.
fWhen parked, always set the parking brake.
Move the PDK selector lever to ”P“ or the gear-
shift lever to reverse or first gear.
On hills also turn the front wheels toward the
curb.
fWhen emergency repairs become necessary,
move the vehicle well off the road. Turn on the
emergency flasher and use other warning de-
vices to alert other motorists. Do not park or
operate the vehicle in areas where the hot ex-
haust system may come in contact with dry
grass, brush, fuel spill or other flammable ma-
terial.
fMake it a habit to have the engine oil checked
with every refueling.
10 Before driving off...
Break in hints for the first
2,000 miles/3,000 kilometers
The following tips will be helpful in obtaining opti-
mum performance from your new Porsche.
Despite the most modern, high-precision manufac-
turing methods, the moving parts must still wear
in with each other. This wearing-in occurs mainly in
the first 2,000 miles/3,000 kilometers.
Therefore:
fPreferably take longer trips.
fAvoid frequent cold starts with short-distance
driving whenever possible.
fAvoid full throttle starts and abrupt stops.
fDo not exceed maximum engine speed of
4,200 rpm (revolutions per minute).
fDo not run a cold engine at high rpm either in
Neutral or in gear.
fDo not let the engine labor, especially when
driving uphill. Shift to the next lower gear in
time (use the most favorable rpm range).
fNever lug the engine in high gear at low
speeds. This rule applies at all times, not just
during the break-in period.
fDo not participate in motor racing events,
sports driving schools, etc. during the first
2,000 miles/3,000 kilometers.
There may be a slight stiffness in the steering,
gear-shifting or other controls during the break-in
period which will gradually disappear.
Break in brake pads and brake discs
New brake pads and discs have to be “broken in”,
and therefore only attain optimal friction when the
car has covered several hundred miles or km.
The slightly reduced braking ability must be com-
pensated for by pressing the brake pedal harder.
This also applies whenever the brake pads and
brake discs are replaced.
New tires
New tires do not have maximum traction. They
tend to be slippery.
fBreak in new tires by driving at moderate
speeds during the first 60 to 120 miles/100 to
200 km. Longer braking distances must be an-
ticipated.
Engine oil and fuel consumption
During the break-in period oil and fuel consump-
tion may be higher than normal.
As always, the rate of oil consumption depends on
the quality and viscosity of oil, the speed at which
the engine is operated, the climate and road con-
ditions, as well as the amount of dilution and oxi-
dation of the lubricant.
fMake a habit of checking engine oil with every
refueling, add if necessary.
Before driving off... 11
1 Inner door handle, Page 18
2 Power windows, Page 25
3 Door mirror control, Page 27
4 Hands-free microphone
5 Diagnostic socket (OBD)
6 Front and rear lid release, Page 93
7 Steering-wheel adjustment, Page 37
8 Seat height adjustment, Page 30
9 Backrest angle adjustment, Page 30
10 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment, Page 30
12 Before driving off...
1 Light switch, Page 80
2 Ignition/starter switch, Page 74
3 Turn signal/headlight dimmer,
flasher lever, Page 82
4 Operating lever for on-board computer,
Page 128
5Horn
6 Operating lever for automatic speed control,
Page 86
7 Wiper/washer lever, rear window wiper,
Page 83
8 Stopwatch, Page 138
9 Interior temperature sensor
10 Emergency flasher switch, Page 79
11 Central locking button, readiness display for
alarm system, Page 19
12 Cupholder, Page 88
13 Seat heating/Seat ventilation left/right,
Page 35
14 Operating panel for air conditioning, Page 108
15 Sport/Sport Plus program, Page 64
Rear spoiler, Page 69
Porsche Active Suspension Management
(PASM), Page 69
Porsche Stability Management
(PSM), Page 66
Sports exhaust system, Page 57
Operation, Safety 13
Operation, Safety
Keys........................................................... 15
Security Wheel Bolts .................................... 15
Doors ......................................................... 18
Central Locking ........................................... 19
Alarm System,
Passenger Compartment Monitoring ............. 23
Power Windows........................................... 25
Mirrors........................................................ 27
Rear Window Defogger, Door Mirror Heating.. 29
Seat Adjustment and Head Restraints............ 30
Seat Memory............................................... 33
Heated Seats .............................................. 35
Seat Ventilation............................................ 36
Rear Seat Backrests.................................... 37
Steering Wheel Adjustment........................... 37
Steering Wheel Heating................................ 38
Multi-Functional Steering Wheel..................... 39
Sun Visors................................................... 40
Safety Belts................................................. 41
Airbag Systems ........................................... 44
Child Restraint Systems................................ 50
LATCH System
Child seat bracket on the passenger’s seat.... 54
Child Restraint Anchorages........................... 55
Rollover Protection System........................... 56
Sports Exhaust System................................ 57
Parking Brake.............................................. 57
Brakes........................................................ 58
ABS Brake System (Antilock Brake System) ... 61
Clutch Pedal................................................ 62
Porsche Traction Management (PTM)............. 63
Sport Mode................................................. 64
Porsche Stability Management (PSM)............. 66
Porsche Active Suspension Management
(PASM)........................................................ 69
Retractable Rear Spoiler............................... 69
Interior Lights.............................................. 71
Parking Aids................................................ 72
Ignition/Starter Switch with
anti-theft Steering Lock ................................ 74
Starting Procedures..................................... 77
Stopping Engine .......................................... 78
Emergency Flasher Switch............................ 79
Light Switch ................................................ 80
Welcome Home Lighting............................... 81
Automatic Headlight Beam Adjustment .......... 81
Turn Signal / Headlight Dimmer /
Parking light / Flasher Lever......................... 82
Windshield Wiper / Washer Lever.................. 83
Automatic Speed Control.............................. 86
Cupholder ................................................... 88
Ashtray....................................................... 89
Cigarette Lighter.......................................... 90
Storage in the Passenger Compartment ........ 91
Luggage Compartment Lid and
Engine Compartment Lid.............................. 93
Luggage Compartment (Vehicles without
Porsche Traction Management PTM).............. 95
Luggage Compartment (Vehicles with
Porsche Traction Management PTM).............. 96
Trunk Entrapment ........................................ 97
Porsche Communication Management (PCM).. 98
Car Telephone and Aftermarket Alarms........ 100
iPod, USB and AUX .................................... 101
Fire Extinguisher........................................ 102
HomeLink.................................................. 103
14 Operation, Safety
Never invite car theft!
An unlocked car with the key in the ignition lock
invites car theft.
A steering wheel lock and a gong alarm are
standard equipment in your Porsche.
The gong alarm will sound if you open the driver’s
door while the key is still in the ignition lock. It is
your reminder to pull the key out of the ignition
lock and to lock the doors.
Warning!
Any uncontrolled movement of the vehicle
may result in property damage, serious per-
sonal injury or death.
Never leave your vehicle unattended with the
key in the ignition lock, especially if children
and/or pets are left unattended in the vehi-
cle. They can operate power windows and
other controls. If the engine is left running,
they may accidentally engage the shift lever.
Serious personal injury or death could result
from loss of control of the vehicle.
fAlways remove the ignition key.
fAlways set the parking brake.
fLock the doors with the remote control.
Warning!
Risk of a serious accident.
The steering column will lock when you re-
move the key while you are driving or as the
car is rolling to a stop. You will not be able to
steer the car.
Serious personal injury or death could result
from loss of control of the vehicle.
fNever remove the key from the steering lock
while you are driving.
To protect your vehicle and your possessions
from theft, you should always proceed as
follows when leaving your vehicle:
fClose windows.
fClose lifting/sliding roof
fClose convertible top (with the convertible top
open, the passenger compartment monitoring
system is always switched off)
fClose the sliding glass roof (Targa) (with the
sliding glass roof open, the passenger com-
partment monitoring system is always
switched off)
fRemove ignition key.
fEngage steering lock.
fLock glove compartment.
fRemove valuables (e.g. car documents, tele-
phone, house keys) from the car.
fLock doors.
Operation, Safety 15
Keys
fPlease see the chapter “ALARM SYSTEM, PAS-
SENGER COMPARTMENT MONITORING” on
Page 23.
fPlease see the chapter “CENTRAL LOCKING”
on Page 19.
Two car keys are supplied with your Porsche.
These keys operate all the locks on your vehicle.
fBe careful with your car keys: do not part with
them except under exceptional circumstances.
fTo avoid battery run-down, always remove the
ignition key from the ignition lock.
Replacement keys
Replacement car keys can be obtained only from
your authorized Porsche dealer, and this can
sometimes be very time-consuming.
You should therefore always keep a spare key on
your person.
Keep it in a safe place (e.g. wallet), but under no
circumstances in or on the vehicle.
The key codes of new keys have to be “reported”
to the car control unit by your authorized Porsche
dealer.
A total of 6 car keys can be reported to the control
unit.
Disabling key codes
If a key is lost, the key codes can be disabled by
an authorized Porsche dealer.
All the remaining car keys are required for this pur-
pose.
Disabling the code ensures that the car can be
started only using authorized keys.
Note
fPlease note that the other locks can still be
opened with the disabled key.
Immobilizer
There is a transponder (an electronic component)
in the key grip, containing a stored code.
When the ignition is switched on, the ignition lock
checks the code.
The immobilizer can be deactivated and the en-
gine started only using an authorized ignition key.
Switching off the immobilizer
fInsert the ignition key into the ignition lock.
If the ignition is left on for more than 2 minutes
without the engine being started, the immobilizer
is switched on again.
fIf this happens, turn the ignition key back to
position 3 (ignition off) before starting the
engine. The immobilizer is switched off again,
and the engine can be started.
fPlease see the chapter “IGNITION/STARTER
SWITCH WITH ANTI-THEFT STEERING LOCK”
on Page 74.
Switching on the immobilizer
fRemove ignition key.
Security Wheel Bolts
fIf wheels have to be removed during a work-
shop visit, do not forget to hand over the sock-
et for the security wheel bolts along with the
car key.
16 Operation, Safety
1- Central locking button
2- Luggage compartment lid button
3- Button for glass rear hatch (Targa)
4- Light-emitting diode
Key with Radio Remote Control
Unlocking the vehicle
fPress button 1.
Locking the vehicle
fPress button 1.
Switching off the alarm system if it is
triggered accidentally
fPress button 1.
Unlocking luggage compartment lid or
glass rear hatch (Targa)
fLuggage compartment lid: Press button 2 for
approx. two seconds.
fGlass rear hatch (Targa): Press button 3 for
approx. two seconds.
If the vehicle was locked, it is unlocked simultane-
ously with the luggage compartment/glass rear
hatch (Targa).
In vehicles with seat memory the stored seat and
door mirror positions are automatically set.
The vehicle will be locked again approx.
80 seconds after the luggage compartment/
glass rear hatch (Targa) is closed if none of the
doors was opened.
Note
Your authorized Porsche dealer can program fur-
ther types of unlocking for the luggage compart-
ment/glass rear hatch (Targa).
Type 1
The relocking time of the doors can be adjusted to
suit your individual requirements:
10 - 100 seconds.
Type 2
The doors stay locked when the luggage compart-
ment/glass rear hatch (Targa) is unlocked.
Operation, Safety 17
The remote-control standby function
switches off after 7 days
If the vehicle is not started or unlocked with the re-
mote control within 7 days, the remote control
standby function is switched off (to prevent dis-
charging of the vehicle battery).
1. In this case, unlock the driver’s door with the
key at the door lock.
Leave the door closed in order to prevent the
alarm system from being triggered.
2. Press button 1 on the remote control.
The remote control is now activated again and
the alarm system is switched off.
Operational readiness of the remote
control interrupted
Encoded data is transmitted to the vehicle each
time the wireless remote control is operated. If the
remote control is operated too often outside the
range of the vehicle, this can result in the central
locking system no longer responding.
In this case, the remote control and vehicle must
be synchronized.
Carrying out the synchronization
1. Unlock the driver's door with the key at the
door lock.
2. Open driver’s door and insert the ignition key
into the ignition lock within 10 seconds to
prevent the alarm system from being
triggered.
3. With the key inserted, press and hold button 1
on the remote control for approx. 5 seconds.
The synchronization is now complete.
18 Operation, Safety
Doors
If the door windows are closed, they will be auto-
matically opened by a few millimeters when the
doors are opened and, when the doors are closed,
they will be closed again. This makes it easier to
open and close the doors and protects the seals.
fTherefore, you should pull the door handle
slowly so that the door window can be lowered
before the door is opened.
Opening doors from outside
fUnlock vehicle with the remote control.
fSlowly pull door handle A.
Opening unlocked doors from inside
fSlowly pull door handle B.
Opening locked doors from inside
fSlowly pull door handle B twice.
fPlease see the chapter “LOCKING CONDITI-
ONS” on Page 20.
Door storage tray
Opening storage tray
fOpen the cover C.
Keep the door storage tray C closed while driving
for safety reasons.
Operation, Safety 19
Central Locking
This device complies with:
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two condi-
tions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. this device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio
or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifi-
cations to this equipment.
Such modification could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
Warning!
Any changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by Porsche could void the user’s authority
to operate this equipment.
fPlease see the chapter “LOAD SWITCH-OFF AF-
TER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on Page 258.
fPlease see the chapter “SEAT MEMORY” on
Page 33.
Both car doors and the filler flap can be centrally
unlocked or locked with the remote control.
The vehicle cannot be locked if the driver’s door is
not completely closed.
A short signal from the alarm horn will draw
your attention to the fact that the following
components are not completely closed when you
try to lock the vehicle:
Driver’s door (the vehicle cannot be locked if
the driver’s door is not completely closed).
Passenger’s door
Luggage compartment lid
Engine compartment lid
Glass rear hatch (Targa)
Glove compartment
Unlocking the vehicle by using the key in the door
lock and opening the door may activate the alarm
system within 10 seconds.
Note
fOn vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package
Plus, the PCM can be used to activate auto-
matic door locking.
Please observe the chapter “Individual Memo-
ry” in the separate PCM operating instructions.
Automatic relocking
If the car is unlocked by remote control and none
of the car doors is opened within approx.
100 seconds, automatic relocking takes place.
This relocking time can be adapted to your individ-
ual requirements (10 - 100 seconds) by an author-
ized Porsche dealer.
20 Operation, Safety
Locking conditions
fLock car once.
The doors cannot be opened from the outside.
Alarm system and passenger compartment
monitoring are switched on.
If a person or animal remains in the vehicle:
fQuickly lock car twice.
The doors cannot be opened from the outside.
The passenger compartment monitoring is
switched off.
Unlocking the door with the inner door
handle
Any person remaining in the locked car can open
the door with the inner door handle:
1. Pull inner door handle once to unlock door
lock.
2. Pull inner door handle again to open door.
Note
fInform any person remaining in the car that the
alarm system will be triggered if the door is
opened.
Malfunction of the remote control
The remote control may not function correctly due
to local radio wave interference. The vehicle will
then not lock properly.
This can be identified by the missing locking
sound and the missing check-back signal of the
emergency flasher.
If this should occur:
fLock the vehicle with the key in the door.
Emergency operation – opening
fUnlock the driver’s door with the key at the
door lock.
Open door within 20 seconds and insert the
ignition key into the ignition lock within
10 seconds to prevent the alarm system from
being triggered.
Note on operation
If the door is not opened within approx.
20 seconds, automatic relocking takes place.
The alarm system will be triggered by the next
unlocking of the door:
fInsert the ignition key into the ignition lock to
switch off the alarm system.
Emergency operation – closing
fLock the driver’s door with the key at the door
lock.
If there is a defect in the central locking sys-
tem, all functioning elements of the central
locking system will be locked.
The alarm system is switched on.
The passenger compartment monitoring sys-
tem is switched off.
The fault should be remedied immediately at an
authorized Porsche dealer.
Operation, Safety 21
Indication by emergency flasher and
alarm horn
If the remote control is used for unlocking or
locking, a response is provided by the emergency
flasher:
Unlocking – single flash.
Locking – double flash.
Locking twice – continuous illumination for ap-
prox. 2 seconds.
The passenger compartment monitoring is
switched off.
Fault indication
A double horn signal during locking indicates a
defect in the central locking or alarm system.
Have the defect remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Overload protection
If the central locking system is operated more
than ten times within a minute, further operation is
blocked for 30 seconds.
Central locking button
The central locking button on the dashboard lets
you lock and unlock both doors electrically.
Note
If the doors are locked with the key or remote con-
trol, they can not be opened by pressing the cen-
tral locking button.
Locking
fPress the central locking button.
Indicator light in the button lights up if ignition
is on.
Unlocking
fPress the central locking button.
Indicator light goes out.
If the doors were locked with the central locking
button, they can be opened by pulling the inner
door handle:
1. Pull inner door handle once to unlock door
lock.
2. Pull inner door handle again to open door.
22 Operation, Safety
Automatic door locking
Your authorized Porsche dealer can program di-
verse types of automatic door locking in the con-
trol unit of the central locking system:
Type 1
Doors lock automatically when the ignition is
switched on.
Type 2
Doors lock automatically when a speed of
3 - 6 mph (5 - 10 km/h) is exceeded.
Type 3
Doors lock automatically when the ignition is
switched on. If doors are opened with the engine
running, they lock again automatically when a
speed of 3 - 6 mph (5 - 10 km/h) is exceeded.
Type 4
The doors do not lock automatically.
Note
Automatically locked doors can be unlocked with
the central locking button or opened by pulling on
the inside door handle twice.
fOn vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package
Plus, the PCM can be used to activate automat-
ic door locking.
Please observe the chapter “Individual Memo-
ry” in the separate PCM operating instructions.
Warning!
In an emergency situation where you need to
exit the car through an automatically locked
door, remember the following procedure to
open the door.
fUnlock the doors by pressing the central lock-
ing button or
fpull the inside door handle twice to open the
door.
Operation, Safety 23
A- Light-emitting diode for alarm system
Alarm System,
Passenger Compartment
Monitoring
This device complies with:
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two condi-
tions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. this device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio
or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifi-
cations to this equipment.
Such modification could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
Warning!
Any changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by Porsche could void the user’s authority
to operate this equipment.
The alarm system and passenger compartment
monitoring system are switched on when the
doors are locked with the key or remote control.
fPlease see the chapter “CENTRAL LOCKING”
on Page 19.
Unlocking the vehicle by using the key in the
door lock and opening the door may activate
the alarm system within 10 seconds.
Switching off the alarm system if it is
triggered accidentally
fUnlock the vehicle with the remote control.
The alarm system and passenger compartment
monitoring system are switched off automatically
when the doors are unlocked.
Cabriolet, Targa
The passenger compartment monitoring system
is always switched off when the convertible top or
sliding glass roof (Targa) is open.
Function indication
If the alarm system is activated, light-emitting
diode A in the central locking switch flashes.
If, after locking, the light-emitting diode does not
flash or, after ten seconds, it emits double flash-
es, then not all alarm contacts are closed.
Additionally, a brief horn signal sounds.
When the doors are unlocked, the alarm system
and passenger compartment monitoring system
are switched off and the light-emitting diode goes
off.
24 Operation, Safety
When the alarm is armed, the following
areas are monitored
Doors
Luggage compartment lid
Engine compartment lid
Convertible-top lock (Cabriolet)
Glass rear hatch (Targa)
Glove compartment
Passenger compartment
If one of these alarm contacts is interrupted, the
alarm horn sounds for approximately 3 minutes.
Additionally, the emergency flasher flashes and
the passenger compartment light lightes for ap-
proximately five minutes.
When the alarm is triggered, the light-emitting
diode changes over to double flashes.
In order not to limit the action range of the passen-
ger compartment monitoring system:
fDo not fold the front seat backrests forward.
Deactivating the passenger compartment
monitoring system for one locking
process
If a person or animal remains in the car while it is
locked, the passenger compartment monitoring
system must be switched off.
fQuickly lock car twice.
The doors are locked but can be opened from
the inside:
1. Pull inner door handle once to unlock door
lock.
2. Pull inner door handle again to open door.
Note
fInform any person remaining in the car that the
alarm system will be triggered if the door is
opened.
Fault indication
A double horn signal during locking indicates a
defect in the central locking or alarm system.
fHave the defect remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Operation, Safety 25
A - Power window in driver’s door
B - Power window in passenger’s door
C - Cabriolet: Switching button for front/rear power
windows
Power Windows
Warning!
Risk of injury when the door windows close.
This applies especially if the windows are
closed with the one-touch operation, be-
cause with this function the window goes up
automatically.
fMake sure that fingers, hands, arms or other
parts are not in the way when the windows are
closed.
fRemove the ignition key to shut off power to
the window switches when the vehicle is not
attended by a responsible person. Uninformed
persons could injure themselves by operating
the power windows.
fIn case of danger, release the button on the
car key immediately.
fDo not leave children in the car unattended.
Risk of an accident.
fDo not put anything on or near the windows
that may interfere with the driver’s vision.
Readiness for operation of power windows
When the ignition is switched on
(engine switched on or off) or
with doors closed and ignition key withdrawn,
but only until door is first opened.
One-touch operation for closing the door
windows is available only when the ignition is
switched on.
Cabriolet
When the convertible top is open, the rear side
windows can only be closed if the door windows
are closed.
26 Operation, Safety
Opening/closing windows
fFor the Cabriolet, select front or rear power
windows with rocker switch C.
The selection is displayed by the respective
light-emitting diode.
The two rocker switches A and B in the driver’s
door and the switch in the passenger’s door have
a two-stage function:
Opening
fPress the rocker switch down to the first stage
until the window has reached the desired
position.
Closing
fPress the rocker switch upwards to the first
stage until the window has reached the desired
position.
One-touch operation
fPress the rocker switch upwards or
downwards to the second stage.
Window moves to its final position.
Press again to stop the window in the desired
position.
Coupé, Targa
One-touch operation for closing the passenger’s
window is available once the window is approxi-
mately half-way closed.
Anti-crushing protection
If a side window is blocked during closing, it will
stop and open again by about an inch.
Warning!
Risk of serious personal injuries.
If the rocker switch is pressed again within
10 seconds of the window being blocked, the
window will close with its full closing force.
Anti-crushing protection is disabled.
fOnce the anti-crushing protection acts to stop
the window and opens it slightly, do not press
the rocker switch again within 10 seconds
without checking to make sure that nothing is
blocking the path of the window.
The window will close with full closing force.
One-touch operation is disabled for 10 seconds
after blockage of a side window.
Automatic window lowering
fPlease see the chapter “DOORS” on Page 18.
fPlease see the chapter “CONVERTIBLE TOP”
on Page 181.
Storing end position of the windows
If the battery is disconnected and reconnected,
the windows will not be raised automatically when
the door is closed.
1. Close the windows with the rocker switch
once.
2. Press the rocker switch upwards again to store
the end position of the windows in the control
unit.
Operation, Safety 27
Mirrors
Inside mirror
When the mirror is being adjusted, the anti-glare
lever A must point forward.
Basic position: lever forward
Anti-glare position: lever back
Door mirrors
Before driving the vehicle, adjust the outside and
inside mirrors.
It is important for safe driving that you have clear,
unobstructed vision to the rear.
Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
fDo not put anything on or near the windows or
the mirrors that may interfere with the driver’s
vision.
Risk of damage to the door mirrors when
washing the vehicle in a car wash.
fFold in door mirrors before using the car wash.
Adjusting door mirrors
1. Switch on ignition.
2. By turning the control switch A, select the driv-
er’s side or the passenger’s side.
3. Move the door mirror glasses in the appropri-
ate direction by tilting the control switch.
If the electrical adjustment facility fails
fAdjust mirror by pressing on the mirror face.
Automatically swivelling down mirror on
the passenger’s side
fPlease see the chapter “PARKING AIDS” on
Page 72.
fPlease see the chapter “SEAT MEMORY” on
Page 33.
28 Operation, Safety
Folding in door mirrors
Warning!
Danger of injury to fingers if the mirror
accidentally flips back when being folded in.
fExercise extreme caution when folding in mir-
ror by hand. Do not let go of the mirror before
the locking lever is locked or the mirror is fully
unfolded.
1. Push mirror towards the door window and
continue to hold it (high spring force).
2. Swivel the locking lever up to the stop and
slowly let go of the mirror.
Unfolding door mirrors
1. Push mirror towards the door window and
continue to hold it (high spring force). The
locking lever disengages automatically.
2. Move mirror back to unfolded position by hand.
Do not let go of the mirror beforehand.
A-Sensor
B- Switch for automatic anti-glare operation
C- Light-emitting diode
Automatic Anti-Glare Interior
Mirror and Door Mirror
Sensors on the front and rear sides of the interior
mirror measure the incident light.
The mirrors automatically change to anti-glare po-
sition or revert to their normal state, depending on
the light intensity.
When reverse gear is selected, automatic anti-
glare operation is switched off.
Operation, Safety 29
Note
The incident light in the area of the sensors must
not be restricted, e.g. by stickers on the wind-
shield.
Switching off the automatic anti-glare
operation
fPress switch B.
Light-emitting diode C goes out.
Switching on the automatic anti-glare
operation
fPress switch B.
Light-emitting diode C lights up.
Warning!
Risk of injury. Electrolyte fluid can emerge
from a broken mirror glass.
This fluid irritates the skin and eyes.
fIf the electrolyte fluid should come into contact
with the eyes or skin, immediately rinse it off
with clean water.
See a doctor if necessary.
Risk of damage to the paintwork, leather and
plastic parts. Electrolyte fluid can be
removed only while it is still wet.
fClean the affected parts with water.
The mirror heater is ready for operation when the
ignition is on.
Switching on
fPress button.
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
After approx. 15 minutes, the heater switches off
automatically.
The heater can be switched back on by pressing
the button again.
Switching off
fPress button.
The light-emitting diode in the button goes out.
Rear Window Defogger,
Door Mirror Heating
30 Operation, Safety
Seat Adjustment and Head
Restraints
Warning!
The seat may move unexpectedly if you
attempt to adjust while driving. This could
cause sudden loss of control, resulting in se-
rious personal injury or death.
fDo not adjust seats while the vehicle is in mo-
tion.
The backrest locks must be engaged at all
times while the vehicle is in motion.
Safety belts only offer protection when the
backrest is upright and the belts are properly
positioned on the body.
Improperly positioned safety belts or safety
belts worn by passengers in an excessively
reclined position can cause serious personal
injury or death in an accident.
fDo not operate the car with the driver or
passenger backrests excessively reclined
(see “Seat position”).
Risk of injury if persons or animals are in the
movement range of the seat during seat
adjustment.
fAdjust the seat so that no-one is put at risk.
Caution!
Risk of damage to windshield, sun visor,
windstop, etc. when the seat is adjusted or
folded back or forward.
fAdjust the seat so that the seat backrest is not
in contact with any other object.
The driver and front passenger seats provide
integrated head restraints in the backrests. The
head restraints are not adjustable. The rear seats
do not provide head restraints.
Warning!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle's seat until the
head restraints and backrests, respectively, are
placed in their proper positions so that the risk of
neck injuries is minimized in the event of a crash.
For proper positioning of the head restraint, the
seatback's inclination should be adjusted such
that the head restraint is in an upright position.
Driver and passengers should be seated upright
and in the center of their seats.
Seat position
An ergonomically correct sitting position is
important for safe and fatigue-free driving.
We recommend the following procedure for adjust-
ing the driver’s seat to suit individual
requirements:
1. Vehicles with manual transmission:
Adjust the seat until, with the clutch pedal fully
depressed, your leg remains at a slight angle.
Vehicles with Porsche Doppelkupplung
(PDK):
Adjust the seat until, with your left foot on the
footrest, your left leg remains at a slight angle.
2. Rest your outstretched arm on the steering
wheel.
Set the backrest angle (not applicable for
Sports bucket seat) and the steering-wheel
position so that your wrist rests on the outer
rim of the steering wheel. At the same time,
the shoulders must still be in noticeable
contact with the backrest.
3. Adjust the seat height (not applicable for
Sports bucket seat) to give yourself enough
headroom and a good overview of the vehicle.
4. Electrically adjustable seat:
Adjust the seat angle until your thighs rest
lightly on the seat cushion.
Operation, Safety 31
Standard seat/sports seat
A Seat height
fUse lever A in a pumping movement:
Upwards – seat moves upwards
Downwards – seat moves downwards
B Fore and aft
fRaise locking lever B.
Move seat to desired position and release
lever.
Ensure that the seat engages correctly.
C Backrest angle
fOperate switch C until the desired backrest
angle is reached.
Seat backrest
Folding forward
fPull up lever H in the side part of the backrest
and fold the backrest forward.
Folding back
fTilt back and engage the backrest so that it
cannot tip forward when the car is braked.
Comfort seat with driver seat memory/
Adaptive sports seat with driver seat
memory
fPress the switch in the direction indicated by
the arrow until the desired setting is reached.
A Seat height adjustment
B Fore-and-aft position adjustment
C Seat angle adjustment
D Backrest angle adjustment
32 Operation, Safety
E Lumbar support
(pelvis and spinal column support)
To permit a relaxed sitting posture, the backrest
curvature is continuously adjustable in vertical and
horizontal directions for individual pelvis and
spinal column support.
fPress the switch in the direction indicated by
the arrow until the desired backrest curvature
is reached.
F Adjusting the backrest side bolsters
(adaptive sports seat only)
fPush forward or pull backward switch F until
the side bolsters are adjusted to the shape of
the body.
G Adjusting the seat cushion side bolsters
(adaptive sports seat only)
fPush forward or pull backward switch G until
the side bolsters are adjusted to the shape of
the body.
Seat backrest
Folding forward
fPull up lever H in the side part of the backrest
and fold the backrest forward.
Folding back
fTilt back and engage the backrest so that it
cannot tip forward when the car is braked.
Sports bucket seat
fDo not install a child restraint system in
the Sports bucket seat.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be
equipped with the LATCH system.
A Fore and aft adjustment
fRaise locking lever A.
Move seat to desired position and release
lever.
Ensure that the seat engages correctly.
BBackrest
Folding forward
fPull loop B in the side part of the backrest and
fold the backrest forward.
Folding back
fTilt back and engage the backrest so that it
cannot tip forward when the car is braked.
Operation, Safety 33
M - Memory button
1 - Key button
2, 3 - Person buttons
Seat Memory
Individual seat and door mirror settings can be
stored and recalled for the driver’s position.
You cannot store the position of the side bolsters
of the adaptive sports seat.
Further individual setting options are available in
vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus.
fPlease observe the chapter “Individual
Memory” in the separate PCM operating
instructions.
Warning!
Risk of crushing due to uncontrolled recall of
a seat setting.
fCancel automatic adjustment by pressing any
of the seat adjustment buttons.
fDo not leave children in the vehicle unattended.
Operation with person buttons 2, 3
Storing seat position
1. Switch on ignition.
Reverse gear must not be engaged.
2. Set the desired seat and door-mirror positions.
3. Keep memory button M depressed and also
press person button 2 or 3 until an audible
signal confirms that the position has been
stored.
The individual setting is now stored under the
desired person button.
Recalling seat position
The seat position can only be called up when the
vehicle is stationary.
1. Switch on the ignition or
open the driver’s door.
2. Press person button until the seat has reached
its final position.
The setting of door mirrors and lumbar
support will be completed even if the person
button is not kept depressed.
Note
Automatic seat adjustment can be interrupted
immediately by releasing the button.
34 Operation, Safety
Operating with the remote control of the
vehicle key
Each remote control (up to six) can be assigned an
individual seat and door mirror position.
The stored seat and door mirror position is set au-
tomatically when the vehicle is unlocked using the
corresponding remote control.
Storing seat position
1. Switch the ignition on with the desired car key.
Reverse gear must not be engaged.
2. Set the desired seat and door-mirror positions.
3. Keep memory button M depressed and also
press key button 1 until an audible signal
confirms that the position has been stored.
The individual setting is now assigned to this
remote control and to the key button.
It is necessary to wait for at least 15 seconds
between locking and unlocking the door.
Storing individual lowered position of the
passenger’s door mirror as a parking aid
Once the driver's seat setting has been stored, an
individual lowered position of the passenger's
door mirror may be stored for driving in reverse:
1. Apply the handbrake.
2. Switch the ignition on with the desired car key.
3. Engage reverse gear.
4. Select passenger side with mirror switch.
The passenger’s mirror swivels downwards.
5. Set passenger’s door mirror to desired final
position.
6. Keep memory button M depressed and also
press key button 1 until an audible signal
confirms that the position has been stored.
The individual setting is now assigned to this
remote control and to the key button.
Recalling seat position
fUnlock the locked vehicle or the luggage
compartment with the remote control.
The stored seat position is automatically set.
The seat position assigned to a remote control
can also be recalled with the key button 1 if the
corresponding key was used to switch on the
ignition.
If no seat position has been assigned to a remote
control, the key button will not work.
Note on operation
Automatic seat adjustment can be interrupted
immediately:
fby switching on the ignition,
fby pressing the central locking button,
fby pressing any memory or seat adjustment
button.
Clearing the stored seat position
1. Switch the ignition on with the desired car key.
2. Press memory button twice and key button 1
once consecutively.
Operation, Safety 35
A- Seat heating, left
B-Seat heating, right
Heated Seats
Two-stage seat heating is ready for operation
when the engine is running.
The yellow light-emitting diodes in the button show
which stage is currently activated.
Switching on
High heating power
fPress button once.
Both light-emitting diodes in the button
light up.
Low heating power
fPress button twice.
One light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
Switching off
fPress button as often as necessary until the
light-emitting diodes go out.
36 Operation, Safety
Seat Ventilation
The three-stage seat ventilation is ready for opera-
tion when the engine is running and from an
ambient cabin temperature of 58 °F (15 °C).
The three stages are controlled with the buttons
on the control panel for the air conditioning.
The blue light-emitting diodes in the buttons show
which stage is currently activated.
Note
The full effect of the seat ventilation can be
achieved only if you are wearing breathable
clothing.
Seat ventilation and seat heating can be used at
the same time and provide excellent seating
comfort when used in the right combination.
fDo not use protective seat covers. A- Seat ventilation, left
B- Seat ventilation, right
Switching on seat ventilation
High ventilation
fPress button once.
Three light-emitting diodes light up.
Medium ventilation
fPress button twice.
Two light-emitting diodes light up.
Low ventilation
fPress button three times.
One light-emitting diode lights up.
Switching off seat ventilation
fPress button as often as necessary until all
light-emitting diodes go out.
Operation, Safety 37
Rear Seat Backrests
Extra storage space is gained by folding the rear
seat backrests forward.
Folding forward
fPull lever forward and fold the backrest
forward.
Folding back
fTilt the backrest back until you feel it click into
place. When doing so, make sure that the seat
belt is properly routed (see figure).
Cabriolet
fDo not fold up the rear seat backrests with the
windstop installed.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Warning!
Risk of accident.
The steering wheel may move further than
desired if you attempt to adjust it when
driving.
You can lose control of the vehicle, causing
serious personal injury or death.
fDo not adjust the steering wheel when driving.
Adjusting steering wheel height and
longitudinal direction
1. Insert ignition key fully into ignition lock.
2. Push the locking lever downwards.
3. Adjust steering wheel to fit the chosen
backrest angle and your seat position by
moving the steering wheel up or down and
longitudinally.
4. Swivel locking lever back until you feel it en-
gage.
If necessary, move steering wheel slightly lon-
gitudinally.
38 Operation, Safety
Steering Wheel Heating
The steering wheel heating can be switched on
and off with the button on the rear of the steering
wheel when the ignition is switched on.
Switching on steering wheel heating
fPress button.
The message “Steering wheel heating ON”
is displayed on the on-board computer for
2seconds.
Switching off steering wheel heating
fPress button.
The message “Steering wheel heating OFF”
is displayed on the on-board computer for
2seconds.
Operation, Safety 39
Multi-Functional Steering Wheel
Warning!
There is a danger of accident if you set or
operate the on-board computer, radio,
navigation system, telephone or other
equipment when driving.
Operating these devices while driving could
distract you from traffic and cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
fOperate these components while driving only if
the traffic situation allows you to do so safely.
fCarry out any complicated operating or setting
procedures only while the vehicle is stationary.
Depending on the equipment in your vehicle, you
can use the function keys of the multi-functional
steering wheel to operate the following Porsche
communication systems:
–PCM
– Telephone
CD-Audio, DVD-Audio
Readiness for operation of multi-
functional steering wheel
The multi-functional steering wheel is ready for
operation when the ignition and PCM are switched
on.
Operating the function keys
fPlease read the separate PCM operating
instructions before operating the function
keys.
The rotary knobs at the top left and right of the
steering wheel can also be pressed.
Turn volume control
Upwards – increase volume.
Downwards – decrease volume.
Press volume control
To switch volume/mute on and off.
Turn rotary knob
To select/mark function in the PCM within
a menu. To do this, turn the rotary knob
upward or downward.
Press rotary knob
To activate selected function.
Press screen button
To call the stored PCM function.
The button can be assigned the desired
function in the PCM.
Press Back button
To move back in the PCM menu.
Press Handset Pickup button
To accept a telphone call.
Press Handset Hangup button
To end or refuse a telephone call.
40 Operation, Safety
Sun Visors
fSwing the sun visors down to prevent glare
from the front.
fTo prevent glare from the side, unclip the sun
visor from the inner bracket and swivel round
so that it is in front of the door window.
Vanity mirror
The vanity mirror on the rear of the sun visor is
covered by a lid.
Warning!
Risk of injury in an accident or risk of dam-
age to mirror lid and convertible top.
fKeep the lid closed while driving and when
closing the convertible top.
Risk of damage.
fDo not force the lid beyond its end position.
Coupé, Cabriolet
The vanity mirror illumination is switched on auto-
matically when the cover is opened (arrow).
Targa
The vanity mirror illumination is switched on auto-
matically when the sliding cover is opened
(arrow). The light is switched off when the sun vi-
sor is in its upper or lower end position.
Operation, Safety 41
Safety Belts
Warning!
Always make sure your and your passengers’
safety belts are properly fastened while the
vehicle is in motion.
Failure to follow safety belt warnings may re-
sult in serious personal injury or death.
fFor your and your passengers’ protection, use
safety belts at all times while the vehicle is in
motion.
fUse appropriate child restraint systems for all
small children.
Proper wearing of safety belts
fSafety belts must be positioned on the body as
to restrain the upper body and lap from sliding
forward. Improperly positioned safety belts
can cause serious personal injury or death in
case of an accident.
fThe shoulder belt should always rest on your
upper body. The shoulder belt should never be
worn behind your back or under your arm.
fFor maximum effectiveness, the lap belt
should be worn low across the hips.
fPregnant women should position the belt as
low as possible across the pelvis. Make sure it
is not pressing against the abdomen.
fBelts should not be worn twisted.
fDo not wear belts over rigid or breakable ob-
jects in or on your clothing, such as eye glass-
es, pens, keys, etc. as these may cause injury.
fSeveral layers of heavy clothing may interfere
with proper positioning of belts.
fBelts must not rub against sharp objects or
damage may occur to the belt.
fTwo occupants should never share the same
belt at the same time.
Care and maintenance
fKeep belt buckles free of any obstruction that
may prevent a secure locking.
fBelts that have been subjected to excessive
stretch forces in an accident must be inspect-
ed or replaced to ensure their continued effec-
tiveness in restraining you.
The same applies to belt tensioner systems
which have been triggered.
In addition, the anchor points of the belts
should be checked.
fIf safety belts do not work properly, see your
authorized Porsche dealer immediately.
fIf the belts show damage to webbing, bindings,
buckles or retractors, they should be replaced
to ensure safe operation.
fDo not modify or disassemble the safety belts
in your vehicle.
fThe belts must be kept clean or the retractors
may not work properly.
Please see the chapter “CAR CARE INSTRUC-
TIONS” on Page 224.
fNever bleach or dye safety belts.
fDo not allow safety belts to retract until they
are completely dry after cleaning or this may
cause damage to the belt.
Belt tensioner
Depending on the force of an impact, fastened
front seat safety belts are tightened in an acci-
dent.
The belt tensioners are triggered in:
Front, side and rear impacts of sufficient
severity.
For the Cabriolet, in cases of vehicle rollover.
Note
The belt-tensioner system can be triggered only
once; the system must be replaced afterward.
If there is a fault in the belt-tensioner system, the
airbag warning light lights up.
Work may be performed on the belt-tensioner sys-
tem only by an authorized Porsche dealer.
Smoke is released when the belt tensioners are
triggered. This does not indicate a fire in the
vehicle.
42 Operation, Safety
An audio-visual warning system is interconnect-
ed with the driver’s safety belt.
Every time the ignition is turned on, the gong will
sound for about 6 seconds to remind driver and
passenger to buckle up.
In addition, the gong will sound for approx. 90 sec-
onds if vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph/24 km/h.
The safety belt warning lights in the instrument
panel and on-board computer will go off as soon
as the driver has buckled up.
Inertia reel retractor
The combination lap/shoulder belt with inertia reel
locking mechanism adjusts automatically to your
size and movements as long as the pull on the belt
is slow.
Rapid deceleration during hard braking or a colli-
sion locks the belt. The belt will also lock when you
drive up or down a steep hill or in a sharp curve,
otherwise, the shoulder belt will not inhibit your
upper body movement.
Fastening the safety belt
fAssume a comfortable sitting position.
fPlease see the chapter “SEAT POSITION” on
Page 30.
fThe shoulder belt should always rest on your
upper body. The shoulder belt should never be
worn behind your back or under your arm.
fGrasp belt and pull the belt in a continuous
slow motion across your chest and lap.
fInsert belt tongue into buckle on inboard side
of seat. Push down until it securely locks with
an audible click. Pull the belt to check.
fPull shoulder section to make sure belt fits
snugly across the pelvis.
fBelts should fit snugly across the pelvis and
chest. Make sure there is no slack in the belt.
Releasing the safety belt
fPush in release button (arrow) on buckle. Belt
tongue will spring out of buckle.
fTo release a latched belt, lean back to take the
body pressure off the belt.
fTo store lap/shoulder belt, allow the belt to re-
tract as you guide the latch to its stowed posi-
tion.
fPlease see the chapter “AUTOMATIC LOCKING
RETRACTOR” on Page 53.
Safety Belt Warning System
Operation, Safety 43
Safety belt height adjustment
(Coupé and Targa)
The height of the belt deflectors for the driver’s
seat and passenger’s seat can be adjusted.
Adjust the height of the safety belt so that it runs
across the middle of the shoulder, not against the
neck.
Adjusting belt height
fUpward – push belt deflector up.
fDownward – press button (arrow) and move
belt deflector.
Cleaning the safety belts
If it becomes necessary to clean the belts, you
can use any mild washing agent. Allow the belts to
dry prior to retracting, but avoid direct sunlight.
fOnly use suitable cleaners. If unsuitable
cleaners are used or any attempt is made to
dye or bleach the belts, the webbing may be
weakened and thus constitute a safety risk.
44 Operation, Safety
Airbag Systems
The airbags in combination with the safety belts
make up a safety system which offers the driver
and the passenger the greatest known protection
from injuries in case of accident.
Your vehicle is equipped with a weight sensing sys-
tem for the front passenger's seat in accordance
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
208.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with airbags, the
safety belts must be worn at all times,
because the front airbag system is only deployed
by frontal collisions with an impact of sufficient se-
verity.
Below the deployment threshold of the airbag sys-
tem, and during types of collisions which do not
cause the actuation of the system, the safety belts
provide the primary protection to the occupants
when correctly worn.
Therefore, all persons within the vehicle
must wear safety belts at all times (in many
states, state law requires the use of safety belts).
fPlease see the chapter “SAFETY BELTS” on
Page 41.
The front airbags are located under the padded
steering wheel panel on the driver’s side and, on
the passenger's side, in the dashboard.
The side airbags for the front seats are installed
on the side in the seat backrests.
The head airbags are installed in the door linings.
Danger!
To provide optimal occupant protection, air-
bags must inflate at very high speed. If you
are not wearing your safety belt or are too
close to the airbag when it is deployed, inflat-
ing airbags can result in serious personal in-
jury or death.
fMake sure there are no people, animals or ob-
jects between the driver or passenger and the
area into which the airbag inflates.
fSit back as far from the dashboard or steering
wheel as is practical, while still maintaining full
vehicle control.
fAlways hold the steering wheel by the outer
rim. Never rest your hands on the airbag panel.
fAlways fasten seat belts because triggering
of the airbag system depends on the force and
angle of impact.
fDo not transport heavy objects on or in front of
the passenger’s seat. These could impair the
function of the airbag, the seat belts, and
weight sensing.
fDo not hang objects (e.g. jackets, coats, coat
hangers) over the backrest.
fAlways keep the lid of the door storage com-
partment closed. Objects must not protrude
out of the door storage compartment.
fNo changes may be made to the wiring or
components of the airbag system.
fDo not add any additional coverings or stickers
to the steering wheel or in the area of the pas-
senger’s airbag, side airbags and head air-
bags. Doing so may adversely affect the func-
tioning of the airbag system or cause harm to
the occupants if the airbag system should de-
ploy.
Do not use protective seat covers.
fDo not modify the seat coverings. Do not at-
tach additional cushions, protective coverings,
or pillows to the passenger's seat. Do not affix
things to the passenger's seat or cover it with
other materials. Do not cover the back of the
backrest. Do not make changes to the passen-
ger's seat and to the seat base frame.
fDo not undertake any wiring for electrical ac-
cessory equipment in the vicinity of the airbag
wiring harnesses. Doing so may disable the air-
bag system or cause inadvertent inflation.
fIf the warning light comes on, the airbag sys-
tem should be repaired immediately by your
authorized Porsche dealer.
fAlways keep feet in the footwell while driving.
Do not put feet on the dashboard or the seat
area. Do not lean against the inside of the door
or outside the window while the vehicle is mov-
ing.
Operation, Safety 45
fUsing accessories not approved by Porsche
can cause the weight sensing system to be im-
paired.
fDo not squeeze objects, such as the fire extin-
guisher, or first aid kit under the seat.
fOnly have seats removed and installed by an
authorized Porsche dealer so that weight sens-
ing components will not be damaged.
fGive your passenger all of the information in
this chapter.
Note
Airbag components (e.g. steering wheel, door lin-
ing, seats) may be disassembled only by an autho-
rized Porsche dealer.
When disposing of a used airbag unit, our safety
instructions must be followed. These instructions
can be obtained at any authorized Porsche dealer.
Function of the airbag system
Airbags are a supplemental safety system. Your
primary protection comes from your safety belts.
The front airbags are triggered during a frontal col-
lision of sufficient force and direction.
In the event of a side impact of corresponding
force, the side airbag on the impact side is
triggered.
The inflation process generates the amount of gas
required to fill the airbags at the necessary pres-
sure in fractions of a second.
Airbags help to protect the head and upper body,
while simultaneously damping the motion of the
driver and passenger in the impact direction in the
event of a frontal impact or side impact.
In order to help provide protection in severe colli-
sions which can cause death and serious injury,
airbags must inflate extremely rapidly. Such high
speed inflation has a negative but unavoidable
side effect, which is that it can and does cause in-
juries, including facial and arm abrasions, bruising
and broken bones. You can help minimize such in-
juries by always wearing your safety belts.
There are many types of accidents in which
airbags are not expected to deploy. These include
accidents where the airbags whould provide no
benefit, such as a rear impact against your vehi-
cle. Other accidents where the airbags are de-
signed not to deploy are those where the risk of
injury from the airbag deployment could exeed any
protective benefits, such as in low speed acci-
dents or higher speed accidents where the vehicle
decelerates over a longer time. Since airbag de-
ployment does not occur in all accidents, this fur-
ther emphasizes the need for you and your pas-
sengers to always wear safety belts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module. This module will record the
use of the seat belt restraint system by the driver
and front passenger when the airbags and/or belt
tensioner work.
Advanced Airbag
Your vehicle is equipped with a weight sensing sys-
tem for the passenger's seat in accordance with
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208.
Depending on the weight acting on the front pas-
senger's seat, the front passenger's airbag will au-
tomatically be switched on and off.
Depending on the angle and force of impact, the
front passenger's airbag which is activated will be
triggered during a collision.
Precondition for switching the front passenger's
airbag on and off, depending on weight:
Vehicles equipped with key-operated airbag
deactivation device:
Switch position AUTO.
Ignition key is inserted.
Improper handling of the weight sensing
system can unintentionally impair switching
the passenger's airbag off and on.
46 Operation, Safety
Seat adjustment for the front passenger's
seat
Danger!
Safety belts only offer protection when the
backrest is upright and the belts are properly
positioned on the body. Improperly posi-
tioned safety belts can cause serious person-
al injury or death in an accident.
fDo not operate the car with the driver or
passenger backrests excessively reclined.
fPorsche recommends the use of L.A.T.C.H.
(Lower Anchorage and Tether for Children)
equipped Porsche child seat.
Do not install a child restraint system in
the Sports bucket seat.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be
equipped with the LATCH system.
If the seat is in an extreme position (e.g., the back-
rest is in contact with the rear seat), the backrest
can warp. Warping of the backrest can lead to mal-
functions.
fCorrect the seat adjustment.
Ensure that the seat is not jammed and is self-
supporting.
Ensure that the backrest is in the upright posi-
tion.
fDo not transport a load and objects in the rear
footwell and under the passenger's seat.
If the load or objects are under the seat, it can
cause malfunctions.
If the weight on the passenger's seat is reduced
significantly, e.g., by supporting weight on the
armrest, the passenger's airbag can be switched
off.
fSelect an upright seat position, and do not sup-
port weight on the armrests or lean out of the
window.
Always keep feet in the footwell while driving.
Do not put feet on the dashboard or the seat
area. Do not lean against the inside of the door
or outside the window while the vehicle is mov-
ing.
If the passenger's seat is warped significantly, a
message is displayed on the on-board computer:
fCorrect the seat adjustment.
fPlease see the chapter “WARNINGS ON THE
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE ON-BOARD
COMPUTER” on Page 158.
Vehicle modifications to accommodate
persons with disabilities
Because modifications to your vehicle could com-
promise your advanced airbag system, please call
1-800-PORSCHE prior to having your vehicle mod-
ified.
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger’s airbag.
Danger!
The use of a child restraint system in the
front passenger’s seat can result in serious
personal injury or death to the child from an
airbag deployment.
fPlease see the chapter “PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP”
on Page 47.
fBefore transporting a child on the passenger’s
seat:
Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS” on Page 50.
fDo not install a child restraint system in
the Sports bucket seat.
When an up to one-year old child is seated
in the child restraint system, the front airbag is
automatically deactivated on the passenger’s
side.
When an adult is seated in the front seat, the
front airbag remains active on the passenger‘s
side.
Operation, Safety 47
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
Note on operation
Although not desired, it can occur in the case of
heavier children that the passenger’s airbag re-
mains active or, in the case of very light adults or
young persons, that the passenger’s airbag is
deactivated.
The condition of the passenger’s front airbag is
shown by the indicator lamp.
If in doubt:
fPlease see the chapter “PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP”
on Page 47.
fPlease see the chapter “KEY-OPERATED AIR-
BAG DEACTIVATION DEVICE” on Page 49.
fPlease see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS” on Page 50.
fPlease see the chapter “LATCH SYSTEM
CHILD SEAT BRACKET ON THE PASSENGER’S
SEAT” on Page 54.
Note
fAfter inserting the ignition key, the PASSEN-
GER AIRBAG OFF warning light lights up for a
few seconds as a bulb check.
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
lights up
The passenger's airbag is switched off.
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
does not light up
The passenger's airbag is active and ready for
operation.
If the passenger's seat is not occupied, the
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will
also not light up, even though the passenger's
airbag is switched off.
Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death due
to the passenger airbag triggering uninten-
tionally.
When the ignition key is inserted and the up
to one-year old child is seated in the child re-
straint system on the passenger’s seat, the
indicator lamp “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF”
must be on.
If the “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF” indicator
lamp does not light up, it could indicate a
fault in the system.
In this case:
fChild restraint systems facing forwards:
Install on the rear seats.
fChild restraint systems facing rearwards:
On vehicles with key-operated airbag deactiva-
tion device: Switch to position OFF.
fChild restraint systems facing rearwards:
On vehicles without key-operated airbag deac-
tivation device: Do not use a child restraint sys-
tem in the front passenger’s seat.
fHave the fault remedied at your nearest author-
ized Porsche dealer.
48 Operation, Safety
Note
The key switch for switching off the passenger’s
airbag in combination with the LATCH attachment
bracket are not installed at the factory. They can
be retrofitted.
fPlease see your authorized Porsche dealer.
Faults are indicated by a warning light in the instru-
ment panel and a message on the on-board com-
puter.
fPlease see the chapter “WARNINGS ON THE
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE ON-BOARD
COMPUTER” on Page 158.
fIn the following cases you should immedi-
ately consult an authorized Porsche
dealer in order to assure the airbag sys-
tem is functioning properly:
If the warning light does not light up when the
ignition key is inserted or
If the warning light does not go out once the
engine is running or
If the warning light appears while driving.
Airbag maintenance
In order to ensure long-term functioning, the air-
bag system must be inspected by an authorized
Porsche dealer at the intervals recommended in
your Maintenance Booklet.
Important information
If you sell your Porsche, notify the purchaser that
the vehicle is equipped with airbags, and refer
them to the chapter, “Airbag Systems“, in the
Owner's Manual (safety and disposal rules).
Further information on the airbag system can be
found on stickers attached to the sun visors.
For special recommendations on the use of child
restraints:
fPlease see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS” on Page 50.
Warning light and warning
message
Operation, Safety 49
Key-operated airbag deactivation device
In case your vehicle is equipped with LATCH, you
can switch off (OFF) the passenger’s front airbag
manually. In the automatic mode (AUTO), the
airbag will be switched on or off automatically
depending on the weight on the passenger seat.
fSwitch off the passenger’s airbag on the key
switch using the vehicle key.
Switch position AUTO – passenger’s front airbag is
active
Switch position OFF – passenger’s front airbag is
switched off
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death for
passenger if passenger’s airbag remains
switched off after the child restraint system
is removed.
fMake sure that the key switch is switched to
AUTO once the child seat has been removed,
in order to provide protection to the adult
occupants.
Warning light “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF”
If the airbag on the passenger’s side is switched
off:
Warning light “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF” is
continuously lit when the ignition key is
inserted.
Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death from
the passenger’s airbag.
If the “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF” warning
light is not lit when the ignition key is inserted
and the Airbag OFF switch is switched to the
OFF-Position, this could indicate a fault in the
system.
fDo not install a child restraint system on the
passenger’s seat.
fHave the fault remedied immediately.
Please see your authorized Porsche dealer.
Note
fDo not install a child restraint system in
the Sports bucket seat.
The key switch for switching off the passenger’s
airbag in combination with the LATCH attachment
bracket are not installed at the factory. They can
be retrofitted (not on vehicles with Sports bucket
seats).
fPlease see your authorized Porsche dealer.
50 Operation, Safety
Child Restraint Systems
fDo not install a child restraint system in
the Sports bucket seat.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be
equipped with the LATCH system.
Porsche recommends that all infants and children
be restrained in child restraint systems at all times
while the vehicle is in motion in accordance with
applicable laws.
Use only child restraint systems with the LATCH-
system recommended by Porsche. These sys-
tems have been tested and adjusted to the interior
of your Porsche and the appropriate child weight
groups. Other systems have not been tested and
could entail an increased risk of injury or death.
You can obtain child seats that are LATCH compa-
tible at your authorized Porsche dealer.
fAlways observe the separate installation in-
structions for your child seat.
The use of infant or child restraints is required by
law in all 50 states of the U.S. and all Canadian
provinces. The child restraint system should be
one that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards and should be secured by a lap
belt or lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt or for
child seats equipped with the LATCH sytem (Low-
er Anchorage and Tether for Children, also known
as ISOFIX) to the LATCH anchorages.
A statement by the seat manufacturer of compli-
ance with this standard can be found on the in-
struction label on the restraint and in the instruc-
tion manual provided with the restraint.
Danger!
The use of a child restraint system in the
front passenger’s seat can result in serious
personal injury or death to the child from an
airbag deployment.
To reduce risk of injury from an inflating air-
bag in an accident, Porsche strongly recom-
mends:
fPlease see the chapter “PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP”
on Page 47.
fPlease see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS” on Page 50.
fDo not install a child restraint system in
the Sports bucket seat.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be
equipped with the LATCH system.
Note
The key switch for switching off the passenger’s
airbag and the LATCH attachment bracket are not
installed at the factory. They can be retrofitted (not
on vehicles with Sports bucket seats).
fPlease see your authorized Porsche dealer.
Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death to the
child.
fFollow all child restraint instructions and
warnings in this manual.
When using an infant or child restraint system,
be sure to follow all manufacturer's instruc-
tions on installation and use.
Infants and small children should never be held
on the lap, nor should they share a safety belt
with another occupant while the vehicle is in
motion.
Children too big for child restraint systems
should use regular safety belts. A shoulder belt
can be used providing it does not cross the
face or the neck of the child.
Choose a child restraint system according to
the weight of the child.
Child restraint systems that are damaged or
have been heavily stressed in an accident must
be replaced immediately.
Children could be endangered in a crash if their
child restrains are not properly secured in the
vehicle.
Do not affix things to child restraint systems or
cover it with other materials.
Operation, Safety 51
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be glad to
advise you about the installation possibility for
a Porsche child restraint system which allows
a key-operated airbag deactivation of the pas-
senger’s airbag.
The key-operated airbag deactivation device
installation requires special programming
available only from your authorized Porsche
dealer.
fPlease see the chapter “KEY-OPERATED
AIRBAG DEACTIVATION DEVICE” on Page 49.
Direction of installation for child restraint
systems
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
Under all normal circumstances, the forward
facing child seat must be placed in the rear.
Group 0 and 0+: Children up to 29 lbs (13 kg)
Children of this weight must be transported in a
restraint system which is installed on the
passenger’s seat facing rearward.
Group I: Children in between 20 lbs (9 kg)
and 40 lbs (18 kg)
Children of this weight are held in child restraint
systems facing forward.
Whenever possible, these child restraint systems
should be installed on the rear seats.
Group II: Children in between 33 lbs (15 kg)
and 55 lbs (25 kg)
Children of this weight are held in child restraint
systems facing forward.
Whenever possible, these child restraint systems
should be installed on the rear seats.
Group III: Children in between 49 lbs (22 kg)
and 80 lbs (36 kg)
Children of this weight are held in child restraint
systems facing forward.
Whenever possible, these child restraint systems
should be installed on the rear seats.
If a child restraint system must be fastened to the
passenger’s seat, the passenger’s seat must be
adjusted to the lower rear position.
Note
If a child seat with top tether is adapted for use on
the front seat, the rear right (passenger’s side) an-
chor point must be used for anchoring the top
tether.
It is then not permitted for a passenger to use the
rear right (passenger’s side) seat.
It is then not permitted to install a child restraint
system on the rear right (passenger’s side) seat.
fPlease see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
ANCHORAGES” on Page 55.
52 Operation, Safety
Using child restraint systems in the front
passenger seat
fDo not install a child restraint system in
the Sports bucket seat.
Danger!
The use of a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat can result in serious
personal injury or death to the child from an
airbag deployment.
To reduce risk of injury from an inflating air-
bag in an accident, Porsche strongly recom-
mends:
fPlease see the chapter “PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP”
on Page 47.
fPlease see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS” on Page 50.
fDo not install a child restraint system in
the Sports bucket seat.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be
equipped with the LATCH system.
Child restraint system for up to one-year old
children
Make sure that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp lights up.
Adjust the passenger's seat as far away from
the airbag as possible.
Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death due
to the passenger’s airbag triggering uninten-
tionally.
When the ignition is on and the up to one-
year old child is seated in the child restraint
system on the passenger’s seat the indicator
lamp „PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF“ must be on.
If the “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF” indicator
lamp does not light up, it could indicate a
fault in the system.
In this case:
fOn vehicles with key-operated airbag deactiva-
tion device: Switch to position OFF.
fOn vehicles without key-operated airbag deac-
tivation device: Do not use a child restraint sys-
tem in the front passenger’s seat.
fHave the fault remedied at your nearest autho-
rized Porsche dealer.
Child restraint system for children older than
one year
Your vehicle is equipped with a weight sensing sys-
tem for the passenger's seat in accordance with
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208.
Depending on the weight acting on the passen-
ger's seat, the passenger's airbag will automati-
cally be switched on or off.
Small adult passengers
Make sure that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indi-
cator lamp does not light up.
Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death due
to the passenger’s airbag not triggering.
When the ignition key is inserted and the
small adult passenger is seated on the pas-
senger’s seat, the indicator lamp “PASSEN-
GER AIRBAG OFF” must be off.
If the “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF” indicator
lamp lights up, it could indicate a fault in the
system.
In this case:
fThe passenger should sit in the rear seat until
the fault is repaired.
fHave the fault remedied at the nearest autho-
rized Porsche dealer.
Operation, Safety 53
Automatic locking retractor
fDo not install a child restraint system in
the Sports bucket seat.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be
equipped with the LATCH system.
The safety belts for the front passenger and rear
seats are equipped with an automatic locking re-
tractor for securing the child restraint system.
When activated, this retractor allows you to se-
curely fasten the child restraint system in place so
that inadvertent movements will not occur.
Danger!
The use of a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat can result in serious
personal injury or death to the child from an
airbag deployment.
To reduce risk of injury from an inflating air-
bag in an accident, Porsche strongly recom-
mends:
fUnder all normal circumstances, forward fa-
cing child seats must be placed in the rear.
Before transporting a child on the passenger’s
seat:
fPlease see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS” on Page 50.
Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death to the
child, when excessive force is acting on the
passenger's seat due to the seat belt.
In such cases, the passenger's airbag can be
switched on unintentionally.
fAfter fastening the child restraint system, do
not adjust the seat.
fCheck the condition of the passenger’s airbag
shown by the indicator lamp in the central con-
sole.
Activating the automatic locking retractor
1. If a child restraint system must be fastened to
the passenger's seat, adjust the passenger's
seat as far away from the airbag as possible.
2. Fasten child seat.
3. Pull the safety belt retractor completely out. At
this point the locking mechanism is activated.
4. Insert the safety belt tongue into the buckle
and make certain that it is properly latched.
Make no more adjustments to the seat.
5. Allow the safety belt to retract until it is tight on
the child restraint system. You may further
tighten the belt by pulling on it to allow more of
it to retract.
Make sure that excessive seat belt forces do
not occur by moving the seat with the child
seat installed.
Releasing the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the safety belt latch.
2. Then make certain that the belt has fully
retracted. At this point the automatic locking
feature will be disengaged.
Seek appropriate advice from your authorized
Porsche dealer about the possible installation
of a Porsche child restraint system.
54 Operation, Safety
LATCH System
Child seat bracket on the passenger’s
seat
fDo not install a child restraint system in
the Sports bucket seat.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be
equipped with the LATCH system.
The key switch for switching off the passenger’s
airbag and the LATCH attachment bracket are not
installed at the factory. They can be retrofitted
(not on vehicles with Sports bucket seats).
fPlease see your authorized Porsche dealer.
Porsche recommends the use of a Porsche Child
Seat with Lower Anchorage and Tether for Chil-
dren system (LATCH).
These systems have been tested and adjusted to
the interior of your Porsche and the appropriate
child weight groups. Other systems have not been
tested and could entail an increased risk of injury.
You can obtain child seats that are LATCH compat-
ible at your authorized Porsche dealer.
fAlways observe the separate installation in-
structions for your child seat.
fPlease see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS” on Page 50.
Installing a LATCH child seat system
1. Secure the child seat to retaining lugs A as
outlined in the instruction manual for the child
seat.
2. Pull the child seat to check that both fastening
points are engaged correctly.
Note
fMake sure that the key switch is switched to
AUTO once the child seat has been removed,
in order to provide protection to the adult
occupants.
Operation, Safety 55
Child Restraint Anchorages
(Coupé and Targa)
fPlease see the chapter “AUTOMATIC LOCKING
RETRACTOR” on Page 53.
fDo not install a child restraint system in
the Sports bucket seat.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be
equipped with the LATCH system.
If your child restraint seat or seats require the use
of a tether strap, you will want to use the anchor
points provided behind the rear seat backrests un-
der the carpet.
To ensure proper installation, see your authorized
Porsche dealer.
Note
If a child seat with top tether is adapted for use on
the front seat, the rear right (passenger’s side) an-
chor point must be used for anchoring the top
tether. It is then not permitted for a passenger to
use the rear right (passenger’s side) seat.
Warning!
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by cor-
rectly fitted child restraints. Under no cir-
cumstances are they to be used for adults
safety belts or harnesses. Such use could re-
sult in serious personal injury or death.
fDo not misuse the child restraint anchorages.
They are not designed to withstand loads
imposed by adults.
fOnly attach one child seat tether per ancho-
rage.
56 Operation, Safety
Rollover Protection System
The Rollover Protection System on the Cabriolet
consists of two supplemental safety bars that to-
gether with the front windshield frame help to cre-
ate occupant survival space in case of rollover. Be-
cause of the extreme and unpredictable forces
which can be encountered in a rollover, it is not
possible to guarantee that occupants will be pro-
tected from all contact with exterior objects or the
ground. However, the Rollover Protection System
is designed to maintain the occupant survival
space.
The Rollover Protection System is activated auto-
matically in the event of an accident or extreme
driving situation.
The protective devices are located behind each
rear seat and rapidly deploy within a fraction of a
second. If necessary, the seat-belt tensioners will
be activated.
fPlease see the chapter “BELT TENSIONER” on
Page 41.
They can deploy under:
Extreme tilting of the vehicle.
Loss of ground contact (e.g. Going over the
crest of a hill at high speed).
Danger!
Risk of death or serious injury.
fDo not block area of supplemental safety bars
with objects.
In the event of a deployment event, such
objects could potentially prevent such deploy-
ment from occuring, or such objects could
impact the car occupants at high speed.
fDo not tamper with or work on wiring and or
components of Rollover Protection System.
fAll work regarding this system must be carried
out by your authorized Porsche dealer.
fCheck functions and periodic service intervals
according to maintenance schedule (see your
authorized Porsche dealer).
To avoid damage to the convertible top:
fIf the supplemental safety bars are extended
for any reason, do not open or close converti-
ble top.
Faults in the Rollover Protection System are indi-
cated by the airbag warning light in the instrument
panel.
Extension of the supplemental safety bars is no
longer ensured.
fSee your authorized Porsche dealer immedi-
ately and have the fault remedied.
Lowering the supplemental safety bars
after deployment
fHave this work performed by an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Warning light
Operation, Safety 57
Sports Exhaust System
Switching on and off
The sports exhaust system can be switched on
and off when the ignition is switched on using
button A.
When the sports exhaust system is switched on,
the light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
Parking Brake
Parking brake force is mechanically transferred to
the rear wheels by means of cables.
fUse the parking brake only after the vehicle
has come to a full stop.
Setting the parking brake
fPull the lever all the way up (arrow).
With the ignition on, the parking brake warning
lights in the instrument panel and on-board
computer will come on if the lever is even
slightly raised. A firm pull upward is required to
properly engage the parking brake.
If the brake is not fully set, the vehicle may roll
without control.
fMove the selector lever to “P” (PDK) or move
the gearshift lever to reverse or first gear
(Manual transmission).
fBefore exiting the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully set and the vehicle is not
moving at all.
Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death. A
partially engaged parking brake may allow
the vehicle to roll, causing serious personal
injury or death to any person in its path.
fEngage the parking brake fully.
Releasing the parking brake
fPull the lever slightly up as you depress the re-
lease button, and then push the lever all the
way down.
58 Operation, Safety
The warning lights in the instrument panel and on-
board computer will go out after the parking brake
is fully released.
The warning lights are not an indicator that the
parking brake is fully set; it is only intended to be
a warning to release the parking brake before
driving the car.
Caution!
A partially engaged brake will overheat the
rear brakes, reduce their effectiveness and
cause excessive wear.
fRelease the parking brake fully.
fWhen parking your car, always set the parking
brake by pulling all the way up on the lever.
fMove the selector lever to “P” (PDK) or move
the gearshift lever to reverse or first gear
(Manual transmission).
fOn hills also turn the front wheels towards the
curb.
Brakes
fMake it a habit to check the operation of your
brakes before driving.
Keep in mind that the braking distance increases
very rapidly as the speed increases. At 60 mph or
100 km/h, for example, it is not twice but four
times longer than 30 mph or 50 km/h. Tire trac-
tion is also less effective when the roads are wet
or slippery.
fTherefore, always maintain a safe distance
from the car in front of you.
Vehicles without Porsche Ceramic Compos-
ite Brake (PCCB)
Even though the brake discs consist of alloyed
grey cast iron, they will unavoidably start to cor-
rode if your car is parked for an extended period.
The brakes will tend to “rub” as a result.
The nature, extent and effects of corrosion de-
pend on the amount of time the vehicle was
parked, whether granular or liquid road salt was
spread and whether grease-dissolving agents
were used in car washes.
To prevent corrosion of the brake discs, “brake
them dry” before parking the car.
If the braking comfort is noticeably impaired, we
recommend having the brake system checked by
experts at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Brake system function
Your Porsche is equipped with a power assisted
hydraulic dual circuit brake system with disc
brakes at the front and rear.
Both circuits function independently. One brake
circuit operates the front and the other operates
the rear.
If one brake circuit has failed, the other will still op-
erate. However, you will notice an increased pedal
travel when you apply the brakes.
Failure of one brake circuit will cause the stopping
distance to increase.
Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
In the unlikely event of hydraulic failure of
one brake circuit:
fPush the brake pedal down firmly and hold it in
that position.
A mechanical linkage activates the second cir-
cuit, and you will be able to bring the vehicle to
a stop.
fAfter bringing your vehicle to a complete stop,
avoid driving the vehicle and instead have it
towed to the nearest authorized Porsche deal-
er for repair.
Parking brake warning light USA
Parking brake warning light
Canada
Operation, Safety 59
Brake system warning light
You can check the functionality of the brake
system warning light by switching the ignition to
the "On" position and verifying that the warning
light illuminates.
If the warning lights in the instrument panel and on-
board computer go on while driving, the brake flu-
id level may be too low, or (if the brake pedal travel
has increased) one of the two brake circuits may
have failed.
A greater braking pressure will be required, stop-
ping distances will be longer and the braking be-
havior will change, particularly in curves.
With correctly adjusted brakes, and a correctly
working brake system, the pedal travel to the
point of brake actuation should be 1-3/16 in. to
1-9/16 in. or 30 to 40 mm.
Whenever the brake pedal travel exceeds this dis-
tance, have the brake system checked.
Brake pedal
Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
Any obstruction of the brake pedal could
increase the stopping distance.
fAlways check the movement of the brake pedal
before driving and make sure that it is not ob-
structed by a floor mat or any other object.
fSecure the floor mat to prevent it from sliding
into positions that could interfere with the safe
operation of your vehicle.
Your Porsche dealer will be glad to offer you
nonskid floor mats of the correct size.
Note
In case one of the two brake circuits fails, in-
creased pedal travel is required to bring your
vehicle to a full stop.
Warning!
To avoid overheating and premature wear of
the brakes:
fBefore descending a steep grade, reduce
speed and shift the transmission into a lower
gear or driving position to control speed.
fDo not “ride the brakes” by resting your foot on
the pedal when not intending to apply brake
pressure.
fDo not hold the pedal down too long or too
often.
This could cause the brakes to get hot and not
function properly.
Brake warning light USA
Brake warning light Canada
60 Operation, Safety
Brake booster
The brake booster assists braking only when
the engine is running.
When the car is moving while the engine is not run-
ning, or if the brake booster is defective, more
pressure on the brake pedal is required to bring
the car to a stop.
If this happens, ABS and PSM will also not oper-
ate.
Moisture or road salt on brakes affects braking.
When the vehicle is driven on salted or sanded
roads for extended periods, the brakes should be
washed down thoroughly about every 2 weeks. An
automatic carwash facility cannot do this job prop-
erly.
Brakes will dry after a few cautious brake applica-
tions.
Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
Driving through water may reduce the trac-
tion.
Moisture on brakes from road water, car
wash, or coating of road salt may affect
braking efficiency.
fCautiously apply brakes to test brakes after ex-
posure to road water, etc.
Brake wear
Your car has excellent brakes, but they are still
subject to wear. The rate at which they wear de-
pends on how the brakes are used.
fHave the brake system inspected at the
intervals recommended in your Maintenance
Booklet.
Brake system warning light
You can check the functionality of the brake
system warning light by switching the ignition to
the "On" position and verifying that the warning
light illuminates.
If the warning lights in the instrument panel and on-
board computer stay on when the engine is run-
ning or come on while driving, the brake pads are
worn excessively.
fDo not continue to operate the vehicle.
Have your authorized Porsche dealer inspect
or replace the brake pads.
Brake pads
Wear on the brake pads and brake discs depends
to a great extent on the driving style and the con-
ditions of use and therefore cannot be expressed
in actual miles on the road.
The high-performance brake system is designed
for optimal braking effect at all speeds and tem-
peratures.
Certain speeds, braking forces and ambient
conditions (such as temperature and humidity)
therefore might cause “brake noises”.
New brake pads or linings
New brake pads and brake discs have to be “bro-
ken in”, and therefore only attain optimal friction
when the car has covered several hundred miles
or km.
The slightly reduced braking ability must be com-
pensated for by pressing the brake pedal harder.
This also applies whenever the brake pads and
brake discs are replaced.
Warning light USA
Warning light Canada
Operation, Safety 61
ABS Brake System
(Antilock Brake System)
The ABS system represents a major contribution
to the enhancement of active safety in your vehi-
cle. This system prevents the wheels from locking
in a panic stop on almost all road surfaces.
With the ABS system in your vehicle, the
following areas are enhanced:
Steering, vehicle remains steerable under all
braking forces when ABS is engaged.
Good directional control, no swerving caused
by locking of wheels under braking conditions.
Shorter stopping distance, stopping distances
are usually reduced because controlled braking is
maximized.
Prevention of wheel lock up, no brake- induced
sliding and thus no localized tire wear from emer-
gency braking.
The crucial advantage of the ABS system over a
conventional brake system is in the area of main-
taining directional control and maneuverability of
the car in emergency situations.
Warning!
The increased control that is provided should
not induce you to take greater risks with your
safety. The limits dictated by the laws of
physics cannot be overcome, even with ABS.
The risk of accidents due to inappropriate
speed cannot be reduced, even by the ABS.
The driver bears the responsibility for all
driving maneuvers.
fAdapt your driving style to the prevailing road
and weather conditions.
fObey all traffic laws.
Other vehicles not equipped with the ABS
system may not be able to maintain control,
especially on wet or poor road surfaces and
thus may be more likely to impact you from
behind.
fTo minimize that risk, use your ABS system to
increase your ability to maneuver to avoid dan-
gerous situations and not merely to try to stop
in the shortest distance possible.
Operation of the ABS system
A wheel speed sensor is mounted to each of the
four wheels. If wheel lock-up of either of the front
wheels or the rear wheels is sensed during brak-
ing, the brake pressure is adjusted automatically
until the wheel no longer slips.
If braking forces approach the wheel lock-up point
for all wheels (panic braking) the ABS system will
intervene to provide a rapid rythmic braking. The
proper operation of ABS is perceived by the driver
as a pulsating brake pedal in conjunction with au-
dible noise and perhaps some vibration.
fIf you experience these sensations while driv-
ing or a road surface with questionable trac-
tion, reduce vehicle speed appropriate for the
prevailing road conditions.
fIf full braking should be necessary, press the
brake pedal all the way down throughout the
entire braking procedure, regardless of the pul-
sating pedal. Do not ease up on pressure ap-
plied to the pedal.
The functional readiness of all the main electrical
components of the ABS is checked by an
electronic monitoring system both before and
while you drive.
62 Operation, Safety
When the ignition is switched on the ABS warning
light will light up while the system is electronically
interrogated and goes out when the engine is
started if the check is not yet complete.
If the ABS warning lamp fails to go out, this indi-
cates that ABS has been deactivated due to a
fault. If the warning lights in the instrument panel
and on-board computer light up while you are driv-
ing, this indicates that a fault has occurred. In both
cases, normal braking, as in vehicles without ABS,
is still retained.
The ABS system should, however, be examined at
an authorized Porsche dealer immediately to pre-
vent the occurrence of further faults.
fIf the ABS system becomes inoperative, take
your vehicle to your authorized Porsche dealer
immediately.
Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
The control unit of the ABS brake system is
set for standard tire size. If non-standard
tires are installed, the control unit may mis-
interpret the speed of the vehicle, because of
the variant data it receives from the sensors
on the axles.
fUse only tire makes and types tested by
Porsche.
Clutch Pedal
The clutch pedal must be depressed fully
before the starter will engage.
Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
fAlways check the movement of the clutch ped-
al before driving and make sure that it is not
obstructed by a floor mat or any other object.
fSecure the floor mat to prevent it from sliding
into positions that could interfere with the safe
operation of your vehicle.
Your Porsche dealer will be glad to offer you
nonskid floor mats of the correct size.
To avoid damage to the clutch and transmis-
sion:
fAlways depress the clutch pedal fully when
changing gears.
fDo not hold the car on a steep grade with the
clutch pedal partially depressed.
Should the free travel of the clutch pedal suddenly
become larger, it could mean a malfunction of the
clutch.
fSee your Porsche dealer for correction.
Warning light USA
Warning light Canada
Operation, Safety 63
Porsche Traction Management
(PTM)
With PTM, the engine power is variably distributed
to the front and rear wheels.
Power distribution between the front and rear ax-
les is performed by a map-conrolled multiple-disc
clutch.
Distribution of the engine power also depends on
the difference in wheel speed between the two ax-
les.
The multiple-disc clutch always delivers sufficient
drive power to the front wheels to ensure optimum
propulsion even on an unfavorable road surface.
In combination with the Porsche Stability Manage-
ment (PSM), the PTM ensures optimum handling
and high driving stability.
Warning!
The increased control that is provided should
not induce you to take greater risks with your
safety. The limits dictated by the laws of phy-
sics cannot be overcome, even with PTM.
The risk of accidents due to inappropriate
speed cannot be reduced, even by PTM.
The driver bears the responsibility for all dri-
ving maneuvers.
fAdapt your driving style to the prevailing road
and weather conditions.
fObey all traffic laws.
Dynamometer testing procedure
Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces con-
duct emissions inspection/maintenance testing in-
volving the use of two-wheel dynamometer.
A two-wheeled dynamometer is a treadmill type
device upon which a single axle of the car, the dri-
ving axle of the vehicle, rotates to simulate vehicle
operation on the road while the vehicle remains
stationary.
Your vehicle has a full-time four-wheel drive system
which cannot be disabled. Severe damage to the
powertrain can result if tested on a two-wheel dy-
namometer.
Warning!
Risk of severe powertrain damage and a pos-
sible unexpected movement of the vehicle.
fDo not test your vehicle on a two-wheel dyna-
mometer.
fAdvise the emission station of this warning be-
fore testing the vehicle.
Brake tests
Brake tests must be performed only on plate-type
test stands or roller test stands.
The ignition must be off.
The following limit values must not be exceeded
on roller test stands:
Testing speed 5 mph (8 km/h)
Test duration 20 seconds
Handbrake tests
Handbrake tests on the roller test stand must only
be carried out with the ignition switched off.
Balancing wheels on the vehicle
During finish balancing of the wheels, the vehicle
must be hoisted and all the wheels able to rotate
freely.
Towing
fPlease see the chapter “TOWING” on
Page 280.
Wheels/Tires
The PTM control unit is adapted to the approved
tire sizes. The use of non-approved tire sizes may
lead to deviations in wheel speeds and it may influ-
ence handling or result in the PTM switching off.
64 Operation, Safety
Sport Mode
A sportier car set-up is obtained when Sport mode
is switched on. Interventions by the Porsche
control systems are intentionally shifted towards
greater agility and driving performance:
PASM (Porsche Active Suspension Manage-
ment) is automatically changed to Sport mode,
resulting in a stiffer suspension setup.
When Sport mode is active, the PDK transmis-
sion switches to a sporty gear-changing map
and shortens the gear shifting times. Gear
changes take place faster, but fuel consump-
tion is also increased.
PSM (Porsche Stability Management) control
gives a sportier road-feel to the vehicle. PSM
interventions take place later than in Normal
mode. The driver can maneuver the vehicle
with greater agility at its performance limits,
without having to dispense with the assistance
of PSM in emergency situations. This helps to
achieve optimal lap times, particularly on race
circuits with a dry road surface.
The electronic accelerator pedal reacts
sooner, and the engine is more responsive to
throttle inputs. When Sport mode is switched
on, this function is activated only after the
driver has floored the accelerator pedal or
released it briefly.
The rpm limiter characteristic is “harder”, i.e.
the engine is immediately throttled when the
performance limits are reached (only in manual
selection mode for vehicles with PDK transmis-
sion).
fPlease observe the chapters on PSM, PASM
and PDK.
Switching Sport mode on and off
Switching Sport mode on and off simultaneously
activates and deactivates the Sport mode in
PASM.
If PASM Sport mode was activated with the PASM
button, PASM remains active.
After the ignition is switched off, Sport mode is
automatically reset to Normal mode.
SPORT button
fPress SPORT button A in the center console.
When Sport mode is switched on, the light-
emitting diode in the SPORT button is lit.
A sporty gear-changing map is enabled and the
gear shifting times are shortened for the PDK
transmission.
A sporty driving style is recognized more quickly
and the gear-changing speeds are adapted to
driving performance.
Deceleration downshifts are commenced earlier.
Downshifts are made during slight decelerations,
even at higher engine speeds.
fPlease see the chapter “SPORT MODE
(“SPORT” AND “SPORT PLUS” MODES)” on
Page 172.
Operation, Safety 65
SPORT PLUS button
(only on vehicles with PDK transmission)
In “Sport Plus” mode, the PDK transmission
changes to a shift program designed for driving
on race circuits. 7th gear is not selected.
The gear-changing performance is enhanced
significantly again compared with “Sport” mode.
fPlease see the chapter “SPORT MODE
(“SPORT” AND “SPORT PLUS” MODES)” on
Page 172.
fPress SPORT PLUS button B in the center
console.
When Sport mode is switched on, the light-
emitting diode in the SPORT PLUS button is lit.
When mode “Sport” is switched on, the logo
SPORT appears next to the digital speedometer. When mode “Sport Plus” is switched on, the logo
SPORT PLUS appears next to the digital
speedometer.
66 Operation, Safety
Porsche Stability Management
(PSM)
PSM is an active control system for stabilization of
the vehicle approaching the performance limits of
driving maneuvers.
Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
The increased control that is provided should
not induce you to take greater risks with your
safety. The limits dictated by the laws of
physics cannot be overcome, even with PSM.
The risk of accidents due to inappropriate
speed cannot be reduced, even by PSM.
The driver bears the responsibility for all
driving maneuvers.
fAdapt your driving style to the prevailing road
and weather conditions.
fObey all traffic laws.
Sensors at the wheels, brakes, steering system
and engine continuously measure:
–Speed
Direction of travel (steering angle)
Lateral acceleration
Rate of turn about the vertical axis
Longitudinal acceleration
PSM uses these values to determine the direction
of travel indicated by the driver.
PSM intervenes and helps to correct the course if
the actual direction of motion deviates from the
chosen course (steering-wheel position):
It brakes individual wheels as needed. In addition,
the engine power may be manipulated in order to
stabilize the vehicle.
The events below inform the driver of PSM control
operations and warn him/her to adapt his/her
driving style to the road conditions:
The multifunctional information light on the
instrument panel flashes.
Hydraulic noises can be heard.
The vehicle decelerates and steering-wheel
forces are altered as the PSM controls the
brakes.
Reduced engine power.
The brake pedal pulsates and its position is
changed during braking.
In order to achieve full vehicle deceleration,
foot pressure must be increased after the
brake pedal has begun vibrating.
Examples of PSM control operations
If the front wheels of the vehicle drift on a
bend, the rear wheel on the inside of the bend
is braked and the engine power is reduced if
necessary.
If the rear of the vehicle swings out on a bend,
the front wheel on the outside of the bend is
braked.
Additional braking functions
Pre-filling the brake system:
The brake system is prepared for possible
subsequent emergency braking if the acceler-
ator pedal is released suddenly and quickly.
The brake system is prefilled and the brake
pads are already applied gently to the brake
discs.
Brake booster:
In the event of an emergency braking operation
where the pedal force is insufficient, a brake
booster provides the braking pressure neces-
sary for maximum deceleration at all 4 wheels.
Advantages of PSM
Best possible traction and lane-holding ability
in all driving situations – even on road surfaces
with varying friction.
Operation, Safety 67
The system compensates for undesired lateral
vehicle reactions when the driver releases the
accelerator pedal or brakes when cornering.
This compensation functions up to the
maximum lateral acceleration.
PSM actively stabilizes the vehicle as required
during dynamic driving maneuvers (e.g. rapid
steering movements, during lane changes or
on alternating bends).
Improved braking stability on bends and on
different or varying road surfaces.
It improves braking function and shortens
stopping distance in the event of emergency
braking.
Readiness for operation
PSM is switched on automatically every time you
start the engine.
PSM should always be switched on during
“normal” driving.
However, it may be advantageous to switch off
PSM temporarily in exceptional situations, for
example:
On a loose surface or in deep snow,
When “rocking” the vehicle free and
When using snow chains.
Switching off PSM
fPress PSM OFF button.
PSM is switched off after a short delay.
The light-emitting diode in the button is lit up.
When the PSM is switched off, the PSM multi-
functional light on the instrument panel is lit
and a message is shown on the on-board
computer.
An acoustic signal also sounds.
Note
When PSM is switched off, the additional braking
functions are deactivated. Automatic reactivation
in emergency situations is linked to the PSM
control.
The following functions stabilize the vehicle in
emergency situations, even with PSM switched
off:
When PSM is off, the vehicle is stabilized as
soon as one of the two front wheels enters the
ABS control range.
When PSM is off and Sport mode is on, the
vehicle is stabilized as soon as both front
wheels enter the ABS control range.
One-sided spinning of the wheels is prevented,
even with PSM switched off.
Switching PSM back on
fPress PSM OFF button.
PSM is switched on after a short delay.
The light-emitting diode in the button and the
PSM multifunctional light on the instrument
panel go out.
The on-board computer shows a message.
68 Operation, Safety
Sport mode
A sportier car set-up is obtained when Sport or
Sport Plus mode is switched on.
PSM interventions are later than in Normal mode;
the vehicle can be maneuverd with greater agility
at its performance limits, without dispensing with
the assistance of PSM in emergency situations.
This helps to achieve optimal lap times, particu-
larly on race circuits and a dry road surface.
The multifunctional light on the instrument
panel lights up for a lamp check when the
ignition is switched on.
The light indicates a control operation by
flashing, including when PSM is switched off
(brake control in the event of one-sided wheel
spin).
In conjunction with a message on the on-board
computer, the light indicates that PSM is
switched off.
An acoustic signal also sounds.
The light indicates a fault in conjunction with a
message on the on-board computer.
PSM is out of order.
fPlease have the fault remedied at an author-
ized Porsche dealer.
fPlease see the chapter “PUTTING VEHICLE
INTO OPERATION” on Page 263.
Towing
fPlease see the chapter “TOWING” on
Page 280.
Checks on test stands
Brake tests
Brake tests must be performed only on plate-type
test stands or roller test stands.
The ignition must be switched off.
The following limit values must not be exceeded
on roller test stands:
Testing speed 5 mph (8 km/h)
Test duration 20 seconds
Handbrake tests
Handbrake tests on the roller test stand must be
performed only with the ignition switched off.
PSM multifunctional light
Operation, Safety 69
PASM makes two running-gear setups available to
the driver: “Normal” and “Sport”.
The selection is made via a button on the center
console.
In Normal mode the running gear is in a comfort-
able setup.
Sport mode offers very sporty shock absorber
tuning.
The variable suspension system selects the appro-
priate damping level for each wheel according to
the situation and driving conditions.
Example:
If the vehicle is driven in a very sporty manner in
Normal mode, PASM automatically adapts the
shock-absorber behavior to the driving situation
accordingly.
Switching on PASM Sport mode
fPress PASM button in the center console.
When PASM Sport mode is switched on, the
light-emitting diode in the button is lit up and a
message is shown on the on-board computer.
Switching off PASM Sport mode
fPress PASM button in the center console.
The light-emitting diode in the button goes out
and the on-board computer displays a
message.
After the ignition is switched off, PASM is
automatically reset to Normal mode.
Retractable Rear Spoiler
The rear spoiler improves driving stability,
especially at higher speeds.
Warning!
Risk of accident. If the rear spoiler cannot be
extended, driving stability will be adversely
affected by increased rear axle lift, which
could lead to loss of control.
fAdapt your driving style and speed to the
changed driving behavior.
fHave the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Risk of injury during manual retraction or
extension of the rear spoiler with the vehicle
stationary.
fMake sure that no persons or objects are
within the range of movement of the rear
spoiler.
Risk of damage from pushing the vehicle by
the spoiler.
fDo not push the vehicle at the spoiler.
Porsche Active Suspension
Management (PASM)
70 Operation, Safety
Automatic mode
The limits for automatic extension and retraction
of the spoiler depend on various circumstances
(e.g. driving speed, engine compartment temper-
ature).
If automatic control fails, a warning message is
displayed by the on-board computer.
Engine compartment temperature
under 122 °F/55 °C
Spoiler extends at 75 mph/120 km/h and
retracts at 37 mph/60 km/h.
Engine compartment temperature
over 140 °F/60 °C
Spoiler extends at 50 mph/80 km/h and retracts
at 19 mph/30 km/h.
When the ignition is on, the rear spoiler can be
extended and retracted manually using the button
in the center console.
Extending
fPress button briefly.
The spoiler extends to its final position.
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
Retracting a manually extended rear spoiler
fat speeds between 0 and 20 mph
(0 and 30 km/h)
Press and hold button until the rear spoiler has
reached its final position.
The light-emitting diode in the button goes out.
The rear spoiler changes to automatic mode.
fat speeds between 20 and 60 mph
(30 and 100 km/h)
Press button briefly.
The rear spoiler retracts, the light-emitting
diode in the button goes out.
The rear spoiler changes to automatic mode.
fat speeds over 60 mph (100 km/h)
Press button briefly.
The rear spoiler remains extended, the light-
emitting diode in the button goes out.
The rear spoiler changes to automatic mode.
Manual control
Operation, Safety 71
A, C - Switch for reading light on driver/passenger side
B- Switch for interior light and footwell lights
D- Orientation light
Interior Lights
fPlease see the chapter “LOAD SWITCH-OFF
AFTER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on Page 258.
For vehicles with automatic anti-dazzle
mirrors
fSwitch off the automatic anti-dazzle operation
of the mirrors before you switch on the interior
light.
Otherwise the mirrors may accidentally swivel
into the anti-dazzle position.
Interior lights, reading lights
Switching off
fPress left half of switch.
Switching to continuous illumination
fPress right half of switch.
Switching on and off automatically
fMove switch to center position.
The interior and footwell lights are switched
on when a door is unlocked or opened or when
the ignition key is withdrawn from the ignition
lock.
The lights are switched off with a delay of
approx. 2 minutes after the doors are closed.
The light goes out immediately as soon as the
ignition is switched on or the vehicle is locked.
Orientation light
A light-emitting diode at the bottom of the interior
mirror improves orientation in the passenger com-
partment when it is dark.
Note on operation
On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus,
the brightness of the orientation light can be
changed in PCM.
fPlease observe the chapter “Individual
Memory” in the separate PCM operating
instructions.
72 Operation, Safety
Parking Aids
Parking assistant
When the driver backs up, the parking assistant
system indicates the distance between the car
and a large obstacle behind it, by means of signal
tones.
Warning!
Risk of serious personal injury or death.
Parking assistant cannot detect small ob-
jects such as children and pets.
Despite use of the parking assistant system,
the driver is still responsible for taking due
care and assessing obstacles when backing
up.
fMake sure that no persons, especially small
children, animals or obstacles are within the
maneuvering area.
The parking assistant system is activated auto-
matically when reverse gear is selected and the ig-
nition is on.
Note
Be aware that the parking assistant system is
not switched on if the car rolls backward without
reverse gear being engaged.
Ultrasound sensors
Sensors
Four ultrasound sensors in the rear bumper meas-
ure the distance to the closest obstacle.
Range middle sensors around 60 in./150 cm
Range outer sensors around 24 in./60 cm
Obstacles cannot be detected in the “blind” sen-
sor area (e.g. near the ground).
Note
The sensors must always be kept free of dirt, ice
and snow in order to ensure that they are fully
functional.
Caution!
To avoid damaging the sensors:
fMaintain sufficient distance when cleaning with
steam-jet units.
Signal tones/function
When reverse gear is selected, the parking
assistant confirms that it is switched on by issuing
a short signal tone.
A detected obstacle is signalled by an intermit-
tent tone. The intervals decrease as the obstacle
is approached.
A continuous tone sounds when the distance
becomes less than one foot. This continuous tone
can stop if the obstacle is approached closer than
one foot.
The radio volume should not be so loud as to
drown out the signal tones.
Operation, Safety 73
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The parking assistant system cannot detect:
sound-absorbing obstacles (e.g. powder
snow),
sound-reflecting obstacles (e.g. glass surfac-
es, flat painted surfaces)
and very thin obstacles.
Other ultrasound sources (e.g. pneumatic
brakes of other vehicles, jackhammers) can
interfere with detection of obstacles.
Fault indication
The parking assistant system indicates a fault in
two ways:
After reverse gear has been selected, the
short signal tone is followed by a continuous
tone of the same pitch:
This indicates that sensors are soiled or cov-
ered with ice.
After reverse gear has been selected, the
short signal tone is followed by a continuous
tone with a much lower pitch:
This indicates a general system fault.
Please have the fault remedied at an author-
ized Porsche dealer.
A- Control switch for door mirror adjustment
Swivelling down mirror glass as a parking
aid
fPlease see the chapter “SEAT MEMORY” on
Page 33.
When reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
glass on the passenger’s side swivels down
slightly to show the curb area.
Preconditions
Vehicle must be equipped with seat memory.
Set the control switch A to “passenger’s side”.
Reverse gear must be engaged.
Returning mirror glass to its original position
fDrive forwards with a speed of over 4 mph
(6 km/h) or
fSet the control switch A to “driver’s side”.
74 Operation, Safety
O - Initial position
1 - Ignition on
2 - Start engine
3 - Ignition off
Ignition/Starter Switch with
anti-theft Steering Lock
The ignition lock has a total of four ignition lock po-
sitions.
The ignition key rebounds to the initial position
from every ignition lock position.
fFor your safety, fasten safety belts.
fPlease see the chapter “IMMOBILIZER” on
Page 15.
fPlease see the chapter “KEY WITH RADIO RE-
MOTE CONTROL” on Page 16.
Before starting the engine
fApply the footbrake.
fManual transmission:
Move the gearshift lever into neutral.
The clutch pedal must be depressed fully
before the starter will engage.
fIn vehicles with PDK transmission:
Move PDK selector lever to position P or N.
Switch position 0
Initial position
The ignition key cannot be withdrawn when the
ignition is switched on or when the engine has
been started.
To withdraw the ignition key:
fStop the vehicle.
fIn vehicles with PDK transmission:
Move PDK selector lever to position P.
fSwitch ignition off.
fRemove ignition key.
Switch position 1
Ignition on
fTurn ignition key to position 1.
Ignition is switched on.
Note on operation
All electrical equipment can be switched on.
fPlease see the chapter “WARNINGS ON THE
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE ON-BOARD
COMPUTER” on Page 158.
Operation, Safety 75
Switch position 2
Start engine
fTurn ignition key to ignition lock position 2.
fPlease see the chapter “STARTING PROCEDU-
RES” on Page 77.
Switch position 3
Ignition off
fTurn ignition key to ignition lock position 3.
Note on operation
The vehicle battery discharges if the ignition key is
left inserted.
If the vehicle battery is dead, the key can only be
pulled out of the ignition lock if the emergency
operation is performed:
fPlease see the chapter “EMERGENCY OPERA-
TION – PULLING OUT THE IGNITION KEY” on
Page 76.
Locking the steering column
Automatic locking
The steering column is automatically locked when
the ignition key is withdrawn from the ignition lock.
Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
The steering wheel will lock and will cause
loss of steering.
fNever remove key from the ignition lock or turn
the key off while the vehicle is moving.
fAlways withdraw the ignition key when
leaving the vehicle.
Automatic unlocking
The steering column is unlocked when the vehicle
is unlocked with the radio remote control.
Note
fTo avoid discharging the battery, always re-
move the ignition key from the ignition lock.
Please see the chapter “BATTERY” on
Page 261.
Gong
If you leave the key in the ignition/steering lock, a
gong will sound when the driver’s door is opened.
This is a reminder to remove the key.
76 Operation, Safety
Emergency operation – pulling out the
ignition key
If the vehicle battery is dead, the key can be pulled
out only if the emergency operation is performed.
1. Grasp the fuse box cover at the finger hole and
pull it off.
2. Unclip metal hook A on the inside of the cover.
3. Use metal hook A to remove the plastic lid B
from the ignition lock. Make sure that plastic lid
B is not lost.
4. Turn ignition key counter-clockwise as far as it
will go.
5. Press metal hook A into opening C.
An unlocking sound will be heard.
6. Turn the ignition key to initial position (0) and
remove.
7. Re-fit the plastic lid B.
Operation, Safety 77
Starting Procedures
fPlease see the chapter “IMMOBILIZER” on
Page 15.
fPlease see the chapter “EMISSION CONTROL
SYSTEM” on Page 218.
Warning!
Serious injury or death may result if you are
involved in a collision without having fas-
tened the safety belts.
fFasten safety belts before driving away.
Before starting the engine
fApply the footbrake.
fManual transmission:
Move the gearshift lever into neutral.
The clutch pedal must be depressed fully
before the starter will engage.
fIn vehicles with PDK transmission:
Move PDK selector lever to position P or N.
Temperature sensors on the engine automatically
provide the correct fuel/air mixture required for
starting.
Therefore, it is not necessary to depress the
accelerator pedal while starting a cold or a
warm engine.
Starting the engine
fTurn ignition key to ignition lock position 2.
fAs soon as the engine starts, release the igni-
tion key.
The first operation of the starter is ended automat-
ically when the engine starts.
If the engine does not start, subsequent starter
operations will not be ended automatically.
If the engine fails to start after 10 or 15 seconds
of cranking:
fWait about 10 seconds before engaging the
starter again.
fWhen starting the engine, be ready to drive
immediately.
Drive vehicle at moderate speeds and avoid
engine speeds above 4,200 rpm during the
first 5 minutes.
fDo not let the engine idle to warm up.
Danger!
Engine exhaust fumes have many compo-
nents which you can smell. They also contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is a colorless
and odorless gas.
Carbon monoxide can cause unconscious-
ness and even death if inhaled.
fNever start or let the engine run in an en-
closed, unventilated area.
It is not recommended to sit in your car for pro-
longed periods with the engine on and the car
not moving.
An unattended vehicle with a running engine
is potentially hazardous.
If warning lights should come on to indicate
improper operation, they would go unno-
ticed.
fNever leave the engine idling unattended.
Danger of fire.
fDo not park or operate the vehicle in areas
where the hot exhaust system may come in
contact with dry grass, brush, fuel spill or oth-
er flammable material.
fIf your car catches on fire for any reason, call
the fire department.
Do not endanger your life by attempting to put
out the fire.
Risk of burn injury when standing near or
coming into contact with the exhaust pipe.
The exhaust pipe is hot when the vehicle is running
and remains hot for some time after the vehicle is
turned off.
fTo prevent injury, make a point of noting where
your vehicle’s exhaust pipe is, avoid placing
your legs near the exhaust pipe, and closely
supervise children around the vehicle when the
exhaust pipe could be hot.
A hot exhaust pipe can cause serious burns.
78 Operation, Safety
Stopping Engine
fTurn key back to position 3.
fDo not stop engine immediately after hard or
extended driving.
Keep engine running at increased idle for
about two minutes to prevent excessive heat
build-up before turning off engine.
fTo avoid discharging the battery, always re-
move the ignition key from the ignition lock.
fWhen leaving the car, always remove the igni-
tion key and apply the handbrake. Engage 1st
gear or reverse gear on vehicles with manual
transmission or move the selector lever to po-
sition P on vehicles with PDK transmission.
fEngage the steering lock by moving the steer-
ing wheel to the left or right.
Turn the steering wheel to the locking position
before you switch off the engine so that you
don’t have to exert yourself when locking or
unlocking the steering.
Warning!
Danger of injury. Hot engine compartment
components can burn skin on contact.
fBefore working on any part in the engine com-
partment, turn the engine off and let it cool
down sufficiently.
Engine-compartment blower,
radiator fan
The radiator and radiator fans are in the front of
the car.
The engine-compartment blower is mounted on
the engine compartment lid.
Warning!
Risk of injury.
After the engine is switched off, the engine-
compartment temperature is monitored for
approx. 30 minutes.
During this period, and depending on tem-
perature, the engine-compartment blower
may continue to run or start to run.
fCarry out work in these areas only with the en-
gine off, the ignition off, and exercise extreme
caution.
Risk of injury. The radiator fans in the front
end of the car may be operating or
unexpectedly start operating when the
engine is switched on.
fCarry out work in these areas only with the en-
gine switched off.
Automatic garage door
The ignition system in your Porsche may interfere
with your electronically operated garage door.
fTo check this, drive your Porsche close to the
garage door. Make sure not to interfere with
the operating range of the door.
fRun the engine at different speeds.
fIf the garage door opens or closes without you
operating the garage door unit in your car,
contact the dealer who installed the automatic
garage door to have the frequency and/or
coding of the garage door signal changed or
modified.
Operation, Safety 79
Operational readiness of the emergency flasher
does not depend on the ignition lock and turn sig-
nal lever position.
fIf your car is disabled or parked under emer-
gency conditions switch on the emergency
flasher in the dashboard.
All turn signals and the indicator light in the
switch flash with the same frequency.
Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
fWhenever stalled or stopped for emergency re-
pairs, move the car well off the road. Switch on
the emergency flasher and mark the car with
road flares or other warning devices.
fDo not remain in the car. Someone approach-
ing from the rear may not realize your vehicle
is stopped and cause a collision.
Danger of fire.
fDo not park or operate the vehicle in areas
where the hot exhaust system may come in
contact with dry grass, brush, fuel spill or
other flammable material.
Hot engine compartment components can
burn skin on contact.
fBefore working on any part in the engine
compartment, turn the engine off and let it cool
down sufficiently.
Emergency Flasher Switch
80 Operation, Safety
Warning chime
If the ignition key is withdrawn and the door is
opened while the lights (not the parking light or
Welcome Home lighting) are on, a chime warns of
possible battery discharge.
In some countries, differences are possible
due to provisions of law.
Daytime driving lights
The daytime driving lights are integrated in the
front auxiliary headlights. These lights are
switched on only when the engine is running and
with the light switch in the positions OFF or HOME.
Low beam headlights must be switched on when
driving through tunnels or at dusk, for example.
Operation of the daytime driving lights may vary
depending on country-specific regulations.
Canada only:
In addition to the auxiliary headlights the parking
lights are switched on.
USA only:
The daytime driving lights can be deactivated in
the on-board computer.
fPlease see the chapter “ON-BOARD
COMPUTER (BC)” on Page 126.
Vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus
Further individual light functions (e.g. daytime driv-
ing lights) are available in vehicles with the Sport
Chrono Package Plus.
fPlease observe the chapter “Individual Memo-
ry” in the separate PCM operating instructions.
Cornering light
The dynamic cornering light is activated above
speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h).
Light Switch
Lights switched off
Daytime driving lights are switched on
when the engine is running.
Welcome Home Function
Daytime driving lights are switched on
when the engine is running.
Parking lights, side marker lights,
license plate light, instrument illumina-
tion, daytime driving lights switched off
Low beam, high beam
Only with ignition on,
daytime driving lights switched off
Rear fog light
Pull switch to second click.
Indicator light on.
Operation, Safety 81
Welcome Home Lighting
Switching on
fMove light switch to the HOME position.
For improved visibility and security when you get
in and out of the car, the daytime driving lights and
the tail lights remain on for a certain period of
time:
When you get out of the car, the lights are
turned on for approx. 30 seconds after the
door is opened. The off-delay time resumes
when the vehicle is locked.
On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package
Plus, the PCM can be used to set the off-delay
time. This setting also changes the lighting
period for unlocking the vehicle.
Please observe the chapter “Individual
Memory” in the separate PCM operating
instructions.
The lights are turned on for approx.
30 seconds when the vehicle is unlocked.
The lights go out if the ignition is switched on
or when leaving the Welcome Home lighting.
Automatic Headlight Beam
Adjustment
Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlights feature
dynamic headlight beam adjustment.
When the ignition is switched on, the level of the
headlight beam automatically changes in accord-
ance with the vehicle load.
The level of the headlight beam is automatically
kept constant during acceleration and braking.
Checking operation
1. Switch the low beam on.
2. Insert ignition key and switch ignition on.
The light beam first dips all the way down and
is then adapted to the vehicle load.
If this test item is not met, the headlight beam
adjustment system must be checked by an author-
ized Porsche dealer.
82 Operation, Safety
Turn Signal / Headlight Dimmer /
Parking light / Flasher Lever
Turn signals, low beam and high beam are ready
for operation when the ignition is on.
1 – Turn signal left
2 – Turn signal right
Push the lever to the upper or lower pressure
point – turn signals flash three times
3 – High beam
4 – Headlight flasher
Lever in center position – Low beam
When high beam and headlight flasher are select-
ed, the blue indicator light in the tachometer is lit.
The turn signal lever turns off automatically when
the steering wheel is straightened out after com-
pleting a turn.
Lane changer
fTo indicate your intention when changing lanes
on the freeway, slightly lift or depress the lever
to the resistance point.
The lever will return to the OFF position when
released.
fIf the frequency of the display becomes notice-
ably faster, check the operation of the turn sig-
nal bulbs.
Headlight flasher
(With ignition on or off)
fTo flash the headlights to oncomming motor-
ists, slightly pull the lever toward the steering
wheel and then release it.
The blue indicator light in the tachometer will
go on/off as you pull/release the lever.
Parking light
The parking light can only be switched on when
the ignition is switched off.
fMove the lever up or down to switch on the
right or left parking light.
Individual Light Functions
Further individual light functions are available in
vehicles with the Sport Chrono Plus package.
fPlease refer to the chapter “Individual Memory”
in the separate PCM operating instructions.
Operation, Safety 83
Windshield Wiper / Washer Lever
Warning!
Danger of injury when the windshield wipers
operate unintentionally, e.g. in intermittent
or rain sensor operation.
Risk of damage to the windshield and wiper
system.
fAvoid running the wiper blades over a dry wind-
shield to prevent scratching the glass. Spray
washer fluid on the windshield first.
A scratched windshield will reduce visibility.
fAlways loosen wiper blades from frozen glass
before operating wipers to prevent damage to
the wiper motor or blades.
fAlways switch off windshield wipers in car
wash to prevent them wiping unintentionally
(intermittent or sensor operation).
fAlways switch off windshield wipers before
cleaning the windshield to avoid unintentional
operation (intermittent or sensor operation).
fDo not operate the headlight washer in car
washes.
fDo not operate headlight washer when it is
frozen.
Front wiper and headlight washer system
0 – Windshield wipers off
1 – Rain sensor operation for front
windshield wipers
fMove wiper lever upwards to the first click.
Please see the chapter “RAIN SENSOR” on
Page 85.
2 – Windshield wipers slow
fMove wiper lever upwards to the second click.
3 – Windshield wipers fast
fMove wiper lever upwards to the third click.
4 – Front windshield wiper – one-touch oper-
ation:
fMove wiper lever downwards. The front wind-
shield wipers wipe once.
5 – Windshield wipers and washer system:
fPull wiper lever towards the steering wheel.
The washer system sprays and wipes while the
lever is pulled towards the steering wheel.
When the wiper lever is released, a few drying
wipes are executed.
A - Headlight washer:
The washer sprays only while low beam or high
beam is switched on.
fBriefly push button A to operate headlight
washer system.
fIf heavily soiled, repeat wash.
The headlight washer system automatically sprays
once for every ten times the front windshield
washer system is operated.
Note
The windshield washer nozzles are heated
when the ignition is on, as a precaution against
freezing.
84 Operation, Safety
Rear Wiper
6 – Rear window wiper – intermittent
operation
fMove wiper lever forwards to the first click.
The rear window wiper wipes at preset inter-
vals.
The rear wiper is automatically switched off when
a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h) is exceeded. It is
switched on again when the speed falls below
124 mph (200 km/h).
On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus,
further rear wiper functions can be selected via
the PCM.
fPlease observe the chapter “Individual
Memory” in the separate PCM operating
instructions.
Operation, Safety 85
Rain sensor
The rain sensor on the windshield measures the
amount of rainfall (snowfall too). Wiper speed is
automatically adjusted accordingly.
Switching on
fMove wiper lever upwards to the first click.
Switching off
fMove wiper lever to position 0.
The rain sensor remains switched off if the wiper
lever is already in position 1 when the ignition is
switched on.
To switch the rain sensor on again:
fMove wiper lever to position 0 and then to
position 1 or
fOperate windshield washer system 5 or
fChange the sensitivity of the rain sensor with
four-stage switch A.
Switch-on is confirmed by one wipe of the wind-
shield.
On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus,
further rain sensor functions can be selected via
the PCM.
fPlease see the chapter “Individual Memory” in
the separate PCM operating instructions.
Changing the sensitivity of the rain sensor
Sensitivity can be set with switch A in 4 stages:
fAdjust switch A upwards –
high sensitivity.
The setting is confirmed by one wipe of the
windshield.
fAdjust switch A downwards –
low sensitivity.
Maintenance note
fPeriodically clean the wiper blades with a win-
dow cleaner, especially after the vehicle has
been washed in a car wash. We recommend
Porsche window cleaner. If they are very dirty
(e.g. with insect remains), they can be cleaned
with a sponge or cloth.
If the wiper blades rub or squeak, this may be as
a result of the following:
If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car wash,
wax residues may be adhering to the windshield.
These wax residues can only be removed by using
a window cleaner concentrate.
fPlease see the chapter “WASHER FLUID” on
Page 220.
fPlease contact your authorized Porsche dealer
for further information.
The wiper blades may be damaged or worn.
fReplace wiper blades as soon as possible.
86 Operation, Safety
A- Automatic speed control readiness off/on
1-+SPEED/SET (accelerate/store)
2-SPEED (decelerate)
3- OFF (interrupt)
4-RESUME
Automatic Speed Control
The automatic speed control maintains any
selected speed between 15 mph and 145 mph
(30 km/h and 240 km/h) without you having to
use the accelerator pedal.
The automatic speed control is operated with the
lever on the steering wheel.
Vehicles with PDK
Downshifts are carried out to help maintain the
pre-selected speed (especially when driving down-
hill).
Warning!
Risk of an accident resulting in serious per-
sonal injury or death. A constant speed may
not be safe in heavy traffic, or on winding or
slippery roads.
With the speed control system engaged, the
engine speed will not return to idle when re-
moving the foot from the accelerator pedal.
fDo not use the speed control when it may be
unsafe to keep the car at a constant speed.
fObserve all local and national speed limits.
Switch automatic speed control
readiness on
fPress button A on the automatic speed control
lever.
Hold and store speed
fBring the car to the desired speed with the
accelerator.
fThen briefly push the operating lever forward
(position 1).
Accelerating (e.g. to overtake)
Option 1
fIncrease the speed as usual with the
accelerator.
When you ease off the accelerator, the
previously saved value is set again.
Option 2
fPush operating lever forward (position 1) until
the desired speed is reached.
The speed reached is maintained and stored
when the lever is released.
Option 3
fPush lever slightly forwards (position 1)
(a maximum of 10 times).
The speed is increased by 1 mph (1.6 km/h),
each time the lever is pushed forwards.
Note on operation
Speed control operation is automatically interrupt-
ed if the speed is increased by more than approx.
16 mph (25 km/h ) for longer than 20 seconds.
This green indicator light in the
speedometer now indicates readiness
Operation, Safety 87
Decelerating
Option 1
fPull operating lever towards the steering wheel
(position 2) until the desired speed is reached.
The speed reached is maintained and stored
when the lever is released.
Option 2
fBriefly move lever towards the steering wheel
(position 2) (a maximum of 10 times).
The speed is reduced by 1 mph (1.6 km/h),
each time the lever is moved towards the
steering wheel.
Vehicles with PDK
Downshifts are carried out to improve decelera-
tion (especially when driving downhill).
Interrupting automatic speed control
operation
fPull operating lever downwards briefly
(position 3) or
fOperate brake or clutch pedal or
fSwitch PDK to selector lever position N.
fPlease see the chapter “PORSCHE DOPPEL-
KUPPLUNG (PDK)” on Page 170.
The speed driven before the interruption remains
stored in the memory.
Automatic speed control operation is
interrupted automatically:
If the set vehicle speed is exceeded by more
than approx. 16 mph (25 km/h) for longer than
20 seconds.
If the actual vehicle speed falls to approx.
37 mph (60 km/h) below the set vehicle speed
for longer than 60 seconds (upward slopes).
For PSM control operations.
Resuming the stored speed
fBriefly push operating lever upwards
(position 4).
The speed control accelerates/decelerates
the vehicle to the stored speed.
The stored speed should only be recalled when
traffic conditions and the road surface so permit.
Switching automatic speed control
readiness off
fPress button A on the automatic speed control
lever.
The green readiness light in the speedometer
goes off.
Note
The stored speed value is cleared when the
vehicle is parked and the ignition is switched off.
Important note
On upward or downward slopes, the set speed
cannot always be maintained by the automatic
speed control.
fTo obtain sufficient engine braking or a better
engine-speed range, a lower gear needs to be
selected.
88 Operation, Safety
Cupholder
(holder for drink cans and cups)
fKeep the cupholder closed while driving.
Warning!
Risk of scalding or damage due to spilling
drinks.
fOnly use beverage containers which fit.
fNever put overfull containers in the cupholder.
fNever place hot drinks in the cupholder.
Extending cupholder
fPress the panel.
The panel opens.
fPress the symbol for the respective cupholder.
The cupholder extends out.
fClose panel in the middle.
The cupholder diameter can be increased by pull-
ing it out to hold larger containers.
Operation, Safety 89
Pulling cupholder out
fPull out holder (arrow).
fInsert container.
fCarefully slide holder inwards to adjust it to the
container size.
Closing cupholder
fPush cupholder drawer in.
fOpen panel in the middle.
fClose and engage the cupholder.
fClose panel in the middle.
Ashtray
Opening
fOpen ashtray lid.
90 Operation, Safety
Emptying
fOpen ashtray and carefully pull out ash insert.
fLeave ashtray lid open.
Push in ash insert.
Warning!
Danger of fire.
fNever use ashtray for waste paper disposal,
as it could pose a fire hazard.
Cigarette Lighter
Warning!
Danger of fire and burning.
The cigarette lighter is ready for use, regard-
less of the ignition lock position.
fNever leave unsupervised children in the car.
fNever touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter.
fHold the lighter by the knob only.
Heating lighter
fOpen ashtray lid.
fPush in knob of the cigarette lighter.
When ready for use, the lighter will snap back.
Note on operation
The lighter receptacle is not to be used for
electrical accessories (except for the tire filling
compressor).
Maximum power consumption: 150 W
fPlease see the chapter “SOCKETS” on
Page 257.
Operation, Safety 91
Storage in the Passenger
Compartment
Warning!
Unsecured luggage and heavy objects may
come loose during braking, rapid directional
changes or in an accident and cause serious
personal injury or death.
fDo not transport any heavy objects in the
storage trays.
fDo not carry unsecured luggage or objects in
the passenger compartment.
Additional storage possibilities
in the doors,
in the door sill next to the passenger’s seat,
in the center console,
behind the rear seat backrests
(only with the convertible top closed on the
Cabriolet, when opening the convertible top
there should not be any objects in the area
behind the rear seats – risk of damage),
storage tray with coin holder between seats,
glove compartment with CD and pen holder,
clothes hook on the roof frame,
clothes hook on back of front backrests
(depending on vehicle equipment),
enlarged storage space by folding the rear
seat backrests forward.
Storage tray between the seats
Opening
fPress release button and lift the lid.
There is a coin holder and socket in the
forward part of the storage tray.
fPlease see the chapter “SOCKETS” on
Page 257.
92 Operation, Safety
Glove compartment
Warning!
Risk of injury by the glove compartment lid in
case of an accident.
fKeep the glove compartment closed while
driving.
Opening
fPull the catch and open the lid.
Locking
fLock the catch to secure the contents against
unauthorized access.
CD holder
Occupied drawers are indicated by a red window.
Opening drawers
fPush the button of the drawer you wish to
open.
Closing drawers
fFold up CD drawer and close until it engages.
Pen holder
A pen can be clipped in on the right side of the CD
holder.
Operation, Safety 93
A - Opening luggage compartment lid
B - Opening engine compartment lid
Luggage Compartment Lid and
Engine Compartment Lid
Unlocking
fOperate the appropriate pull-button next to the
driver’s seat.
The luggage compartment or engine compart-
ment is illuminated when the respective lid is
open.
fPlease see the chapter “LOAD SWITCH-OFF AF-
TER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on Page 258.
The luggage compartment lid can also be un-
locked with the radio remote control.
fPlease see the chapter “KEYS” on Page 15.
Important Note
If the vehicle battery is discharged, the luggage
compartment lid can be opened only by connect-
ing an external electrical power source.
fPlease see the chapter “ELECTRICAL SYS-
TEM” on Page 257.
or the description inside the fuse box lid.
A warning message in the on-board computer
comes on if the lids are not completely closed.
fFully close the lid.
Warning message
94 Operation, Safety
Opening luggage compartment lid
Caution!
Risk of damage to luggage compartment lid
or windshield wipers.
fMake sure that the windshield wipers are not
folded out forwards when opening the luggage
compartment lid.
fRaise lid slightly and unlatch the safety catch
with the red lever (arrow).
Closing luggage compartment lid and
engine compartment lid
fLower the lid and close it.
fPush the lid closed with the palm of your hand
in the area of the lock.
Check that the lid has correctly engaged in the
lock.
Warning!
Risk of loss of control or an accident, result-
ing in serious personal injury or death.
fShould you notice at any time while driving that
one of the lids is not secured properly, please
stop immediately in a suitable place and close
it.
The front lid may fly up impairing vision.
Operation, Safety 95
Luggage Compartment
(Vehicles without Porsche Traction
Management PTM)
Access covers A and B
Caution!
Risk of injury or damage.
fDo not store any objects behind the access
covers A and B.
E- Adapter for security wheel bolts
F- Tire filling compressor
G- Towing hook
H-Tool kit
I-Tire sealant
Tool box
Opening
fUnlock turn-locks C.
fOpen tool box and place it on the floor of the
luggage compartment.
Closing
fInsert tool box into the guide pegs in the
luggage compartment floor.
fClose tool box and lock the turn-locks C.
96 Operation, Safety
Luggage Compartment
(Vehicles with Porsche Traction
Management PTM)
Access cover A
Caution!
Risk of injury or damage.
fDo not store any objects behind the access
cover A.
B- Access cover for tire sealant
C- Tire filling compressor
D-Tool kit
E- Towing lug
F- Adapter for security wheel bolts
Tire sealant
The tire sealant is located behind the access
cover B.
fOpen access cover B using the opening.
Tools
The tools are located under the floor plate of the
luggage compartment.
fLift the floor plate on the opening and take out.
Operation, Safety 97
Trunk Entrapment
Your vehicle is equipped with an internal trunk
release mechanism.
A person trapped in the luggage compartment
can release the lid from the inside using the un-
locking handle.
The handle is fluorescent and glows in the dark.
Note
fWhen loading the luggage compartment, make
sure that items of luggage or other objects
cannot become caught on the handle.
This could cause the luggage compartment to
open unintentionally.
A warning message in the on-board computer
lights up when the unlocking handle is operated.
fStop the vehicle immediately when the warning
lights light up.
fCheck the luggage compartment.
fClose the lid.
Function with vehicle stationary
If the luggage compartment lid is unlocked with
unlocking the handle, the lid can be opened from
the inside immediately.
Function with vehicle in motion
If the luggage compartment lid is unlocked with
the unlocking handle when a speed of 2 mph
(3 km/h) is exceeded, the warning message in the
on-board computer lights up.
At the same time, the lid is unlocked and the latch
striker pops into the catch-hook position.
Danger!
Risk of accident.
If the warning message in the on-board com-
puter lights up when the vehicle is in motion,
the lid may impact in front of the windshield
and can tear off.
You can lose control of the vehicle and seri-
ous personal injury or death may result.
fStop the vehicle immediately when the warning
message lights up.
fCheck the luggage compartment.
fClose the lid.
Note
The lid cannot be opened from the inside if the bat-
tery is disconnected or empty.
Safety reasons require that you unscrew the
latch striker of the lid lock if you plan to put
the vehicle out of operation for an extended
period.
fPlease consult your authorized Porsche
dealer.
They will advise you about the necessary
measures.
Warning light
98 Operation, Safety
Porsche Communication
Management (PCM)
fRefer to the separate operating instructions
before putting the PCM into operation.
fPlease see the chapter “LOAD SWITCH-OFF
AFTER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on Page 258.
Warning!
There is a danger of accident if you set or
operate the on-board computer, radio, navi-
gation system, telephone or other equipment
when driving.
This could distract you from the traffic and
cause you to lose control of the vehicle re-
sulting in serious personal injury or death.
fOperate the components while driving only if
the traffic situation allows you to do so safely.
fCarry out any complicated operating or setting
procedures only with the vehicle stationary.
The reception conditions for the radio module
integrated in the PCM change continuously as you
drive. Interference from buildings, terrain and the
weather is unavoidable.
FM stereo reception is particularly susceptible to
varying reception conditions.
Electronic accessories should only be retrofitted
by your authorized Porsche dealer.
Accessories which have not been tested and
approved by Porsche may impair radio function
and reception.
Navigation
When put into operation for the first time, a
distance of approx. 30 miles (50 km) must be
driven in order for the navigation system to
complete the process of fine calibration.
The same applies when the tires are changed (e.g.
summer/snow tires) or new tires fitted.
Full location accuracy is not yet achieved during
the fine-calibration process.
If the vehicle has been transported (e.g. ferry, car
train), the system may take a few minutes to deter-
mine the current location after it has been
switched on.
Serious tire slip (e.g. spinning wheels on snow)
may result in temporarily inaccurate navigation.
When the battery has been disconnected, it may
take up to 15 minutes before the navigation
system is operational again.
Car Audio Operation/Tips
For radio operation see your radio manual
which is included with your on-board litera-
ture.
fPlease see the chapter “LOAD SWITCH-OFF AF-
TER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on Page 258.
FM reception
A vehicle is not an ideal place to listen to a radio.
Because the vehicle moves, reception conditions
are constantly changing.
Buildings, terrain, signal distance and noise from
other vehicles are all working against good recep-
tion.
Some conditions affecting FM may appear to be
problems when they are not.
The following characteristics are completely nor-
mal for a given reception area, and they do not in-
dicate any problem with the radio itself.
Note
Electronic accessories should only be installed by
your authorized Porsche dealer.
Equipment which has not been tested and ap-
proved by Porsche may impair radio reception.
Operation, Safety 99
Fading and drifting
FM range is limited to about 25 miles (40 km),
except for some high power stations.
If a vehicle is moving away from the desired sta-
tion’s transmitter, the signal will tend to fade and/
or drift. This condition is more prevalent with FM
than AM, and is often accompanied by distortion.
Fading and drifting can be minimized to a certain
degree by careful attention to fine tuning or selec-
tion of a stronger signal.
Static and fluttering
When the line-of-sight link between a transmitter
and vehicle is blocked by large buildings or moun-
tains, the radio sound may be accompanied with
static or fluttering because of the characteristic of
FM.
In a similar effect, a fluttering noise is sometimes
heard when driving along a tree-lined road.
This static and fluttering can be reduced by adjust-
ing the tone control for greater bass response un-
til the disturbance has passed.
Multipath
Because of the reflecting characteristics of FM,
direct and reflected signals may reach the antenna
at the same time (multipath) and cancel each other
out.
As a vehicle moves through these electronic dead
spots, the listener may hear a momentary flutter
or loss of reception.
Station swapping
When two FM stations are close to each other, and
an electronic dead spot, such as static or multi-
path area, interrupts the original signal, some-
times the stronger second signal will be selected
automatically until the original one returns.
This swapping can also occur as you drive away
from the selected station and approach another
station of a stronger signal.
Compact disc player
Caution!
To avoid damage to compact disc player and
discs.
fUse only compact discs labeled as shown, hav-
ing no dirt, damage or warpage.
fNever attempt to disassemble or oil any part
of the player unit.
Do not insert any object other than a disc into
the slot.
Remember there are no user-serviceable parts
inside the compact disc player.
fDo not allow the disc to sustain any finger-
prints, scrapes or stickers on the surfaces.
This may cause poor sound quality.
Hold the disc only on the edge or center hole.
fWhen not in use, take the disc out of the player,
put the disc back into its case and store it
away from dust, heat, damp and direct
sunlight.
Leaving the disc on the dashboard in the sun
can damage the disc.
fIf the disc gets dirty, clean the disc by wiping
the surfaces from the center to the outside in
a radial direction with a soft cloth.
Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
anti-static record preservative.
Disc cleaners are available in audio stores.
100 Operation, Safety
Antenna
fAlways unscrew the external antenna before
using an automatic car-wash.
On the Cabriolet and Targa the external antenna is
mounted on the right front fender.
Car Telephone and
Aftermarket Alarms
Important legal and safety information
regarding the use of cellular telephones
Some states may prohibit the use of cellular tele-
phones while driving a vehicle. Check the laws and
regulations on the use of cellular telephones in the
areas where you drive.
Danger!
Risk of an accident.
Severe personal injury or death can result in
the event of an accident.
Looking away from the road or turning your
attention away from your driving can cause
an accident and serious or fatal injury.
When using your cellular telephone, you should al-
ways:
fGive full attention to your driving - pull off the
road and park before making or answering a
call if traffic conditions so require; and
fKeep both hands on the steering wheel - use
hands-free operation (if available) - pull off the
road and park before using a hand-held tele-
phone.
It is essential to observe the telephone
manufacturer's instructions before operating
the telephone.
Any portable telephone or radio transmitter which
is used in a Porsche must be properly installed in
accordance with the technical requirements of
Porsche.
The transmission power must not exceed
10 W.
The devices must possess a type approval for
your vehicle and have an “e” symbol.
If you should require equipment with transmission
power values greater than 10 W, please consult
your authorized Porsche dealer for this purpose.
The dealer is familiar with the technical require-
ments for installing devices of this kind.
The antennas for all radios and telephones with a
transmitting antenna must be externally mounted.
The improper installation of radios or telephones
or use of a radio or telephone with a transmitting
antenna inside the car may cause the warning
lights to come on.
Improper installation of such equipment can cre-
ate a discharged battery or excessive current
draw from added equipment.
Operation, Safety 101
If aftermarket systems are installed by non-dealer-
ship technicians or outside the selling dealer,
problems may result. Installation of aftermarket
equipment is not covered under the New Car War-
ranty.
fConsult your authorized Porsche dealer about
the installation of non Porsche approved equip-
ment.
Reception quality
The reception quality of your car telephone will
change constantly when you are driving. Interfer-
ence caused by buildings, landscape and weather
is unavoidable. It may become particularly difficult
to hear when using the hands-free function due to
external noise such as engine and wind noise.
Automatic car-wash
fUnscrew external antennas before using an au-
tomatic car-wash.
iPod, USB and AUX
The interfaces for iPod, USB and AUX are located
in the storage tray between the seats.
fPlease refer to the chapter “External Audio
Source” in the separate PCM/CDR operating
instructions.
Note
Do not leave an iPod, USB storage device or an
external audio source in the vehicle for a
prolonged period as extreme ambient conditions
(temperature fluctuations, air humidity) can occur
in the vehicle.
102 Operation, Safety
Fire Extinguisher
In cars equipped with a fire extinguisher, the extin-
guisher is fitted to the front of the driver’s seat.
Taking out fire extinguisher
1. Hold fire extinguisher with one hand and press
the PRESS button on the fastening strap with
the other hand (arrow).
2. Remove fire extinguisher from mounting.
Inserting fire extinguisher
1. Place fire extinguisher in the mounting.
2. Engage fastening strap lug A in the tension
jack and close tension jack (arrow).
Note
fPay attention to the final control date on the
fire extinguisher.
If the fire extinguisher is used after its expira-
tion date has elapsed, it may not operate
properly.
fFollow the operating instructions on the fire
extinguisher.
fThe functional ability of the fire extinguisher
should be checked by a specialist workshop
every 1-2 years.
fAfter use, have the fire extinguisher refilled.
Operation, Safety 103
1, 2, 3 - Programmable buttons
A- Light-emitting diode for status identification
HomeLink
The programmable HomeLink replaces up to three
original hand-held transmitters used to operate
various devices (e.g. garage door, gate to the
property, alarm system).
You can program buttons 1 to 3 with a frequency
of an original handheld transmitter.
Warning!
Risk of accident when using the HomeLink if
persons, animals or objects are within the
range of movement of the equipment that is
being operated.
fWhen using the HomeLink, ensure that no
persons, animals or objects are within the
range of movement of the equipment that is
being operated.
fObserve the safety notes for the original
hand-held transmitter.
Preconditions for operating and
programming the HomeLink:
The battery in the original hand-held trans-
mitter must be new.
Ignition is switched on.
Daytime driving lights are switched off.
To operate the respective device:
fPress the appropriate button (1, 2 or 3).
Light-emitting diode A lights up during signal
transfer.
Note on operation
fAlways use the HomeLink opener in the
direction of travel.
Otherwise, range restrictions cannot be ruled
out.
fBefore selling the vehicle, delete the
programmed signals of the HomeLink.
fPlease read the instructions for the original
hand-held transmitter to find out whether the
original transmitter is equipped with fixed or
changeable code.
fAlways fit new batteries in your hand-held trans-
mitter before programming the transmitter.
Allocating signals to the buttons
fPlease follow the operating instructions for the
original hand-held transmitter.
Clearing factory settings prior to program-
ming the HomeLink for the first time
The following process deletes the standard codes
set at the factory. Do not repeat the process if you
program further buttons.
fKeep the two outer buttons 1 and 3
depressed for approx. 20 seconds until light-
emitting diode A begins to flash quickly.
All programmed signals of buttons 1 to 3 are
deleted.
104 Operation, Safety
Programming HomeLink with fixed code
hand-held transmitters
1. Press the desired button until the light-emitting
diode begins to flash slowly.
You then have approx. 5 minutes to perform
steps 2 and 3.
2. Hold the original hand-held transmitter approx.
0 to 12 in. (0 to 30 cm) in front of the marked
position (figure) on the vehicle.
3. Press the transmit button on the original hand-
held transmitter until the daytime driving lights
flash three times (up to approx. 45 seconds).
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to allocate other buttons.
Note
Programming HomeLink with changeable
code hand-held transmitters
1. Press the desired button until the light-emitting
diode begins to flash slowly.
You then have approx. 5 minutes to perform
steps 2 and 3.
2. Hold the original hand-held transmitter approx.
0 to 12 in. (0 to 30 cm) in front of the marked
position (figure) on the vehicle.
3. Press the transmit button on the original hand-
held transmitter until the daytime driving lights
flash three times (up to approx. 45 seconds).
4. To synchronize the system:
Press the programming button on the receiver
for the garage door actuator.
Afterwards, you usually have approx.
30 seconds to initiate step 5.
5. Press the allocated HomeLink button twice.
(With some devices, the button to be allocated
must be pressed a third time in order to
complete the setting process.)
6. Repeat the programming steps to allocate
other buttons.
Note
Several attempts with different distances between
the vehicle and the original hand-held transmitter
might be necessary.
The daytime driving lights will flash once the 5
minutes have been exceeded. Programming must
be repeated from the beginning.
fPlease consult your authorized Porsche dealer
if you have not been able to successfully
allocate signals for the garage door opener to
the buttons even though you have carefully
followed the instructions in this chapter and
the operating instructions for the original hand-
held transmitter.
Deleting programmed signals of the
HomeLink
(e.g., when selling the vehicle)
Keep the two outer buttons 1 and 3 depressed
for approx. 20 seconds until light-emitting diode A
begins to flash quickly.
All programmed signals of buttons 1 to 3 are
deleted.
Automatic Air Conditioning System, Heated Rear Window/Door Mirror Heating 105
Automatic Air Conditioning System, Heated Rear Window/Door Mirror Heating
Automatic Air Conditioning System ............. 106
Central and Side Vents............................... 109
Fresh-air Intake ......................................... 109
Heated Rear Window/Door Mirror Heating... 110
106 Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating
Automatic Air Conditioning System
The automatic air-conditioning system controls
the preselected interior temperature completely
automatically.
If necessary, the automatic system can be
manually adjusted.
Automatic mode
fPress AUTO button G.
AUTO will appear on the display panel.
Air quantity and distribution are automatically
controlled and variations are compensated.
All automatic setting functions can be individually
changed.
This setting is retained until the appropriate
function button is pressed again or the AUTO
button is pressed.
A- Defrosting the windshield
B-Heated rear window
C-Temperature sensor
D- AC OFF button (air-conditioning compressor off/on)
E- Recirculating-air button
F- Temperature button
G- AUTO button (automatic mode)
H- Air distribution to footwell
I- Air distribution to central and side vents
J- Air distribution to windshield
K-Blower speed button
Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating 107
Setting temperature
fPress button F upwards or downwards
respectively.
To suit personal comfort, the interior temperature
can be adjusted between 61 °F and 85 °F/16 °C
and 29.5 °C.
Recommendation: 72 °F/22 °C.
If “LO” or “HI” appears on the display, the system
is operating at maximum cooling or heating pow-
er.
Automatic control is no longer active.
Note
If the preselected temperature is changed, the
blower speed can increase automatically in auto-
matic mode.
The desired temperature is reached more quickly
this way.
Sensors
To avoid affecting the performance of the air-con-
ditioning system:
fDo not cover the sun sensor on the instrument
panel or the temperature sensor C.
fPress button A (switch on or off).
The windshield is defogged or defrosted as
quickly as possible.
Air flows to the windshield only.
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
AC OFF – switching compressor for air-
conditioning system on and off
The air-conditioning compressor switches off
automatically at temperatures below approx.
37 °F/3 °C and cannot be switched on, even
manually.
Whenever outside temperatures exceed approx.
37 °F/3 °C, the air-conditioning compressor is
always switched on in automatic mode.
The compressor can be switched off to save fuel,
but control comfort is then limited:
fPress AC OFF button D.
The compressor is switched off.
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
fIf the interior temperature is too high, switch
compressor back on or press AUTO button.
To dry incoming air in damp weather, do not
switch off the air-conditioning compressor.
This prevents fogging of windows.
fPress button K upwards or downwards respec-
tively.
The preset blower speed is increased or
decreased.
The speed stages are indicated by a bar display.
If the button is pressed downwards at the lowest
blower stage, the blower and automatic control
are switched off. “OFF” will appear on the display
field.
Pressing the button upwards or pressing the
AUTO button switches the blower and automatic
control back on again.
Warning!
Risk of accident due to impaired vision,
resulting in serious personal injury or death.
In recirculating-air setting, the windows may
fog up.
fOnly select recirculating-air setting for short
periods.
fIf the windows fog up, switch recirculating-air
setting off immediately by pressing the
circulating-air button again and select the
“Defrost windshield” function.
Defrosting the windshield Adjusting blower speed
Recirculating-air setting
108 Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating
Switching recirculating-air setting on or off
fPress button E.
The outside-air supply is interrupted and only
the inside air is circulated.
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
Over approx. 37 °F/3 °C
If the air-conditioning compressor was off, it
switches on automatically. The duration of recircu-
lating-air setting is not limited.
Below approx. 37 °F/3 °C
The air-conditioning compressor is switched off.
Recirculating-air setting is automatically ended
after approx. 3 minutes.
Air distribution
The individual air distributions can be combined as
desired.
Recommended setting in Summer:
Air distribution to central and side vents.
Recommended setting in Winter:
Air distribution to footwell and windshield.
fPress button H.
The air flows to the footwell.
The selection appears on the display panel.
fPress button I.
The air flows from the central and side vents.
Vents must be open.
The selection appears on the display panel.
fPress button J.
The air flows to the windshield.
The selection appears on the display panel.
Note on operation
fOn vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package
Plus, individual air conditioning settings can be
stored on your vehicle key.
Please observe the chapter “Individual
Memory” in the separate PCM operating
instructions.
General instructions for air-conditioning
compressor
Can switch off briefly if engine is under an ex-
treme load to ensure sufficient engine cooling.
Switches off automatically at temperatures be-
low approx. 37 °F/3 °C and cannot be
switched on, even manually.
Operates most effectively with windows
closed.
If the car has been in the sun for a long time, it
is a good idea to ventilate the interior briefly
with the windows open.
Depending on the outside temperature and hu-
midity, condensation can drip from the evapo-
rator and form a pool under the vehicle.
This is normal and not a sign of leakage.
If uncooled air flows out when the lowest
temperature has been set, switch off the air-
conditioning compressor and have the fault
repaired at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Air distribution to footwell
Air distribution to central and side
vents
Air distribution to windshield
Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating 109
A- Continuous opening and closing
B- Setting vent direction
Central and Side Vents
fRotate knurled wheel upward.
fRotate knurled wheel downward.
Changing air flow direction
fMove the vanes to make the air flow in the
desired direction.
Outside air or conditioned air can be delivered
from all vents, depending on the air-distribution
setting on the operating panel.
Opening vents
Closing vents
Fresh-air Intake
To ensure proper air intake:
fKeep the fresh-air inlet between the luggage
compartment lid and the windshield free from
snow, ice and leaves.
110 Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating
The heated rear window/door mirror heating is
ready for operation when the ignition is on.
Switching on
fPress button.
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
After approx. 15 minutes, the heating switches off
automatically.
The heater can be switched back on by pressing
the button again.
Switching off
fPress button.
The light-emitting diode in the button goes out.
Heated Rear Window/Door
Mirror Heating
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 111
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
Instrument Panel USA Models..................... 112
Instrument Panel Canada Models................ 114
Engine Oil Temperature.............................. 116
Automatic Speed Control Indicator light ...... 116
Instrument Illumination............................... 116
Trip Odometer........................................... 117
Speedometer............................................ 118
Changing over between Miles / Kilometers.. 118
Tachometer .............................................. 119
Turn Signal Indicator Light.......................... 119
High Beam Indicator Light.......................... 119
Gear Shift Indicator “A”
(in vehicles with manual transmission)......... 119
Cooling System......................................... 120
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) .................. 121
Fuel.......................................................... 122
Clock ....................................................... 123
Outside Temperature ................................. 123
Engine Oil Pressure................................... 124
Check Engine (Emission Control) ................ 125
On-Board Computer (BC) ............................ 126
Warnings on the instrument panel
and the on-board computer........................ 158
112 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
Instrument Panel USA Models
Also refer to the corresponding chapters in
the Owner’s Manual.
1.Engine oil temperature gage
2.Speedometer with analogue display
3.Tire pressure warning light
4.Turn signal indicator light, left
5.Tachometer
6.High beam indicator light
7.Turn signal indicator light, right
8.ABS warning light
9.Cooling system
Temperature gage, warning light
10.Fuel
Level gage, warning light
11.Engine oil pressure gage
12.Adjustment button for instrument illumination
and trip counter
13.Odometer and daily trip mileage display
14.Automatic speed control indicator light
15.Light sensor for instrument illumination
16.Airbag warning light
17.Check Engine warning light
(Emission control warning light)
18.Central warning light
19.On-board computer display
20.Porsche Stability Management
PSM Multifunctional light
21.Brake warning light
22.Safety belt warning light
23.PDK transmission, gear display
24.PDK transmission, selector lever position
25.Clock and outside temperature display
26.Adjustment button for clock
When the ignition is switched on, the warning
lights light up for a lamp check.
Note
Warnings that have been given are stored in the
appropriate control unit memory and can be read
out at an authorized Porsche dealer.
This information can help to warn you about situa-
tions which may be hazardous to you or your car.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 113
114 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
Instrument Panel Canada Models
Also refer to the corresponding chapters in
the Owner’s Manual.
1.Engine oil temperature gage
2.Speedometer with analogue display
3.Tire pressure warning light
4.Turn signal indicator light, left
5.Tachometer
6.High beam indicator light
7.Turn signal indicator light, right
8.ABS warning light
9.Cooling system
Temperature gage, warning light
10.Fuel
Level gage, warning light
11.Engine oil pressure gage
12.Adjustment button for instrument illumination
and trip counter
13.Odometer and daily trip mileage display
14.Automatic speed control indicator light
15.Light sensor for instrument illumination
16.Airbag warning light
17.Check Engine warning light
(Emission control warning light)
18.Central warning light
19.On-board computer display
20.Porsche Stability Management
PSM Multifunctional light
21.Brake warning light
22.Safety belt warning light
23.PDK transmission, gear display
24.PDK transmission, selector lever position
25.Clock and outside temperature display
26.Adjustment button for clock
When the ignition is switched on, the warning
lights light up for a lamp check.
Note
Warnings that have been given are stored in the
appropriate control unit memory and can be read
out at an authorized Porsche dealer.
This information can help to warn you about situa-
tions which may be hazardous to you or your car.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 115
116 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
The engine oil temperature is indicated in the left
instrument.
A- Adjustment button for instrument illumination and
trip counter
Indicates automatic speed control readiness.
Instrument Illumination
The illumination is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness by the light sensor in the
tachometer.
In addition, when the car lights are switched on,
the instrument and switch symbol brightness can
be manually adjusted.
Warning!
Risk of loss of control or accident, resulting
in serious personal injury or death.
fDo not reach through the steering-wheel
spokes while driving.
Note
When the car lights are switched on, the instru-
ment lighting for light dials switches on and off
automatically depending on the ambient bright-
ness.
Engine Oil Temperature
Automatic Speed Control
Indicator light
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 117
Dimming instrument illumination
fTurn adjustment button A in the appropriate di-
rection and hold it until the desired brightness
has been reached.
The chosen level of brightness is indicated by a
bar display in the display field of the on-board
computer.
Trip Odometer
Warning!
Risk of loss of control or accident, resulting
in serious personal injury or death.
fDo not reach through the steering-wheel
spokes while driving.
Resetting to zero
fPress adjustment button A for approximately
one second or
fReset the distance in the “SET” menu of the on-
board computer.
Please see the chapter “SET BASIC SETTING
ON ON-BOARD COMPUTER” on Page 155.
After exceeding 6,213 miles or 9,999 kilometers,
the counter returns to “0”.
118 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
Speedometer
The digital speedometer is integrated in the on-
board computer.
The indication changes from mph to km/h when
the units are changed from miles to kilometers.
Changing over between
Miles / Kilometers
The units of the distance and speed displays can
be changed in the “SET” menu of the on-board
computer.
fPlease see the chapter “SET BASIC SETTING
ON ON-BOARD COMPUTER” on Page 155.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 119
Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine speed in revolu-
tions per minute (rpm).
The beginning of the red marks at the right end of
the scale indicates the maximum permissible en-
gine rpm.
A speed limiter prevents the engine from being
overrevved during acceleration. Before reaching
this area, the next higher gear should be select-
ed.
Shift to the next lower gear when the engine rpm
drops below 1,500 rpm.
Caution!
To avoid severe engine damage.
fAlways observe the engine rpm before down-
shifting to a lower gear, so you do not exceed
the maximum engine rpm.
Flashes in synchronism with the turn signals.
Left arrow – left turn signals
Right arrow – right turn signals
fIf the frequency of the display becomes notice-
ably faster, check the operation of the turn sig-
nals.
Lights when high beam or headlight flasher is
switched on.
The indicator light goes out when the high beams
are switched off.
The indicator light flashes in the event of cornering
light failure.
Gear Shift Indicator “A”
(in vehicles with manual transmission)
The consumption-orientated gear shift indicator A
on the display panel of the on-board computer
assists a fuel-saving driving style. The gear shift
indicator lights up as a recommendation to shift
up to the next-higher gear depending on the
selected gear, engine rpm and accelerator pedal
position.
fWhen the gear shift indicator A lights up,
change to the next higher gear to decrease
fuel consumption.
Turn Signal Indicator Light
High Beam Indicator Light
120 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
Temperature gage (ignition on)
USA: Display in °F
Canada: Display in °C
Pointer to the left – engine cold
fAvoid high engine speeds and heavy engine
loading.
Pointer in the middle – normal operating tem-
perature
The pointer may move up to the red area when en-
gine is heavily loaded and outside temperature is
high, but should return to “normal” when engine
load is reduced.
Warning light “A”
If the coolant temperature is too high, the warn-
ing light comes on.
Additionally, a warning is displayed in the on-board
computer.
fPull off the road, turn off the engine and allow
to cool.
fCheck radiator and air passages in front end of
car for obstructions.
fCheck coolant level.
If necessary, add coolant and have fault reme-
died at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Please see the chapter “COOLANT LEVEL” on
Page 207.
Note
To prevent excessive temperatures, the cooling-
air passages must not be restricted by coverings
(e.g. films, “stone guards”).
If the coolant level is too low, the warning light
flashes.
Additionally, a warning is displayed in the on-board
computer.
fSwitch engine off and allow to cool.
fAdd coolant after the engine has cooled to the
touch.
fHave the cause of the fault remedied at an au-
thorized Porsche dealer.
Please see the chapter “COOLANT LEVEL” on
Page 207.
Caution!
Risk of engine damage.
fIf the warning lights come on even though cool-
ant level is correct, do not continue driving.
fHave the fault remedied at the nearest
authorized Porsche dealer.
Engine compartment blower fan
In addition, this warning light flashes to indicate a
fault in the engine compartment blower fan.
fHave the cause of the fault remedied at an
authorized Porsche dealer.
Cooling System
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 121
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK)
Indicator for PDK selector lever position
and engaged gear
When the engine is running, the selector lever
position and the engaged forward gear are
indicated in gates D or M.
Warning messages
If the selector lever is between two positions
–Effects:
The corresponding selector lever position
flashes on the instrument cluster and the
warning “Selector lever not engaged” appears
on the on-board computer.
Remedy:
Operate the footbrake and engage the
selector lever properly.
If there is a fault in the transmission
Depending on priority, the warning “Transmis-
sion emergency run” in white or red lettering or
the warning “Transmission temperature too
high” is displayed on the on-board computer.
Warning “Transmission emergency run” white
fEffects:
Restricted gearshift comfort,
Failure of reverse gear.
Remedy:
Have the fault repaired immediately at an
authorized Porsche dealer.
Warning “Transmission emergency run” red
Effect:
Vehicle can be driven only until it comes to a
stop.
Remedy:
It is not possible to continue driving. Immedi-
ately stop the vehicle in a suitable place. Have
the vehicle towed to an authorized Porsche
dealer.
Warning “Transmission temperature too high”
–Effects:
“Warning jerks” can be felt when driving off and
the engine power may be restricted.
Remedies:
Do not hold the vehicle with the accelerator on
a hill, for example. Hold the vehicle with the
brake. Reduce engine load. If possible, stop
the vehicle in a suitable place. Allow the engine
to run in selector lever position P or N until the
warning disappears.
fPlease see the chapter “REDUCED DRIVING
PROGRAM” on Page 176.
fPlease see the chapter “PORSCHE DOPPEL-
KUPPLUNG (PDK)” on Page 170.
122 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
Level gage
When the ignition is on the fuel level is displayed.
fPlease see the chapter “CAPACITIES” on
Page 290.
If the vehicle’s inclination changes (e.g. going up
or downhill), minor deviations in the indication may
occur.
Note
If a small quantity of fuel is added to a nearly emp-
ty fuel tank, the fuel gage cannot measure the add-
ed fuel accurately. The „remaining range“ readout
will also be incorrect.
Warning light “A”
When the engine is running, the warning light
of the level gage lights up if less than approx.
2.6 U.S. gallons (10 liters) of fuel remains in the
tank.
Additionally, a warning is displayed in the on-board
computer.
fFill up at the next opportunity.
Caution!
To prevent damage to the emission control
system and engine.
fNever drive the tank completely out of fuel.
fAvoid high cornering speeds after the warning
lights have come on.
fPlease see the chapter “EMISSION CONTROL
SYSTEM” on Page 218.
If the level gage warning light flashes, there
has been a system fault.
Additionally, a warning is displayed in the on-board
computer.
There will then be no reserve warning.
fTo remedy the fault, go to an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Fuel
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 123
A- Adjustment button for clock
B- Clock
C- Outside temperature display
Clock
The clock is blanked out approximately four min-
utes after the ignition is switched off or when the
car is locked.
Setting the time
Warning!
Risk of loss of control or accident, resulting
in serious personal injury or death.
fDo not reach through the steering-wheel
spokes while driving.
fSwitch ignition on.
Setting hours
fPress adjustment button A for about one sec-
ond.
Hour display flashes.
fTurn button in the appropriate direction:
to right – increase hours figure
to left – decrease hours figure.
Adjustment in hours – turn button briefly
Fast adjustment (display cycles) –
turn and hold button.
Setting minutes
fPress adjustment button again.
Minutes display flashes.
fSet by rotating as in hours mode.
Leaving adjustment mode
Automatically after one minute or:
fPress adjustment button again.
When adjustment mode is deliberately left by
pressing the button, the time begins precisely to
the second.
Note
The time mode can be changed between 12h and
24h in the on-board computer.
Outside Temperature
The outside temperature display C does not indi-
cate, if ice is on the road.
Even if a temperature above 32 °F (0 °C) is dis-
played, ice may still form on the road, for instance
on bridges or when the road passes through a
heavily shaded area.
124 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
The oil pressure is controlled as required and
should be at least 3.5 bar at an engine speed of
5000 rpm.
The engine oil pressure varies depending on the
engine speed, engine load and engine tempera-
ture.
If oil pressure drops abruptly and a message
is displayed on the on-board computer when
the engine is running on or when driving:
fStop immediately in a suitable place.
fSwitch off the engine.
fCheck whether there is an obvious oil leak on
or under the car.
fIf no oil leak can be detected: With the engine
idling, measure the oil level with the on-board
computer.
fPlease see the chapter “OIL DISPLAY AND
MEASUREMENT OF THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL”
on Page 153.
fPlease see the chapter “ENGINE OIL LEVEL”
on Page 208.
fAdd engine oil if necessary.
Caution!
Risk of engine damage.
fDo not continue driving if there is an obvious oil
leak.
fDo not continue driving if the warning lights
come on even though oil level is correct.
fHave the fault remedied at the nearest
authorized Porsche dealer.
If the battery voltage drops abruptly, a warning
message will be displayed by the on-board compu-
ter.
If the warning is displayed by the on-board
computer while the engine is running or while
driving:
fStop the car in a safe place and stop the
engine.
Possible causes
Defect in the battery charging system.
Broken drive belt.
Warning!
Risk of engine damage with resultant loss of
control and accident, leading to serious per-
sonal injury or death.
A broken drive belt means there is no power
assistance to the steering (more effort is re-
quired to steer) and coolant pump function
will stop.
fDo not continue driving.
fHave the fault remedied at the nearest author-
ized Porsche dealer.
Engine Oil Pressure
Battery
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 125
Check Engine
(Emission Control)
The emission control system detects malfunctions
early that could, for example, cause increased
pollutant emissions or consequential damage.
Faults are indicated by a continuously lit or
flashing instrument panel warning light.
The faults are recorded in the control unit's fault
memory.
The warning light in the instrument panel lights up
when the ignition is switched on as a bulb check
and goes out approx. 4 seconds after the engine
starts. If the warning light does not light up, have
the bulb replaced promptly.
The warning light in the instrument panel flashes to
indicate operating states (e.g. engine misfiring)
which might cause damage to certain parts of the
emission control system.
fIn this case, immediately reduce the engine
load by easing off the accelerator.
fIn order to avoid consequential damage to the
engine or emission control system (e.g. cata-
lytic converter), have the fault diagnosed and
rectified immediately at the nearest authorized
Porsche dealer.
If the warning light in the instrument panel lights up
permanently without flashing before and remains
on while driving, it suggests:
a potential engine control problem and the
need for system service or
an improperly fastened tank cap or
the vehicle was refueled while the engine was
running.
fStop immediately at a suitable and secure
place and check tank cap for proper fastening.
If tank cap was fastened correctly, see your au-
thorized Porsche dealer for service as soon as
possible.
Caution!
If the check engine warning light in the in-
strument panel is flashing, serious catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon
occur.
Prolonged driving with the check engine war-
ning light on could cause damage to the
emission control system. It also could affect
fuel economy and driveability.
fHave the fault remedied at the nearest
authorized Porsche dealer immediately.
The central warning light on the instrument panel
lights up if there are warning messages in the
INFO menu.
The messages can be called in the on-board
computer INFO menu:
fPlease see the chapter “INFO WARNING MES-
SAGES” on Page 132.
The warning light on the instrument panel lights
up:
if the handbrake is on,
if the brake fluid level is low,
if the brake pads have reached the wear limit,
if the brake circuit division is defective.
Additionally, a warning is displayed by the on-
board computer.
fPlease see the chapter “WARNINGS ON THE
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE ON-BOARD
COMPUTER” on Page 158.
Warning Light
Central Warning Light
Brake Warning Light USA
Brake Warning Light Canada
126 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
On-Board Computer (BC)
Display field
The display field is beneath the tachometer.
Readiness for operation
With ignition switched on,
with engine running.
Operation, controls
It is not possible to describe all details of the on-
board computer functions in this Owner’s Manual.
However, the examples will quickly familiarize you
with the operational principle and help you to
navigate through the menu structure.
You can restore the factory default settings at any
time by using the “SET” menu.
Operating lever
The on-board computer is operated with the lower
left lever on the steering column.
Selecting functions of the on-board
computer
fPush lever up 3 or down 4.
Confirming selection (Enter)
fPush the lever forward 1.
Moving back one or several selection levels
fPull the lever back 2 once or several times or
f Select the arrow on the on-board compu-
ter display with the operating lever and push
the operating lever forward 1.
Note
You can always return to the basic menu by pulling
the operating lever several times.
5 - Button for voice control
fPlease refer to the separate operating
instructions for Porsche Communication
Management (PCM).
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 127
A- Digital speedometer
B-Central display
C- Bottom display
Functions and display possibilities
Note
The available items and displays in the on-board
computer depend on the equipment of your vehi-
cle. For this reason it is possible that some of the
items and displays shown here are not available in
your on-board computer.
Basic setting
Central display: .... Radio station
The central line B of the on-board computer can
be selected in the SET menu.
Calling on-board computer functions in
display “C”
fPush operating lever up or down
(selection field D must be switched off).
The following displays can be called step by step:
Average speed (ø mph),
Average consumption (ø mpg),
Range on remaining fuel (mls ),
Tire pressure
Navigation information
(if activated in the SET menu).
Note
The values “Average speed”, “Average consump-
tion” and “Daily trip mileage” can be reset to zero
in the SET menu.
128 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
D - Switching selection field “D” on or off
fPush operating lever forward or back.
E - Arrow symbol for continuation
Arrow symbol:
fPush operating lever down in order to page
through the menu.
Arrow symbol:
fPush operating lever up in order to page
through the menu.
The following menus are available, depending on
vehicle equipment:
1. LIMIT
2. INFO
3. TEL
4. CHRONO
5. AUDIO
6. NAVI
7. OIL
8. TPM
9. SET
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 129
LIMIT
Acoustic warning signal for speed limit
The acoustic warning signal can be activated for
speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).
The signal sounds when the preset speed is ex-
ceeded.
For the signal to sound again, the driving speed
must fall below the preset speed by at least
3 mph (5 km/h).
Switching on selection field “D”
fPush operating lever forward.
Setting the speed
fSelect LIMIT with the operating lever. fPush operating lever forward.
130 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
Option 1:
Accepting current speed
fPush operating lever forward.
The acoustic warning signal is activated for the
current speed.
If the vehicle is stationary, the message “Cannot
be accepted with car stopped” is displayed.
Option 2:
Presetting speed
fSelect “LIMIT active” with the operating lever:
fIf “not active”, push the operating lever for-
ward.
fSelect “xx mph” with the operating lever.
fPush operating lever forward.
Display:
not active
active
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 131
fPush operating lever slightly up or down until
the desired speed is reached.
upwards: speed is increased
downwards: speed is decreased
Note
Holding the lever up or down for a longer period
will adjust the speed in steps of 6 mph (10 km/h).
fPush operating lever forward.
Switching the acoustic warning signal off
fSelect “LIMIT active” with the operating lever.
fPush operating lever forward.
Display:
132 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
INFO
Warning messages
Switching on selection field “D”
fPush operating lever forward.
Calling warning messages
fSelect INFO with the operating lever.
fPush operating lever forward.
fSelect “Messages” with the operating lever.
fPush operating lever forward.
Any existing warning messages can be called us-
ing the operating lever.
You also can call warning messages which were
cancelled during the journey (but only until the next
time the ignition is switched on).
fPush operating lever forward.
fPush operating lever forwards or pull back-
wards.
The display returns to the Info menu.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 133
Service
Switching on selection field “D”
fPush operating lever forward.
Recalling service information
fSelect INFO with the operating lever.
fPush operating lever forward.
fSelect “Service” with the operating lever.
fPush operating lever forward.
fThe time until the next service is displayed in
miles and days.
TEL
Telephone information
Switching on selection field “D”
fPush operating lever forward.
Recalling telephone information
fSelect TEL with the operating lever.
fPush operating lever forward.
134 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
Note
You can recall phone calls, e.g. calls that arrived
during your absence, via the menu item “Missed
calls”.
Example:
Selecting from the telephone book and
calling
fSelect “Phone book” with the operating lever.
fPush operating lever forward.
fSelect a person to call and push the operating
lever forward.
The connection is established.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 135
fPush the operating lever forward to end the
call. Incoming call
fSelect “Accept” or “Refuse” and push the
operating lever forward.
Note
Rejected phone calls can be recalled with the
menu item “Missed calls”.
136 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
CHRONO
Stopwatch
You can use the stopwatch to measure time inter-
vals, e.g. on the race circuit or on work-related
journeys. Measured lap times can be stored and
evaluated if the vehicle is equipped with Porsche
Communication Management (PCM).
fPlease observe the chapter “Sport display” in
the separate PCM operating instructions.
Stopwatch on the instrument panel
The stopwatch has an analogue and a digital dis-
play.
The large pointer of the analogue display meas-
ures the seconds. The two small pointers measure
hours and minutes. The display re-starts at zero af-
ter 12 hours.
Seconds and increments of 1/100th of a second
can be read on the digital display.
The digital display and the display in the on-board
computer can indicate up to 99 hours and
59 minutes.
The stopwatch can be swivelled both to the left
and to the right.
Stopwatch displays:
on the stopwatch on the instrument panel,
in the on-board computer menu CHRONO,
on the performance display in the PCM.
Starting/stopping stopwatch
All stopwatch displays are started and stopped via
the on-board computer menu CHRONO.
Note on operation
When you leave the CHRONO menu while the stop-
watch is running, measurement will continue.
The stopwatch stops after the ignition is switched
off. If the ignition is switched on again within ap-
prox. 4 minutes, the stopwatch will continue to
run.
The only way to reset the stopwatch to zero is by
selecting “Reset” in the CHRONO menu.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 137
Starting the timing
fPush operating lever forward.
The selection field is switched on.
fSelect CHRONO with the operating lever.
fPush operating lever forward. fPush operating lever forward.
The time runs on all stopwatch displays.
The on-board computer display changes to the
“Stop timing/Intermediate time” selection.
138 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
Stopping the timing
After time measurement is started, the on-board
computer display changes to the “Stop timing/In-
termediate time”.
fSelect “Stop timing” with the operating lever.
fPush lever forward.
The time is stopped in all stopwatch displays,
and the on-board computer display changes to
the “Continue/Reset” selection.
The timing can be continued or reset to zero.
Continue timing
After timing has been stopped, the on-board com-
puter display changes to the “Continue/Reset” se-
lection.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 139
fPush operating lever forward.
The stopwatch displays continue the timing.
The on-board computer display returns to the
“Stop timing/Intermediate time” selection. You
can stop the stopwatch or measure an inter-
mediate time.
Resetting the time
After timing has been stopped, the on-board com-
puter display changes to the “Continue/Reset” se-
lection.
fSelect “Reset” with the operating lever.
fPush operating lever forward.
The display returns to the “Start timing”
selection.
The stopwatch displays in the instrument panel
and the on-board computer are reset to zero.
140 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
A-Lap
B- Intermediate time
Displaying intermediate times
Several intermediate times can be displayed for a
route or for a lap on the race circuit. The interme-
diate times B are for your information.
Measured lap times A can be stored and evaluat-
ed if the vehicle is equipped with Porsche Commu-
nication Management (PCM).
After timing has been started, the on-board com-
puter display changes to the “Stop timing/Inter-
mediate time” selection.
fSelect “Intermediate time” with the operating
lever and push the operating lever forwards.
The intermediate time will be displayed for
approx. 5 seconds.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 141
The on-board computer display then returns to the
“Stop timing/Intermediate time” selection.
fYou can stop the stopwatch or measure anoth-
er intermediate time.
In order to start timing a new lap:
The “New lap?” selection appears for 5 seconds
after selection of “Intermediate time”.
fSelect “New lap?” with the operating lever and
push the operating lever forwards.
The new lap is displayed on the on-board compu-
ter and the PCM. Timing on the on-board computer
and on the PCM begins from zero. The stopwatch
in the instrument panel continues to show the total
time.
142 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
fThe on-board computer display returns to the
“Stop timing/Intermediate time” selection after
a short period.
fYou can stop the stopwatch or measure anoth-
er intermediate time or a new lap.
AUDIO
Switching on selection field “D”
fPush operating lever forward.
Selecting a radio station
fSelect “AUDIO” with the operating lever.
fPush operating lever forward.
fSelect the desired station.
fPush the operating lever up or down.
NAVI
Switching on selection field “D”
fPush operating lever forward.
Select destination
fSelect “NAVI” with the operating lever.
fPush operating lever forward.
fSelect the desired function with the operating
lever:
Last destinations
Destination memory
–Route guidance
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 143
TPM
Tire Pressure Monitoring
fPlease see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURES FOR
COLD TIRES (68 °F / 20 °C)” on Page 289.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring continuously
monitors tire pressure and tire temperature on all
four wheels and warns the driver when the tire
pressure is too low.
The display as well as the settings for the Tire
Pressure Monitoring take place on the on-board
computer.
However, you must still adjust the tire pressure on
the wheel.
fThe driver is responsible for filling the tires
correctly and making the correct settings on
the on-board computer.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring offers the following
functions:
Display of the actual tire pressure while the
vehicle is in motion.
Display of the deviation from the required
pressure (refilling pressure).
Display of currently set tire size and type.
Tire pressure warnings in two stages.
Warning!
fDespite the advantages offered by the Tire
Pressure Monitoring, it is still the driver’s re-
sponsibility to update the corresponding set-
tings in the on-board computer and maintain
the pressure in the tires.
Low tire pressure reduces the road safety of
the vehicle and destroys the tire and wheel.
fWhen a flat tire has been displayed, immedi-
ately stop in a suitable place and check the
tires for damage. If necessary, remedy the
damage with a tire sealant.
fDo not by any means continue to drive with
damaged tires.
fSealing the tire with tire sealant is only an
emergency repair, so you can drive to the next
authorized Porsche dealer. The maximum per-
mitted speed is 50 mph (80 km/h).
fDo not drive with tires whose tire pressure
drops again in a short period of time. In cases
of doubt, have tires checked by an authorized
Porsche dealer.
fDamaged tires must be immediately replaced
by an authorized Porsche dealer.
Tire repairs are not permissible under any
circumstances.
fIf a fault occurs in the Tire Pressure Monitoring
(e.g. defective wheel transmitter), contact an
authorized Porsche dealer immediately and
have the damage repaired.
The tire pressure will not be monitored at all or
will be monitored only partially by defective
Tire Pressure Monitoring.
fTires lose air over time without a tire defect
being present. A tire pressure warning will then
appear in the on-board computer display.
Correct the tire pressure at the next oppor-
tunity.
fThe Tire Pressure Monitoring gives a warning
about tire damage due to natural pressure loss
as well as about a gradual loss of pressure due
to foreign objects.
The Tire Pressure Mnitoring cannot warn you
about tire damage that occurs suddenly (e.g.
flat tire due to abrupt external effects).
144 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
Tire pressure function of the on-board
computer
The tire pressure function of the on-board
computer displays the tire pressures (actual
pressure) dependent on temperature in the four
wheels.
You can watch the tire pressure rise as the
temperature increases while driving.
This display is only for information.
fUnder no circumstances should the tire
pressures be changed based on this display.
Warning!
This display is for informational purposes
only. Under no circumstances should the tire
pressures be changed based on this display.
Changing the tire pressure to incorrect
pressures could adversely affect the perfor-
mance, driving characteristics, and safety of
your vehicle.
fMaintain tire pressures according to the units
indicated on the tire pressure plate, located on
the drivers side door of the vehicle.
Displaying the tire pressure function of the
on-board computer
fPush operating lever up or down until the tire
pressure function of the on-board computer
appears.
(The selection field must be switched off.) Pressure info in tire pressure menu
In accordance with physical principles, the air
pressure changes as the temperature changes.
The tire pressure increases or decreases by
around 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) for every 18 °F (10 °C)
change in temperature.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring takes this relation-
ship between tire pressure and temperature into
account.
fPlease see the chapter “PRESSURE INCREASE
AS THE RESULT OF TEMPERATURE
INCREASE” on Page 152.
You can read the tire pressures to be
corrected in this display.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 145
The tire pressure to be corrected (refill pressure)
is indicated on the displayed wheel.
Example: If “ –1.5 psi (–0.1 bar)” is displayed,
1.5 psi (0.1 bar) must be added to this tire.
Note
The tire pressure menu can only be called up when
the vehicle is stationary.
Calling up the “Info pressure” display
fPush operating lever forward in order to switch
on the selection field.
fSelect “TPM” with the operating lever.
fPush operating lever forward.
The display changes to the tire pressure menu.
fSelect “Info pressure” with the operating lever.
fPush operating lever forward.
Note
After the ignition is switched on, it can take up to
approx. 1 minute before all tire pressures are
displayed. Dashes (“-.-”) appear instead of the tire
pressures.
Tire type info in Tire pressure menu
Information about the currently set tires:
Tire type: Summer tires, winter tires
Tire size: 18, 19 inch
“Info tires” shows the current tire settings.
Calling up the “Info tires” display
fPush operating lever forward in order to switch
on the selection field.
fSelect “TPM” with the operating lever.
fPush operating lever forward.
The display changes to the tire pressure menu.
fSelect “Info tires” with the operating lever.
fPush operating lever forward.
Tire selection in the “Set” menu
fPush operating lever forward in order to switch
on the selection field.
fSelect “TPM” with the operating lever.
146 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
fPush operating lever forward.
The display changes to the tire pressure menu. fSelect “Set” with the operating lever. fPush the operating lever forward.
fSelect desired tire type:
summer or winter.
fPush operating lever forward.
A display for confirming the selected type of
tire appears.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 147
fSelect “Continue” and push the operating lever
forward. fSelect the appropriate tire size (18 or 19 inch)
and push operating lever forwards. A display
for confirming the selected tire size appears.
Note
This menu is displayed only if the tire pressures
are different for the approved tire sizes.
fSelect “Continue” and push the operating lever
forward.
148 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
The tire selection has only been successfully
completed when the message “Process
complete” is displayed by the on-board computer.
fSelect arrow (Back) and push the operating
lever forward. The display returns to the tire
pressure menu.
The on-board computer additionally displays
the message “System learning”.
Note
The message “Process aborted” appears if the
setting process is interrupted. All entries made up
to this point are lost, and the original settings
remain in effect.
Only if the message “Process complete” appears
after the settings have been made will the Tire
Pressure Monitoring re-learn the wheels.
fPlease see the chapter “SYSTEM LEARNING”
on Page 150.
Before fitting tires with sizes which are not stored
in the on-board computer, the missing information
should be supplemented in the on-board
computer.
fPlease consult your authorized Porsche
dealer.
fUse only tires approved by Porsche.
The available items in the tire pressure menu
depend on the tires on your vehicle. For this
reason it is possible that some of the items shown
here are not available on your on-board
computer’s display.
fMake sure that tire pressures correspond to
the on-board computer settings. Correct the
tire pressure if necessary.
fPlease see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURES FOR
COLD TIRES (68 °F / 20 °C)” on Page 289.
Load
fPush operating lever forward in order to switch
on the selection field.
fSelect “TPM” with the operating lever.
fPush operating lever forward.
The display changes to the tire pressure menu.
fSelect “Load” with the operating lever.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 149
fSelect partial load or full load and push the
operating lever forward.
fPlease see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURES FOR
COLD TIRES (68 °F / 20 °C)” on Page 289.
fMake sure that the tire pressures correspond
to the on-board computer settings. Correct the
tire pressures if necessary.
Tire pressure warnings
The tire pressure warning light on the instrument
panel and a corresponding message on the on-
board computer warn about loss of pressure in
two stages, depending on the amount of pressure
loss.
Driving with insufficient tire pressure reduces the
road safety of the vehicle and destroys the tire and
wheel.
Stage 1 – Add air
The pressure in the tire is too low by 4 to 7 psi (0.3
to 0.5 bar).
fThe tire pressure warning contains the
affected tire with the tire pressure to be added.
Correct the tire pressure at the next
opportunity. This tire pressure warning appears
for approx. 10 seconds with vehicle stopped
when switching off the ignition or
again when switching on the ignition.
With ignition on, the warning can be deactivated.
The tire pressure warning light in the instrument
panel goes out only when the tire pressure has
been corrected.
150 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
Stage 2 – Flat tire
At speeds below 100 mph (160 km/h):
The pressure in the tire has dropped by more
than 7 psi (0.5 bar). This significant pressure
loss is a danger to road safety.
At speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h):
The pressure in the tire has dropped by more
than 5 psi (0.4 bar). This significant pressure
loss is a danger to road safety.
fWhen the tire pressure warning appears, stop
immediately at a suitable location. Check the
indicated tire for signs of damage. If neces-
sary, fill in tire sealant and set the correct tire
pressure.
This tire pressure warning also appears when
driving and can be acknowledged.
The tire pressure warning light on the instrument
panel goes out only when the tire pressure has
been corrected.
System learning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring begins to “learn” the
wheels after a wheel change, wheel transmitter
replacement or update of the tire settings. During
this process, the Tire Pressure Monitoring recog-
nizes the tires and their locations.
The on-board computer displayes the message
“TPM is learning, monitoring not act.”.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring requires a certain
amount of time to learn the wheels. During this
time, the current tire pressures are not available
on the on-board-computer:
The tire pressure warning light remains lit until
all wheels have been learned.
The display of the tire pressure function of the
on-board computer shows lines.
The required pressures for cold tires at 68 °F
(20 °C) are indicated in the Info pressure
display in the tire pressure menu.
Position and pressure information is displayed as
soon as the Tire Pressure Monitoring has as-
signed the wheels identified as belonging to the
vehicle to the correct wheel positions.
The wheel learning process takes place
exclusively when the vehicle is being driven
(vehicle speed above 25 km/h (16 mph)).
fCheck the tire pressure for all wheels on the
“Info pressure” display.
fCorrect the tire pressure to the required
pressure if necessary.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 151
Changing a wheel and replacing tires
fNew wheels must be fitted with radio transmit-
ters for the Tire Pressure Monitoring.
Before tires are changed, the battery charge
state of the wheel transmitters should be
checked at an authorized Porsche dealer.
fSwitch the ignition off when changing a wheel.
The tire settings on the on-board computer must
be updated after changing a wheel.
If the tire settings are not updated, the message
“Wheel change? Input new TPM settings!” is
displayed on the on-board computer.
fUpdate the on-board computer settings when
the vehicle is stationary the next time.
Warning!
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a Tire
Pressure Monitoring (TPM) malfunction indicator
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPM malfunction indicator is combined with a
low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the tellta-
le will flash for approx. one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will conti-
nue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.
TPM malfuntions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement
or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPM from functioning properly.
Always check the TPM malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the TPM to continue to
function properly.
The warning light in the speedometer lights up:
When a loss in pressure has been detected.
When learning newly mounted wheels/wheel
sensors, as long as the vehicle’s own wheels
have not yet been recognized.
In the event of a defect in Tire Pressure Monitoring
or a temporary fault, the warning light in the
speedometer flashes for approx. one minute and
then remains continuously illuminated.
The tire pressure warning light in the instrument
panel goes out only when the cause of the fault
has been rectified.
Partial monitoring
Monitoring of the other wheels is continued if there
is a fault in one or two wheel transmitters.
The tire pressure warning light lights up.
The message “TPM partial monitoring” is
displayed on the on-board computer.
No tire pressures are displayed on the on-
board computer for wheels with faulty wheel
transmitters.
Warning light
152 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
No monitoring
In the event of faults the Tire Pressure Monitoring
cannot monitor the tire pressure.
The warning light in the speedometer flashes for
approx. one minute and then remains continuously
illuminated and a corresponding message
appears on the on-board computer.
Monitoring is not active when:
the Tire Pressure Monitoring is faulty,
wheel transmitters for the Tire Pressure
Monitoring are missing,
during the learning phase after the tire settings
have been updated,
after a wheel change without updating the tire
settings,
more than four wheel transmitters are
detected,
there is external interference by other radio
sources, e.g. wireless headphones,
tire temperatures are too high.
fPlease see the chapter “WARNINGS ON THE
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE ON-BOARD
COMPUTER” on Page 158.
Pressure increase as the result of
temperature increase
In accordance with physical principles, the air
pressure changes as the temperature changes.
The tire pressure increases or decreases by
around 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) for every 18 °F (10 °C)
change in temperature.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring takes this relation-
ship between tire pressure and temperature into
account.
Tire pressure specifications
Information on tire pressure for public roads can
be found in this Owner's Manual in the Technical
Data chapter or on the tire-pressure plate in the
left door aperture.
These values apply to cold tires at 68 °F (20 °C)
ambient temperature.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 153
OIL
Display and measurement of the engine
oil level
Caution!
Risk of engine damage.
fRegularly check the oil level each time before
refueling.
fDo not allow the oil level to fall below the
minimum mark.
Conditions for measuring the oil level
1. Vehicle stationary.
2. It is important to ensure that the vehicle is
horizontal for correct oil level measurement
to occur.
3. Engine must be at operating temperature
(at least 140 °F/60 °C).
4. Engine must be idling.
Initiating oil level measurement
1. Push operating lever forward in order to switch
on the selection field.
2. Select “OIL” with the operating lever.
3. Push operating lever forward. Measurement is
started.
4. Allow waiting time to elapse.
5. Once the measurement has been completed,
you can read off the engine oil level on the
segment display.
154 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
6. If the segments are filled in up to the top line,
the oil level has reached the maximum mark.
Under no circumstances add engine oil.
7. If the bottom segment is filled in, the oil level
has reached the minimum mark.
Add engine oil immediately.
8. If the bottom segment flashes, the oil level has
dropped to below the minimum mark.
Add engine oil immediately.
The difference between the minimum and
maximum marks on the segment display is
approx. 1.3 quarts (1.25 litres).
One segment of the display corresponds to a
top-up quantity of approx. 0.42 quarts (0.4 litre).
fAdd engine oil if necessary.
Switch off ignition before adding engine oil.
fPlease see the chapter “ENGINE OIL LEVEL”
on Page 208.
fNever add more engine oil than required
to reach the maximum mark.
Failure
A failure of the oil level display is indicated by a
warning message on the on-board computer.
“Check engine oil level” display
The on-board computer display “Check engine oil
level” is an additional measurement that takes
place in the background while driving.
The display depends on the distance travelled.
This display appears if the oil level has reached the
minimum mark or if the oil level is well above the
maximum mark.
This message must be acknowledged by
measuring the engine oil level manually using the
on-board computer.
fPlease see the chapter “INITIATING OIL LEVEL
MEASUREMENT” on Page 153.
If oil level measurement was initiated manually on
the on-board computer and no oil was added, the
message “Check engine oil level” is displayed
again when the vehicle is driven.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 155
SET
Basic setting on on-board computer
Switching on selection field “D”
fPush operating lever forward.
Changing the basic setting of the on-board
computer
fSelect “SET” with the operating lever.
fPush operating lever forward.
fSelect the desired function with the operating
lever:
Reset
Reset all,
Reset average consumption,
Reset average speed,
Reset trip counter
Units
Speedometer: km - km/h, miles - mph
–Consumption:
l/100 km, mls/gal (USA), mpg (UK), km/l
Temperature: °Celsius, °Fahrenheit
Tire pressure: bar, psi
156 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
Display
(Select central line of the on-board
computer)
Change display
Audio information (set radio station)
Range on remaining fuel
Empty
Telephone Info
When Telephone information is active, incom-
ing telephone calls are displayed on the on-
board computer.
Navigation
Integrated in the BC
(Navigation instructions can be recalled on the
on-board computer display)
When turning off
(Navigation instructions are only shown before
changing direction)
Basic setting
Restore the basic setting of the on-board com-
puter
Language
Select language version
12/24h mode
Select time mode:
12h (small squares on the right side of the time
display for AM/PM),
–24h
Light
USA only:
Switch daytime driving lights on and off.
Daytime driving lights
(daytime driving lights switched off)
Daytime driving lights
(daytime driving lights switched on)
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 157
General information regarding the
on-board computer functions
Range on remaining fuel
The range on remaining fuel is continuously recal-
culated during the journey based on the fuel level,
current consumption and average consumption.
The more the fuel level falls, the more spontan-
eously the display reacts. For this reason, the
range on remaining fuel is not displayed if less
than 9 miles (15 kilometers).
If the vehicle's inclination changes while driving or
refueling, incorrect range information may tempo-
rarily be given.
Note
If the tank is nearly empty and you top up with only
a small quantity of fuel, an accurate range on re-
maining fuel is impossible.
Average consumption and average speed
The values displayed are based on the distance
travelled since the last reset to “zero”.
You can set the starting time for a measurement
before or during the trip.
Switching the ignition off does not reset the meas-
urements. It is therefore possible to collect values
over long periods.
Disconnecting the car battery will cause these
memories to be erased.
Tire pressure
The Tire pressure function of the on-board
computer displays the tire pressures dependent
on temperature in the four wheels. You can watch
the tire pressure rise and fall while driving.
The display is only for information.
fTo correct the tire pressures, always use the
displayed values from the “Info pressure”
display in the tire pressure menu.
158 Warnings
Warnings on the instrument panel and the on-board computer
If a warning message appears, always refer to the corresponding chapters in the Owner’s Manual.
Warning messages are issued only if all measurement preconditions are met. Therefore, check all fluid levels regularly –
in particular, always check the engine oil level before refuelling.
Instrument
panel On-board
computer Text display on on-board
computer Meaning/measure
Seat belt Driver and passengers must fasten their seat
belts.
Handbrake Handbrake is still on.
Ignition key
not removed
Replace battery
in ignition key Replace the remote-control battery.
Ignition lock faulty,
please go to workshop Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Ignition lock faulty,
visit workshop now Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Relieve steering Relieve the steering lock by moving the steering
wheel to the left or right.
Steering locked The steering wheel lock remains engaged.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Lights on Low beam/side marker lamps on
Parking light on Left/right parking light on
Warnings 159
Check left/right dipped beam (low
beam)
also applies to:
direction indicator, high beam, side in-
dicator light, reversing light, side
marker
The reported light is faulty. Check bulb.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Daytime
driving lights off Daytime driving lights switch off when the en-
gine is shut off. Switch on lights if necessary.
Headlight beam
adjustment faulty Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Front lid not closed Close luggage compartment lid properly.
Rear lid not closed Close engine compartment lid properly.
Targa flap not closed Close glass rear hatch
Rain sensor faulty Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Steering wheel heating
ON Steering wheel heating was switched on.
Steering wheel heating
OFF Steering wheel heating was switched off.
Launch
control
active
Drive Off Assistant
failure Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Refill washer fluid
Instrument
panel On-board
computer Text display on on-board
computer Meaning/measure
160 Warnings
LIMIT
Cannot be accepted
with vehicle stopped
The current speed can only be accepted for the
acoustic warning signal when the vehicle is in
motion.
LIMIT
30 Selected speed limit (e.g. 30 mph) for the
acoustic warning signal has been exceeded.
Adjust your speed if necessary.
Fuel gage warning
light Consider remaining range Refuel at next opportunity.
Check engine oil level Start engine oil level measurement in the
on-board computer.
Engine oil pressure too low Stop immediately at a suitable place, measure
oil level with the on-board computer and, if nec-
essary, add engine oil.
Warning light
Temperature gage Engine temperature too high Switch engine off and let it cool.
Check coolant level and, if necessary,
add coolant.
Temperature gage
warning light flash-
es
Check coolant level Switch engine off and let it cool.
Check coolant level and, if necessary, add cool-
ant.
Engine diagnostics – workshop Stop immediately at a suitale place and check
tank cap for proper fastening. If the tank cap
was fastened correctly, consult your authorized
Porsche dealer.
Reduced engine power Consult your authorized Porsche dealer.
Temperature gage
warning light flash-
es
Failure of
engine compartment blower Consult your authorized Porsche dealer.
Instrument
panel On-board
computer Text display on on-board
computer Meaning/measure
Warnings 161
Warning Battery/generator Stop at a safe place and switch the engine off.
Do not continue driving.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Oil pressure gage faulty Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Oil level display faulty Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Oil temperature gage faulty Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Oil temperature
too high Switch engine off and let it cool. Check oil level
and, if necessary, add oil.
Please observe the chapter “OIL DISPLAY AND
MEASUREMENT OF THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL“.
Indicator faulty Coolant indicator failed.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Brake pad wear Have the brake pads changed immediately at an
authorized Porsche dealer.
Warning – Brake fluid level Stop immediately in a suitable place.
Do not continue driving. Have the fault remedied
at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Warning – Brake circuit division Stop immediately in a suitable place.
Do not continue driving. Have the fault remedied
at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Instrument
panel On-board
computer Text display on on-board
computer Meaning/measure
162 Warnings
ABS failure Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
PSM off Porsche Stability Management has been
switched off.
PSM on Porsche Stability Management has been
switched on.
PSM failure Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
PSM
initialisation Please observe the chapter “PUTTING VEHICLE
INTO OPERATION“.
PASM Normal/Sport Indicator for selected PASM mode
PASM failure Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
PASM indicator faulty Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Sport mode failure Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Airbag system fault Airbag is faulty.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Check passenger’s seat setting Weight sensing is impaired on the front
passenger's seat (Advanced Airbag).
Correct the seating position, set the backrest
upright, do not support weight on the armrests,
or lift on the handles.
Instrument
panel On-board
computer Text display on on-board
computer Meaning/measure
Warnings 163
Failure spoiler control Driving stability is impaired.
Adjust your driving style. Reduce speed.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Display of
selector lever posi-
tion flashes
Selector lever is not engaged Porsche Doppelkupplung:
Selector lever can be between two positions.
Engage the selector lever correctly.
Move selector lever to P Porsche Doppelkupplung:
Move selector lever to position P before with-
drawing key from ignition lock.
Apply brake Porsche Doppelkupplung:
Apply the brake when starting.
Depress clutch pedal Manual transmission:
Depress clutch pedal when starting.
Move selector lever
to position P or N Porsche Doppelkupplung:
The vehicle can be started only in the selector
lever position P or N.
Text display in white:
Transmission
emergency run
Restricted gearshift comfort,
failure of reverse gear.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Text display in red:
Transmission
emergency run
No selector lever position is displayed on the
instrument cluster.
Vehicle can be driven only until it comes to a
stop.
It is not possible to continue driving. Immedi-
ately stop the vehicle in a suitable place. Have
the vehicle towed to an authorized Porsche
dealer.
Instrument
panel On-board
computer Text display on on-board
computer Meaning/measure
164 Warnings
Transmission
temperature
too high
Jerking can be felt when driving off, and the
engine power may be restricted.
Do not hold the vehicle with the accelerator on
a hill, for example. Hold the vehicle with the
brake. Reduce engine load. If possible, stop the
vehicle in a suitable place. Allow the engine to
run in selector lever position P or N until the
warning disappears.
System fault
Go to workshop Several systems may have failed. Adjust your
driving style. Reduce speed.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Failure of fuel level indicator
Workshop Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Service in mls/days Service indicator
Bring the vehicle in for service no later than af-
ter the distance/time shown has elapsed.
Please observe the additional information in the
“Maintenance” booklet.
Service now Service indicator
Have your vehicle serviced at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Failure
Convertible-top control Activate convertible top in opposite direction.
If there is a failure:
Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
Convertible top not in limit position Fully open or close convertible top
Opening convertible top Message goes out in final position
Closing convertible top Message goes out in final position
Instrument
panel On-board
computer Text display on on-board
computer Meaning/measure
Warnings 165
Rear lid
not closed The convertible top cannot be operated with the
rear lid open.
Flat tyre! Tire Pressure Monitoring has detected a serious
pressure loss.
Stop at a suitable place and check tires for dam-
age. Fill in tire sealant if necessary.
Add air The Tire Pressure Monitoring has detected a
gradual pressure loss. Correct tire pressure at
the next opportunity.
TPM is learning
monitoring
not act.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring is learning the
wheels on the vehicle. The Tire Pressure Moni-
toring is searching for the tires and their posi-
tion. During this period the current pressure
specifications are not available on the on-board
computer.
TPM inactive The Tire Pressure Monitoring is faulty.
Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
TPM partial monitoring 1 or 2 wheel transmitters are faulty. The tyre
pressures of these wheels are not monitored.
The other wheels are still monitored.
Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
TPM inactive
Brief disturbance
TPM inactive
Too many wheel transmitters
The Tire Pressure Monitoring is temporarily de-
activated by excessive tire temperatures (ap-
prox. 248 °F (120 °C)) or external interference
(e.g. from other wheel transmitters inside the
car). Once the source of the interference is re-
moved, the system is automatically reactivated.
Wheel change?
Input new
TPM settings!
Update the settings in the TPM menu of the
on-board computer at the next opportunity.
Wrong entries will affect the correct pressure in-
formation in the menu. The safety of your vehi-
cle is at risk.
Instrument
panel On-board
computer Text display on on-board
computer Meaning/measure
166 Warnings
Acknowledging warning messages
Warning messages can be deleted from the on-board computer display.
fPush the on-board computer operating lever forward.
You can recall erased warning messages in the “INFO” menu.
TPM
Indicator faulty The display of the Tire Pressure Monitoring is
faulty.
Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
Instrument
panel On-board
computer Text display on on-board
computer Meaning/measure
Shifting Gears 167
Shifting Gears
Manual Transmission, Clutch...................... 168
Drive-Off Assistant..................................... 169
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) .................. 170
168 Shifting Gears
Manual Transmission, Clutch
The positions of the gears are shown on the shift
diagram on the gearshift lever.
Warning!
Risk of accident, resulting in serious person-
al injury or death.
fDo not obstruct the pedal travel with floor mats
or other objects.
Nonskid floor mats of the correct size are
available at your authorized Porsche dealer.
To avoid damage to the clutch and transmis-
sion:
fAlways depress the clutch pedal fully when
changing gears. Make sure that the gearshift
lever is completely engaged.
fOnly shift into reverse when the car has come
to a complete stop.
fWhen shifting gears, always ensure that the
clutch pedal is fully depressed and the gear
has fully engaged.
fSelect reverse only when vehicle is stationary.
Reverse can be engaged after pushing the
gearshift lever as far as possible to the left.
fSelect an appropriately low gear on upward
and downward slopes.
This will ensure optimum use of engine power
and engine braking.
When reverse gear is selected and the ignition is
on, the backup lights are illuminated.
Permitted engine speed
fYou should change into a higher gear before
the needle reaches the red mark on the
tachometer, or ease off the accelerator.
If the red zone is reached during acceleration, fuel
feed is interrupted.
Caution!
Risk of engine damage (overrevving) when
shifting down to a lower gear.
fTake care not to exceed the maximum
permitted engine speed when shifting down.
Shifting Gears 169
Drive-Off Assistant
The Drive-Off Assistant assists the driver when
moving off on hills.
The vehicle must have sufficient road contact.
The Drive-Off Assistant is available on gradients as
from around 5%.
Danger!
Risk of accident.
Assistance by the Drive-Off Assistant is not
guaranteed when moving off on a slippery
surface (e.g. on icy or loose surfaces). In this
case, the vehicle could slip.
The limits dictated by the laws of physics
cannot be overcome, even with the Drive-Off
Assistant. The responsibility for moving off
on upward slopes is still the driver’s, despite
the Drive-Off Assistant.
fAlways adjust your driving style to the driving
conditions and vehicle load, use the brake
pedal if necessary.
Risk of accident.
If the Drive-Off Assistant is not functioning,
the driver cannot be assisted when moving
off on hills.
fHold the vehicle with the brake pedal.
Driving off with the Drive-Off Assistant
(vehicles with manual transmission)
1. Hold the vehicle securely on the slope with the
brake pedal.
The engine must be running.
2. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
3. Engage a gear corresponding to the direction
of travel up the slope (1st gear or reverse
gear).
4. Fully release the parking brake.
5. While keeping the clutch pedal depressed,
release the brake pedal.
The vehicle is held on the slope for a short time
in order to allow driving off directly after the
brake is released.
6. Move off as usual.
Note on operation
The Drive-Off Assistant is not active:
If the clutch is not depressed.
If the vehicle is not stationary.
If the engine is not running.
On gradients of less than 5%.
If the pressure on the brake pedal is too low.
Driving off with the Drive-Off Assistant
(vehicles with PDK transmission)
1. Hold the vehicle securely on the slope with the
brake pedal.
The engine must be running.
2. Select a gear corresponding to the direction
of travel up the slope (selector lever position
Dor R).
3. Fully release the parking brake.
4. Release the brake pedal.
The vehicle is held on the slope for a short time
in order to allow driving off directly after the
brake is released.
5. Move off as usual.
Note on operation
The Drive-Off Assistant is not active:
In the event of shift to neutral.
If the vehicle is not stationary.
If the engine is not running.
On gradients of less than 5%.
If the pressure on the brake pedal is too low.
170 Shifting Gears
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK)
The Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) is a seven-
speed transmission with an “automatic” and a
“manual” selection mode.
In automatic selection mode (selector lever
position D), gear changing is automatic.
You can change temporarily from automatic to
manual mode using the shift buttons on the
steering wheel.
In manual selection mode (selector lever
position M), you change gear using the shift
buttons on the steering wheel or with the PDK
selector lever.
You can change between selector lever position D
and M as you wish while driving.
Note
fTake care not to operate the shift buttons on
the steering wheel inadvertently in either
automatic or manual mode, thereby triggering
undesired gear changes.
Changing the selector lever position
The selector lever is locked when the ignition is
switched off.
When the ignition is switched on, the selector lever
can be moved from position P and N only when
the release button is pressed, and when the brake
pedal is pressed.
Release button
The release button (arrow) in the selector lever
prevents the gear from being changed unintention-
ally.
The release button must be pressed when shifting
to position R or P.
Starting
The engine can be started only if the brake
pedal is depressed and the selector lever is in
position P or N.
Driving off
fOnly select the desired position for driving off
(D, M or R) when the engine is idling and the
brake pedal is depressed.
fSince the vehicle creeps when in gear, do not
release the brake until you want to move off.
fAfter selecting a gear, do not accelerate until
you can feel that the gear is engaged.
Driving off on hills
The Drive-Off Assistant assists the driver when
moving off on hills. The vehicle is held on the slope
for a short time during the change from the brake
pedal to the accelerator in order to allow driving
off directly after the brake is released.
fPlease see the chapter “DRIVE-OFF ASSIS-
TANT” on Page 169.
Shifting Gears 171
Indicator for selector lever position and
engaged gear
When the engine is running, the selector lever
position and engaged gear are indicated.
If the selector lever is between two positions
–Effects:
The corresponding selector lever position
flashes on the instrument cluster and the
warning “Apply brake“ or “Selector lever not
engaged” appears on the on-board computer.
fRemedy:
Operate the footbrake and engage the
selector lever properly.
If the selector lever is inadvertently (due to a
defect or incorrect operation) moved out of P or
N into gear without pressing the brake, this gear
will start to “flash” and no power transmission is
built up.
fTo drive off, press the brake and move the
selector lever from P or N into the required
gear again.
Selector lever position R or D is flashing in
the instrument cluster
–Effects:
There is no power transmission.
The selector lever was engaged without
pressing the footbrake or only the restricted
driving programme is available when the
“Transmission emergency run” message is
displayed.
fAction required:
Press the footbrake and engage the required
selector lever position again by moving the
selector lever from P or N.
If reverse gear fails:
fPlease see the chapter “REDUCED DRIVING
PROGRAM” on Page 176.
If there is a fault in the transmission:
The warning “Transmission emergency run” in
white or red lettering or the warning “Transmis-
sion temperature too high” is displayed on the
on-board computer.
Please see the chapter “REDUCED DRIVING
PROGRAM” on Page 176.
fHave the fault repaired immediately at an
authorized Porsche dealer.
172 Shifting Gears
Selector lever positions
P – Parking lock
fEngage parking lock only when vehicle is
stationary.
If selector lever position P is flashing in the
instrument cluster, the parking lock is not
engaged. The vehicle can roll away.
Engage selector lever position P again by
moving the selector lever out of R.
fEngage parking lock after applying the
handbrake and release it before releasing the
handbrake.
The ignition key can be withdrawn only in
selector lever position P.
R – Reverse gear
fSelect only if car is stationary and the brake is
applied.
N – Neutral
Selector lever position N must be selected for
towing or in car washes, for example.
fOnly select the desired position for driving off
(D, M or R) when the engine is idling and the
brake pedal is depressed.
D - Automatic selection mode
Select position D for “normal” driving. The gears
are shifted automatically according to the acceler-
ator position and speed.
Depending on the way the vehicle is driven
(economical, comfortable or sporty driving style)
and on the resistance (e.g. uphill), the gear-
changing points are shifted towards higher or
lower engine-speed ranges.
The accelerator position, driving speed, engine
speed, longitudinal and lateral acceleration and
the road profile all have an influence on the gear-
changing characteristic.
Unwanted upward shifts, e.g. before bends, are
prevented by swiftly releasing the accelerator
pedal.
Depending on lateral acceleration, upward
changes on bends are not made until the engine-
speed limit is reached.
Under braking, and depending on the amount of
deceleration, the PDK transmission changes down
earlier.
For subsequent cornering, the right gear is
engaged when pressure is applied to the brakes
before the bend. The bend is taken in the right
gear, and when you accelerate out of the bend you
do not have to change down.
With a sporty driving style, downshifts are already
initiated when the brake pedal is touched lightly.
This further enhances a dynamic driving style.
The PDK transmission temporarily changes to the
sportiest gear-changing map, i.e. to the highest
possible gear-changing points, if the accelerator
pedal is pressed quickly. The transmission accord-
ingly shifts down immediately by one or two gears
(temporary change-down).
The transmission no longer selects 7th gear at
high driving speeds.
Sport mode
(“Sport” and “Sport Plus” modes)
“Sport” mode activated:
The PDK transmission switches to a sporty gear-
changing map and shortens the gear shifting
times.
A sporty driving style is recognised more quickly
and the gear-changing speeds are adapted to
driving performance.
Deceleration downshifts are commenced earlier.
Downshifts are already carried out in the case of
slight decelerations, even at higher engine
speeds.
Shifting Gears 173
“Sport Plus” mode activated:
In “Sport Plus” mode, the PDK transmission
changes to a shift program designed for driving
on race circuits. 7th gear is not selected.
The gear-changing performance is enhanced
significantly again compared with “Sport” mode.
fPlease see the chapter “SPORT MODE” on
Page 64.
Driving with Launch Control
Driving with Launch Control allows you to achieve
maximum acceleration from a standing start. It is
intended to provide you with a unique enjoyment of
your vehicle under controlled circumstances and
is not intended to be used in any location where it
could be a nuisance to other persons.
Warning!
There is a risk of endangering other road
users if you use this Control in an improper
location or in a situation where other persons
might need to take evasive action due to the
rapid acceleration that this technology
permits.
fLaunch Control is designed to be used in a
controlled environment on closed circuit
driving courses where no vehicle cross traffic
or pedestrian traffic is present.
fUse Launch Control only if conditions permit it
to be applied in a safe manner.
fDo not use Launch Control if there is a possibi-
lity it could endanger other persons. Such a
possibility exists if you cannot see that you
have a clear road with no possibility of cross
traffic in your intended direction of driving.
Caution!
Stress on components increases dramatically
when starting with maximum acceleration in
comparison with normal driving off. Use of
Launch Control will inevitably reduce the life
of the engaged engine and transmission
components.
Preconditions:
Launch Control should only be used when the
engine has reached operating temperature.
“Sport Plus” mode must be switched on (light-
emitting diode in button is on and “SPORT
PLUS” is displayed on the on-board computer).
1. Press the brake with your left foot.
2. Quickly press down the accelerator fully
(kickdown activated) and hold.
The engine speed will flatten out at around
6500 rpm.
“Launch Control active” is displayed on the
on-board computer.
3. Release the brake within a few seconds.
Remaining stationary for a long time with
“Launch Control active” can lead to overload-
ing of the transmission.
In order to protect the transmission, the engine
power is then reduced and the “Launch Control
active” process is cancelled.
Shifting gears on the steering wheel
With the shift buttons on the steering wheel, you
can change temporarily from automatic selection
mode D to manual mode M.
For example:
Shifting down before bends and on entering
built-up areas.
Shifting down on downward slopes
(engine braking).
Shifting down for brief spurts of acceleration.
Manual selection mode remains engaged:
for cornering (depending on the lateral acceler-
ation) and overrunning,
when the vehicle is stationary (e.g. at a
junction).
The system leaves manual selection mode:
automatically after approx. 8 seconds (unless
cornering or overrunning),
after driving off.
174 Shifting Gears
Kickdown
The kickdown function is active in selector lever
positions D and M.
fFor optimum acceleration, e.g. when
overtaking, depress the accelerator pedal
beyond the full-throttle point (kickdown).
The transmission shifts down depending on the
speed of travel and engine speed.
Upward shifts occur at the highest possible engine
speeds.
M – Manual selection mode
The currently selected gear is retained when you
change from D to M.
If you change from M to D, the gear-changing map
suitable for your current driving style is selected
and the appropriate gear is selected.
The selector lever and the two shift buttons in the
top steering wheel spokes allow you to comfort-
ably and reliably select the seven forward gears.
Shifting up +
fPress the PDK selector lever or shift button on
the steering wheel forward.
Shifting down –
fPull the PDK selector lever or shift button on
the steering wheel back.
You can shift up or down by the corresponding
number of gears by quickly pressing or pulling the
shift buttons or selector lever several times in
succession.
The transmission can be shifted up or down by
several gears in succession by continuously
operating the selector lever or shift buttons.
Shifting Gears 175
Depending on driving speed and engine speed,
you can shift up or down at any time.
Gear changes which would exceed the upper or
lower engine speed limit are not executed by the
controller.
There is no automatic upshift at the upper engine
speed limit in selector lever position M. Upshift
suppression can be cancelled by kickdown opera-
tion. If, for example, the engine speed limit is
reached during overtaking and the automatic
upshift does not occur, the transmission in this
case shifts up as a result of kickdown operation.
fSelect an appropriately low gear on upward
and downward slopes.
This will ensure optimum use of engine power
and engine braking.
In order to shift up automatically at the upper
engine speed limit:
fDepress the accelerator pedal beyond the full-
throttle point (kickdown).
Failure of the selector lever display on the
instrument cluster
The warning “Transmission emergency run” is
displayed in red on the on-board computer.
–Effect:
No selector lever position is displayed on the
instrument cluster.
Vehicle can be driven only until it comes to a
stop.
Remedy:
It is not possible to continue driving. Immedi-
ately stop the vehicle in a suitable place. Have
the vehicle towed to an authorized Porsche
dealer.
Stopping
fFor a brief stop (e.g. at a traffic light), leave the
selector lever in drive position and hold the
vehicle with the brake pedal.
fDo not hold the car on a slope using the
accelerator. Use the brake pedal or the
handbrake instead.
fBefore leaving the vehicle, always apply the
handbrake and move the selector lever to
position P.
Parking
fGo easy on the accelerator!
fWhen parking or manoeuvring in a small
space, control the speed by careful use of the
footbrake.
Driving in winter
In wintry road conditions it is advisable to take
steep inclines in manual mode. This prevents gear
changes occurring that could cause wheelspin.
Tow-starting, towing
fPlease see the chapter “TOWING” on
Page 280.
176 Shifting Gears
Reduced driving program
If there is a fault in the transmission
Depending on priority, the warning “Transmis-
sion emergency run” in white or red lettering or
the warning “Transmission temperature too
high” is displayed on the on-board computer.
Warning “Transmission emergency run” white
Effects:
Restricted gearshift comfort,
Reverse gear may not function.
Remedy:
Have the fault repaired immediately at an
authorized Porsche dealer.
Warning “Transmission emergency run” red
Effect:
Vehicle can be driven only until it comes to a
stop.
Remedy:
It is not possible to continue driving. Immedi-
ately stop the vehicle in a suitable place. Have
the vehicle towed to an authorized Porsche
dealer.
Warning “Transmission temperature too high”
–Effects:
“Warning jerks” can be felt when driving off and
the engine power may be restricted.
Remedy:
Do not hold the vehicle with the accelerator on
a hill, for example. Hold the vehicle with the
brake. Reduce engine load. If possible, stop
the vehicle in a suitable place. Allow the engine
to run in selector lever position P or N until the
warning disappears.
Mobile Roofs 177
Mobile Roofs
Lifting/Sliding Roof.................................... 178
Convertible Top......................................... 181
Emergency operation of the convertible top 183
Windstop.................................................. 190
Hardtop.................................................... 194
Targa ....................................................... 200
Roof Transport System.............................. 204
178 Mobile Roofs
Lifting/Sliding Roof
Warning!
Risk of injury when operating or automatical-
ly closing the lifting/sliding roof.
fTake care to ensure that nobody can be injured
when the lifting/sliding roof is operated.
fAlways withdraw the ignition key when leaving
the vehicle. Uninformed persons (e.g. children)
could injure themselves by operating the lift-
ing/sliding roof.
fIn case of danger, release the button immedi-
ately and operate the lifting/sliding roof in the
opposite direction.
Readiness for operation
When the ignition is switched on (engine
switched on or off) or
With doors closed and ignition key withdrawn,
but only until a door is first opened.
A - Opening the lifting/sliding roof
fPress rear of rocker switch A until lifting/slid-
ing roof reaches the desired position.
One-touch operation
fTouch rear of rocker switch A.
Lifting/sliding roof opens to its end position.
Stop it in any position by touching any button.
Note
The lifting/sliding roof opens until it reaches the
best position relative to noise. It can be opened
fully, however, if you press the rocker switch
again.
Mobile Roofs 179
B - Closing the lifting/sliding roof
fPress front of rocker switch B until lifting/slid-
ing roof reaches the desired position.
C - Lifting the lifting/sliding roof
fPress center of rocker switch C until lifting/
sliding roof reaches the desired position.
One-touch operation
fTouch the rocker switch C in the center.
Lifting/sliding roof opens to its end position.
Touch button again to stop in any position.
B - Lowering the lifting/sliding roof
fPress front of rocker switch B until lifting/slid-
ing roof reaches the desired position.
Emergency operation
Warning!
Risk of serious personal injury and damage
to the lifting/sliding roof during emergency
operation.
fDo not operate the lifting/sliding roof with the
rocker switch during and after emergency
operation.
Before using emergency operation, please check
whether defective fuses are the cause of the mal-
function.
fPlease see the chapter “ELECTRICAL SYS-
TEM” on Page 257.
Closing the sliding roof
1. Carefully unclip both covers A with a screwdriv-
er.
If the car is equipped with HomeLink, the
HomeLink buttons must be carefully unclipped
instead of the covers.
2. Unscrew the two screws B.
180 Mobile Roofs
3. Fold down the cover of the lifting/sliding roof
drive at the rear.
Remove the Allen key (arrow) from its holder.
4. Insert the Allen key into the drive axle.
5. Press the Allen key into the drive axle, keep it
pressed in and turn it clockwise until the lift-
ing/sliding roof is closed.
6. Remove the Allen key.
Close the cover and screw in the screws.
7. Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Caution!
Risk of damage to the lifting/sliding roof.
fAfter emergency operation, do not operate the
lifting/sliding roof using the rocker switch.
fDrive slowly to an authorized Porsche dealer in
order to have the fault remedied.
Mobile Roofs 181
Convertible Top
Brief operating instructions can be found on the
back side of the driver’s sun visor.
fPlease see the chapter “CAR CARE INSTRUC-
TIONS” on Page 224.
Warning!
When opening or closing the convertible top,
serious personal injury may occur if a per-
son’s body parts are near or in the way of the
convertible top mechanism’s moving parts.
fMake absolutely sure that nobody can be in-
jured by the convertible-top mechanism or the
convertible-top compartment lid.
Do not operate convertible top:
At temperatures below 32 °F (0 °C).
When one side of the car is on a curb, a hoist
or a jack.
When items of luggage or other objects hinder
the convertible top movement.
With the rollbars extended.
fAvoid frequent operation of the convertible top
with the engine off; the vehicle battery would
be unintentionally discharged rapidly.
fDrive only with the convertible top fully open or
closed (end positions).
fWhen opening or closing the convertible top,
ensure there is sufficient clearance above the
convertible top (e.g. in the garage).
fTo prevent damp stains and abrasions, only
open the convertible top in a dry, clean state.
fPark your car in the shade whenever possible,
as the fabric, rubber material and color can be
harmed by long exposure to sunlight.
fThe convertible top may only be actuated dur-
ing driving on even surfaces.
fThe convertible top must not be used with
strong counter wind (over approx. 50 mph/
80 km/h).
Door windows and side windows
The side windows are lowered automatically when
the convertible top is opened. The door windows
close automatically if convertible top operation is
not interrupted when the convertible top reaches
its final position.
When the door windows are closed, the rear side
windows can also be closed.
When opening the door windows, the rear win-
dows open automatically.
The side windows are lowered automatically when
the convertible top is closed. All windows close
automatically if convertible top operation is not in-
terrupted when the convertible top reaches its fi-
nal position.
182 Mobile Roofs
Preconditions for operation of the
convertible top
The ignition must be switched on
(engine running or off),
the engine compartment lid must be closed,
the speed must be below approx. 30 mph
(50 km/h).
If this maximum speed is exceeded, the open-
ing/closing procedure of the convertible top
will be interrupted.
fReduce speed.
Press button again.
The opening/closing process is ended.
Warning!
Risk of injury and damage when operating
the convertible top.
fMake absolutely sure that nobody can be in-
jured by the convertible-top mechanism or the
convertible-top compartment lid.
fBefore opening the convertible top, make sure
that there are no objects behind the rear seats.
fKeep the lids of the make-up mirrors in the sun
visors closed when closing the convertible top.
fIn order to abort convertible top operation in
the event of danger, immediately release the
switch.
Opening convertible top
fPull the switch and hold without interruption un-
til the convertible top is in the final position or
until the door windows are in the desired posi-
tion.
The message on the on-board computer goes
out.
In case of danger, release the switch.
Convertible top operation stops.
Closing convertible top
fPull the switch and hold without interruption
until the convertible top is in the final position
or until the door windows are in the desired
position.
The message on the on-board computer goes
out.
In case of danger, release the switch.
Convertible top operation stops.
Mobile Roofs 183
If the convertible top does not lock in the
windshield frame
fOpen convertible top again, start the engine
and close the convertible top again using the
switch.
Assist with the closing process by grasping the
convertible top at the handhold and pulling it
toward the windshield frame (arrow).
fPlease see the chapter “WARNINGS ON THE
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE ON-BOARD
COMPUTER” on Page 158.
Messages in on-board computer
If the engine compartment lid is open when acti-
vating the convertible top, a message appears in
the on-board computer. The convertible top can-
not be opened.
fClose engine compartment lid.
fPlease see the chapter “WARNINGS ON THE
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE ON-BOARD
COMPUTER” on Page 158.
Emergency operation
of the convertible top
fBefore performing emergency operation,
please check:
Was the ignition switched on and was the en-
gine compartment lid closed during operation
of the convertible top with the switch?
Are electrical fuses defective?
Please see the chapter “ELECTRICAL SYS-
TEM” on Page 257.
Warning!
There is danger of injury and damage during
emergency operation.
There is danger of crushing or trapping body
parts at all movable convertible top parts
which could cause serious personal injury.
fTake great care when performing emergency
operation.
fDo not operate the convertible top during and
after emergency operation.
Before emergency operation
fRemove the ignition key so that the convertible
top is not operated unintentionally.
fTake screwdriver out of the tool kit.
fFold the rear seat backrests forward.
Rear lid
Convertible top status
184 Mobile Roofs
Removing rear wall lining
1. Unscrew screws A from the rear wall lining.
Pull out and reposition the screwdriver insert if
necessary.
2. Grasp the rear wall lining at the cut-outs for the
safety belts and press downward.
Pull rear wall lining forward and lift up and out.
Opening convertible top compartment
lid “D”
1. Take red Allen key B out of its holder.
2. Put handle of screwdriver onto Allen key B.
Insert Allen key into the drive axle C and turn it
counterclockwise (in direction of the arrow) un-
til the convertible top compartment lid D is fully
open.
Remove the Allen key.
Warning!
The Allen key can rotate or fly out and there-
by cause serious personal injury if the con-
vertible top is actuated.
fAlways remove the Allen key B from the drive
axle C before operating the convertible top.
When you have opened the convertible top com-
partment lid, try to close the convertible top using
the switch.
If the convertible top cannot be closed, continue
with emergency operation.
Mobile Roofs 185
Opening side flaps “F”
1. Remove ignition key.
2. Use the screwdriver to remove plastic lid E
from the lining from behind.
3. Insert Allen key B into the drive axle for the left
side flap F.
Turn Allen key counterclockwise (in direction of
arrow) until the side flap F is fully open (percep-
tible stop).
4. Repeat procedure with the right side flap.
Remove the Allen key.
Warning!
The Allen key can rotate or fly out and there-
by cause serious personal injury if the con-
vertible top is actuated.
fAlways remove the Allen key B from the drive
axle of the side flap before operating the con-
vertible top.
fWhen you have opened the side flaps, try to
close the convertible top using the switch.
If the convertible top cannot be closed, contin-
ue with emergency operation.
186 Mobile Roofs
Closing convertible top
1. Insert Allen key B through hole G and into the
hydraulic valve.
Turn Allen key B counterclockwise by approx.
1 revolution.
Always remove Allen key B.
2. Get behind the front seats and grasp the con-
vertible top in the middle. 3. Close the convertible top until it reaches its
highest position.
Mobile Roofs 187
The convertible top lock with the locking hook is
fitted on the convertible top.
Perform the work on the convertible top lock when
standing on the right-hand side of the vehicle.
Extending the locking hook “H”
1. Pull the plastic lid J down on the front corners.
Push the lid carefully to the rear and take it off.
2. Take the Allen key K out of the oddments tray
between the front seats.
3. Insert the Allen key K into the opening L and
turn in the direction of arrow “open” until
marked resistance can be felt.
The locking hook H is now extended.
4. Pull out the Allen key K.
188 Mobile Roofs
5. Pull the convertible top all the way forward to
the windshield.
Locking the locking hook “H” in the
windshield frame
fWhen locking the convertible top, make sure
that the locking hook engages in the
windshield frame. Pull the convertible top to
the windshield frame if necessary.
The centering journals M must be retracted
into the mounting in the windshield frame.
1. Insert the Allen key again.
Turn in the direction of arrow “close” until you
can feel marked resistance and the convertible
top is completely locked.
2. Remove the Allen key.
Mounting the plastic lid
fPush the plastic lid over the convertible top
locking mechanism from behind.
The lid must engage centred in the guide N.
Push the lid upwards at its front edge and
engage.
Warning!
Risk of injury in an accident.
fDo not drive without the plastic lid mounted.
Mobile Roofs 189
Closing the convertible-top compartment lid
Warning!
Risk of pinching when closing the
convertible-top compartment lid.
fPlace your hands on the convertible-top
compartment lid when pushing.
1. Stand behind the vehicle.
2. Grasp the convertible-top compartment lid
above the brake light and push forward against
resistance which can be felt until it is
completely closed.
Caution!
Risk of damage to the convertible top.
fAfter emergency operation, do not operate the
convertible top using the switch.
fDrive slowly to an authorized Porsche dealer in
order to have the fault remedied.
190 Mobile Roofs
Example: Mount for 911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S
Windstop
The windstop is stowed in a protective bag in the
luggage compartment.
The protective bag is fastened with a Velcro strip
in the luggage compartment.
Caution!
Risk of damage to the windstop
fMake sure that the windstop is not damaged
by items of luggage or objects in the luggage
compartment.
fDo not place any objects on the windstop.
fDo not store any sharp-edged objects under
the installed windstop.
fDo not damage the windstop during seat ad-
justment and when folding back the front-seat
backrests.
Adjust seat so that the seat backrest does not
touch the windstop.
fDo not fold up the rear seat backrests with the
windstop installed.
fRemove windstop before fitting a hardtop.
Installing the windstop
1. Open zipper of the protective bag.
Take the windstop out of the luggage compart-
ment.
Mobile Roofs 191
2. Fold the rear seat backrests forward.
Please see the chapter “REAR SEAT BACK-
RESTS” on Page 37.
3. Unfold the windstop until it can be felt to en-
gage in the hinges at the top and bottom.
4. Check whether the lock of the windstop lower
section is engaged.
Press lock together if necessary (arrows).
A - Lock open
B - Lock closed
5. Check whether the two red locking handles are
in position A (open).
Open the lock if necessary. To do this, push the
locking handles inward as far as they will go
and swivel to the side (arrow).
192 Mobile Roofs
6. Insert fastening tabs C of the windstop into the
guides of the safety belts.
Make sure that the plastic peg E engages in
the center guide of the windstop.
7. Push red locking handles inward and swivel
downward.
Spring force pushes the square pins of the
locks into the receivers D in the side trim pan-
els.
Check whether the square pins are correctly
engaged.
8. Lift upper section of windstop if required.
Mobile Roofs 193
A - Lock open
B - Lock closed
Removing the windstop
1. Fold back upper section of windstop.
2. Move both red locking handles to position A
(open).
3. Pull windstop out of the guides of the safety
belts.
4. Fold the windstop together so that the split
windstop lower section is on the outside.
5. Place windstop in the protective bag in the lug-
gage compartment and seal the zipper of the
protective bag.
Please see the chapter “INSTALLING THE
WINDSTOP” on Page 190.
194 Mobile Roofs
Hardtop
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be glad to give
advice about correct hardtop storage.
Since the convertible top stays open for a long
time, it must be absolutely dry and clean before
being opened to install the hardtop.
This prevents damp stains and abrasion damage.
fMake sure that the hardtop is placed on a
clean, soft surface.
Removing the hardtop
1. Open all four side windows.
2. Pull off plastic cover of the front hardtop lock
(arrow).
3. Press red locking button A of the front locking
lever.
Fully open locking lever B.
Mobile Roofs 195
4. Take unlocking handle D from the storage tray
between the front seats.
5. Position unlocking handle D on the dot mark-
ing.
Carefully remove the plastic covers C on both
sides of the hardtop.
6. Insert unlocking handle D into one of the rear
hardtop locks.
Unscrew the fastening screw approx. 2 turns,
pull off the handle, and completely unscrew the
screw by hand (approx. 8 turns).
7. Pull out the fastening screw up to the stop and
turn it anticlockwise 2 turns (to prevent dam-
age).
8. Repeat procedure on the other side of the
hardtop.
9. Together with a second person on the other
side, grasp the hardtop at points E and F.
Warning!
Danger of pinching fingers or hands at the
points “F”.
fEvenly lift the hardtop at both sides.
10.First pull the hardtop rearward and up out of
the locking elements.
Carefully lift the hardtop up and over the vehi-
cle to the rear.
196 Mobile Roofs
11.Carefully remove both protection covers J to
the rear.
12.Fit both plastic covers C into the trim panel.
The marking point must point to the rear.
These covers are also used with the hardtop.
13.Close front locking lever.
Push on plastic cover of the front hardtop lock.
Putting on the hardtop
Caution!
Risk of damage to the windstop and hardtop.
fAlways remove the windstop before fitting the
hardtop.
Please see the chapter “WINDSTOP” on
Page 190.
1. Open all four side windows and convertible
top.
2. Take unlocking handle D from the storage tray
between the front seats.
Position unlocking D on the point marking.
Carefully remove both plastic covers C on both
sides of the hardtop.
3. Carefully fit both protective covers J into the
trim panel from behind.
Mobile Roofs 197
4. Pull off plastic cover of the front hardtop lock. 5. Press red lock button of the front locking lever.
Fully open locking lever.
198 Mobile Roofs
6. Check whether the rear screw connections on
the hardtop are loosened (turn it 2 turns clock-
wise).
7. Together with a second person on the other
side, grasp the hardtop at points E and F.
8. Carefully lift the hardtop up and over the vehi-
cle from behind.
Warning!
Danger of pinching fingers or hands at the
points “F”.
fEvenly lower the hardtop at both sides.
9. First push the hardtop completely into the
guides on the windshield frame.
Then carefully lower the hardtop into the lock-
ing elements at the rear.
Caution!
Danger of damage due to inadvertent opera-
tion of the convertible top with the hardtop
fitted.
fMake sure that the front locking lever G is al-
ways correctly locked.
This disables the convertible top drive.
Mobile Roofs 199
10.Swivel front locking lever G to the rear.
The latching hook H must engage in the wind-
shield frame (arrow).
The white marking line J on the red locking but-
ton must become visible when the hardtop is
locked properly.
11.Push on plastic cover of the front hardtop lock.
12.Tighten the fastening screw by hand.
Then tighten the fastening screw with the un-
locking handle D (tightening torque 34 ftlb.
(46 Nm)).
13.Repeat procedure on the other side of the
hardtop.
14.Fit both plastic covers C into the trim panels of
the rear hardtop locking elements so that the
marking points are opposite each other.
15.Store unlocking handle in storage tray
between the front seats.
200 Mobile Roofs
Targa
This roof type is equipped with the following spe-
cial features:
Roller blind
Sliding glass roof
Glass rear hatch
Warning!
Risk of injury when operating all components
of the Targa roof, especially when closing the
sliding glass roof.
fTake care to ensure that nobody can be injured
when the roof components are actuated.
fAlways withdraw the ignition key when leaving
the vehicle. Uninformed persons (e.g. children)
could injure themselves by operating the slid-
ing glass roof, the roller blind or the glass rear
hatch.
fIn case of danger, release the button immedi-
ately and operate the sliding glass roof or roll-
er blind in the opposite direction.
Roller blind
Readiness for operation
With the ignition switched on (engine on or off)
or
When door is closed and ignition key with-
drawn, but only until door is first opened.
The roller blind can be operated independently of
the sliding glass roof position.
Warning!
Risk of injury and damage.
fBefore operating the roller blind, ensure that
there are no persons or objects in the range of
movement.
Opening the roller blind to the desired
position
fPull the rocker switch and hold it until the roller
blind has reached the desired position.
Opening the roller blind fully (one-touch
operation)
fPull the rocker switch briefly.
The roller blind moves to its final position.
Touch the rocker switch again to stop in any
position.
Closing the roller blind to the desired position
fPush the rocker switch and hold it until the roll-
er blind has reached the desired position.
Closing the roller blind fully (one-touch
operation)
fPush the rocker switch briefly.
The roller blind moves to its final position.
Touch the rocker switch again to stop in any
position.
Mobile Roofs 201
Sliding glass roof
Readiness for operation
With ignition switched on (engine on or off) or
When door is closed and ignition key with-
drawn, but only until door is first opened.
The glass rear hatch must be closed.
Opening sliding glass roof
Warning!
Risk of injury and damage.
fBefore opening the sliding glass roof, ensure
that there are no persons or objects in the
range of movement.
fPush the rocker switch and hold it until the
sliding glass roof has reached the desired po-
sition.
Closing the sliding glass roof
Warning!
Risk of injury and damage.
fBefore closing the sliding glass roof, ensure
that there are no persons or objects in the
range of movement.
fPull the rocker switch and hold it until the
sliding glass roof is closed and completely
raised.
Glass rear hatch
Opening the glass rear hatch
The sliding glass roof must be closed.
fTo unlock it, operate the pull-button A beside
the driver’s seat, or
fpush the button for the glass rear hatch on the
remote control.
fPlease see the chapter “KEY WITH RADIO RE-
MOTE CONTROL” on Page 16.
fLift glass rear hatch.
The interior light is switched on when the glass
rear hatch is unlocked.
202 Mobile Roofs
Closing glass rear hatch
Warning!
Risk of pinching. The glass rear hatch is
automatically pulled into the lock and
locked.
fEnsure that your fingers are not caught under
the glass rear hatch.
fPlace your hand on the glass rear hatch.
fLower the glass rear hatch until it is automati-
cally closed and locked.
Message in on-board computer
Glass rear hatch
A message appears on the on-board computer if
the glass rear hatch is not completely closed.
fFully close the glass rear hatch.
Emergency operation of sliding glass roof
Closing the sliding glass roof
fBefore using emergency operation, please
check whether the fuses may be defective.
fPlease see the chapter “ELECTRICAL SYS-
TEM” on Page 257.
Warning!
Risk of injury and damage.
fDo not operate the sliding glass roof with the
rocker switch during and after emergency op-
eration.
1. Remove ignition key.
2. Move the front passenger seat forward and
fold the backrest forward.
Fold the rear seat backrests forward.
3. Grasp under the rear-wall lining A with your
hands. Forcefully pull the rear-wall lining A for-
ward.
Mobile Roofs 203
You will find the Allen keys for emergency opera-
tion on the back on the lining A.
4. Take both Allen keys B out of their holder.
5. Insert the Allen keys into the drive axles C of
the electric motors.
6. Press both Allen keys into the drive axles until
they engage audibly. This requires a somewhat
greater effort.
7. Keep both Allen keys pressed in and turn them
to the right. Keep turning until the sliding roof
is closed.
8. Remove the Allen keys. Close the rear-wall lin-
ing.
9. Please have the fault remedied at an author-
ized Porsche dealer.
204 Mobile Roofs
Roof Transport System
(Coupé only)
fPlease follow the separate instructions for fit-
ting the Roof Transport System.
fOnly use Roof Transport Systems from the
Porsche Tequipment product range or Roof
Transport Systems which have been tested
and approved for your car by Porsche.
Fitting normal commercially available luggage
racks is not possible.
The Porsche Roof Transport System allows you
to carry various sports and hobby equipment.
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to
tell you about the various different uses of the
Roof Transport System.
Safety notes!
fCompletely remove the Roof Transport System
before using an automatic car wash – risk of
damage to the vehicle!
fDo not exceed the maximum permitted pay-
load, the maximum permitted gross weight
and the maximum permitted axle loads.
Please see the chapter “WEIGHTS COUPÉ” on
Page 291.
fDistribute load evenly, with heavy items as low
as possible.
Items of luggage must not project beyond the
side of the load area.
fFix and secure every item to the basic carrier
with a rope or lashing strap (do not use elastic
rubber tensioners).
fBefore every journey, and at regular intervals
during long trips, check that Roof Transport
System and load are secure. Re-tighten if nec-
essary and secure additionally by locking.
When the Roof Transport System is loaded, the
maximum speed depends on the nature, size and
weight of the load being carried.
Driving, braking and steering behavior change due
to the higher center of gravity and the greater
wind-resistant area. You should adapt your driving
style appropriately.
Since fuel consumption and noise are increased
with the Roof Transport System fitted, it should
not remain on the vehicle if not in use.
Maintenance, Car Care 205
Maintenance, Car Care
Exercise Extreme Caution when Working
on your Vehicle ......................................... 206
Coolant Level............................................ 207
Engine Oil................................................. 208
Engine Oil Level ........................................ 208
Engine Oil Recommendation....................... 210
Brake Fluid Level....................................... 212
Fuel Economy........................................... 214
Operating your Porsche in other Countries.. 214
Fuel Recommendations.............................. 216
Portable Fuel Containers............................ 217
Fuel Evaporation Control............................ 217
Emission Control System ........................... 218
How Emission Control Works...................... 219
Washer Fluid............................................. 220
Power Steering......................................... 221
Air Filter ................................................... 222
Combination Filter..................................... 222
Fluids/Oils for Manual Transmission
and Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK)............ 222
Wiper Blades ............................................ 223
Car Care Instructions................................. 224
206 Maintenance, Car Care
Exercise Extreme Caution when
Working on your Vehicle
Danger!
Ignoring the following instructions may
cause serious personal injury or death.
fThe engine compartment of any motor vehicle
is a potentially hazardous area. If you are not
fully familiar with proper repair procedures, do
not attempt the adjustments described on the
following pages.
This caution also applies to the entire vehicle.
fOnly work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well
ventilated area.
fEnsure that there are no open flames in the
area of your vehicle at any time when fuel
fumes might be present. Be especially cau-
tious of such devices such as hot water heat-
ers which ignite a flame intermittently.
fBefore working on any part in the engine com-
partment, turn the engine off and let it cool
down sufficiently. Hot engine compartment
components can burn skin on contact.
fBe alert and cautious around engine at all
times while the engine is running.
If work has to be performed with the engine
running, always set the parking brake, and
make sure the shift lever is in neutral position
or the PDK selector lever in position P or N.
fIn particular, be very careful to ensure that
items of clothing (ties, shirt, sleeves etc.),
jewelry, long hair, hand or fingers cannot get
caught in the engine-compartment blower, fan,
belts or other moving parts.
The radiator and radiator fans are in the front
of the car.
The engine-compartment blower is mounted
on the engine-compartment lid.
The engine-compartment blower can start or
continue running as a function of temperature,
even with the engine switched off.
Carry out work in these areas only with the en-
gine off, the ignition switched off, and exercise
extreme caution.
fYour Porsche is equipped with an electronic ig-
nition system. When the ignition is on, high
voltage is present in all wires connected with
the ignition system; therefore, exercise ex-
treme caution when working on any part of the
engine while the ignition is on or the engine is
running.
fAlways support your car with safety stands if it
is necessary to work under the car.
fWhen working under the car without safety
stands but with the wheels on the ground,
make sure the car is on level ground, the
wheels are blocked, and that the engine
cannot be started.
Remove the ignition key.
fDo not smoke or allow an open flame around
the battery or fuel.
Keep a fire extinguisher in close reach.
fIncomplete or improper servicing may cause
problems in the operation of the car. If in doubt
about any servicing, have it done by your
authorized Porsche dealer.
Improper maintenance during the warranty
period may affect your Porsche warranty cov-
erage.
fSupplies of fluids, e.g. engine oil, brake fluid or
coolant, are hazardous to your health.
Keep these fluids out of children’s reach and
dispose of them in accordance with the appro-
priate regulations.
fSome countries require additional tools and
special spare parts to be carried in your vehi-
cle.
Please make enquiries before driving abroad.
Maintenance, Car Care 207
Coolant Level
fPlease see the chapter “EXERCISE EXTREME
CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VEHICLE”
on Page 206.
The cooling system is filled at the factory with a
permanent coolant.
It provides year-round protection from corrosion
and freezing down to –31 °F/–35 °C.
fOnly use antifreeze authorized by Porsche.
Checking coolant level
The expansion tank with its filler orifice is in the en-
gine compartment.
fCheck the coolant level regularly through the
transparent expansion tank.
When the engine is cold and the car is level the
fluid level must lie between the “MIN” and “MAX”
markings.
Topping off coolant
Warning!
Danger of serious personal injury or death
from scalding. Coolant is hazardous to your
health, and may be fatal if swallowed.
fDo not open the cap of the expansion tank
while the engine is hot.
fAllow the engine to cool down before opening
the cap and protect your hands, arms and face
from any possible escape of hot coolant.
fKeep coolant out of children’s reach.
fAlso, keep coolant away from your pets.
They can be attracted to it should there be a
spill, or to used coolant left in an open contain-
er. Coolant can be deadly to pets if consumed.
1. Switch engine off and let it cool.
Please see the chapter “COOLING SYSTEM” on
Page 120.
2. Cover the expansion tank cap with a thick rag.
Open cap slowly and carefully and allow over-
pressure to escape.
Then unscrew cap completely.
3. Only add a mixture of antifreeze and water in
equal parts, and do not exceed the “MAX”
mark.
Antifreeze in coolant:
50% gives protection down to –31 °F/–35 °C
60% gives protection down to –58 °F/–50 °C
4. Screw cap firmly on.
If in an emergency pure water has been added, the
mix ratio must be corrected at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Marked loss of coolant indicates leakage in the
cooling system.
The cause should immediately be remedied at an
authorized Porsche dealer.
208 Maintenance, Car Care
Engine-compartment blower,
radiator fan
The radiator and radiator fans are in the front of
the car.
The engine-compartment blower is mounted on
the engine compartment lid.
Warning!
Risk of injury.
After the engine is switched off, the engine-
compartment temperature is monitored for
approx. 30 minutes.
During this period, and depending on tem-
perature, the engine-compartment blower
may continue to run or start to run.
fCarry out work in these areas only with the en-
gine off, the ignition off, and exercise extreme
caution.
Risk of injury. The radiator fans in the front
end of the car may be operating or
unexpectedly start operating when the
engine is switched on.
fCarry out work in these areas only with the en-
gine switched off.
Engine Oil
It is important to perform oil changes regularly in
accordance with the intervals specified in the
“Maintenance” booklet.
Engine oil consumption
It is normal for your engine to consume oil.
The rate of oil consumption depends on the quality
and viscosity of oil, the speed at which the engine
is operated, the climate, road conditions as well
as the amount of dilution and oxidation of the
lubricant.
If the vehicle is used for repeated short trips, and
consumes a normal amount of oil, the engine oil
measurement may not show any drop in the oil
level at all, even after 600 miles (1,000 km) or
more. This is because the oil is gradually becom-
ing diluted with fuel or moisture, making it appear
that the oil level has not changed.
The diluting ingredients evaporate out when the
vehicle is driven at high speeds, as on an express-
way, making it then appear that oil is excessively
consumed after driving at high speeds.
If the conditions you drive your vehicle in are
dusty, humid, or hot, the frequency of the oil
change intervals should be greater.
If the vehicle is driven at a high rate of speed,
climatic conditions are warm, and the load is high,
the oil should be checked more frequently, as
driving conditions will determine the rate of oil
consumption.
The engine in your vehicle depends on oil to
lubricate and cool all of its moving parts.
Therefore, the engine oil should be checked
regularly and kept at the required level.
Make it a habit to have the engine oil level
checked at every fuel filling.
The oil pressure warning light is not an oil level
indicator.
The oil pressure warning light indicates serious
engine damage may be occuring when lit, if en-
gine rpm is above idle speed.
Engine Oil Level
fPlease see the chapter “EXERCISE EXTREME
CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VEHICLE”
on Page 206.
fRegularly check the oil level using the on-board
computer after the vehicle is refuelled.
Please see the chapter “OIL DISPLAY AND
MEASUREMENT OF THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL”
on Page 153.
The difference between the minimum and maxi-
mum marks on the segment display is approx.
1.3 quarts (1.25 liters).
Each segment of the display corresponds to ap-
prox. 0.42 quart (0.4 liter).
Maintenance, Car Care 209
Topping off engine oil
Warning!
Risk of burning from hot parts in engine com-
partment. Risk of injury by rotating parts.
The engine compartment blower on the en-
gine compartment lid can start up even with
engine off.
fExercise extrem caution when working in the
engine compartment.
fTop off engine oil only with the engine off.
Engine oil is hazardous to your health and
may be fatal if swallowed.
fKeep engine oil out of children’s reach.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals.
fAlways protect your skin by washing thorough-
ly with soap and water.
Note
The Check Engine warning light may light up if the
cap of the oil filler opening is opened while the
engine is running.
1. Measure the oil level and read off the required
top-up quantity on the on-board computer.
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Turn the oil filler cap counter-clockwise by
approx. 90 ° and fully pull out the oil filler tube
by means of the cap.
4. Fold down the oil filler cap.
5. Add at most 0.5 quarts (0.5 liter) of engine oil
at a time.
Never add more engine oil than required
to reach the max. mark.
6. Fold up oil filler cap.
7. Push in oil filler tube fully and turn cap clock-
wise until you feel it reach its end position.
8. Measure oil level again with the on-board
computer. Switch off the engine.
9. If necessary, repeat the process and add more
engine oil as required.
210 Maintenance, Car Care
Engine Oil Recommendation
Porsche recommends .
The right oil for your vehicle.
1) Generally, you can find details of the
manufacturer approvals on the oil containers or as
a notice displayed by the retailer.
The current approval status is also available from
your Porsche partner.
2) SAE viscosity class - Example: SAE 0W - 40
Specification 0W = Viscosity specification for
low temperatures (winter).
Specification 40 = Viscosity specification for
high temperatures.
3) For all temperature ranges.
4) For the temperature range over --13 °F (--25 °C).
Always observe the following points:
Use engine oils approved by Porsche only. This
is a precondition for optimum and problem-free
operation of your vehicle.
Regular oil changes are part of servicing.
It is important that the service intervals,
particularly the oil change intervals, are
observed in accordance with the specifications
in the “Maintenance” booklet.
Oils approved by Porsche can be mixed with
each other.
Porsche engines are designed so that no oil
additives may be used.
A label is located in the engine compartment,
which provides you with information on suitable
oil for your engine.
Your Porsche partner will be pleased to advise
you.
Oil change
The engine oil has to be changed regularly at the
intervals listed in your Maintenance Schedule.
fPlease see the chapter “CAPACITIES” on
Page 290.
We recommend that you have the engine oil
changed at your Porsche dealer, who has the re-
quired oils and the necessary filling equipment.
If you suspect an oil leak in the engine have your
dealer check it out immediately.
All current engine oils are compatible with each
other, i.e. when making an oil change it is not nec-
essary to flush the engine if you wish to use a dif-
ferent brand or grade of oil.
Since, however, each brand of oil has a special
composition, you should, if possible, use the
same oil brand if it becomes necessary to top up
between oil changes.
Porsche engines have long intervals between oil
changes. You can make best use of these long oil
change intervals by using multigrade oils since
these are largely independent of seasonal fluctua-
tions in temperature.
Complies with
approval1) Viscosity class2)
Porsche A40 SAE 0W - 403)
SAE 5W - 404)
SAE 5W - 504)
Maintenance, Car Care 211
If your vehicle is used frequently in stop-and-go
traffic in cold weather, the engine will not always
be properly warmed up.
Condensation from products of combustion may
accumulate in the oil. In this case, it is advisable
to change the oil more frequently so that your en-
gine once again has 100% efficient engine oil.
Engine oil performance class
Engine oil is not only a lubricant, but also serves
to keep the engine clean, to neutralize the dirt
which penetrates into the engine through combus-
tion and to protect the engine against corrosion.
To perform these functions, the oil is provided with
additives which have been specially developed for
these functions.
The efficiency of an oil is expressed, for example,
by the API, ILSAC or ACEA classifications.
Viscosity
Like all liquids, engine oil is viscous when cold,
and thin-bodied when warm. The viscosity of an oil
is expressed by its SAE class. For cold viscosity
(measured at temperatures below 32 °F/0 °C) the
SAE class is given as a number and the letter “W”
(as in winter), for hot viscosity (measured at
212 °F/100 °C) the SAE class is given only as a
number.
The viscosity of an oil is, therefore, always the
same if it has the same number of an SAE class.
Oils with two viscosities are called multigrade oils;
oils with only one viscosity are termed single-
grade oils.
Single-grade oils can not be used in your engine.
The viscosity of the engine oil for your Porsche
has to be chosen according to the ambient tem-
perature given in the engine oil recommendation
table.
212 Maintenance, Car Care
Brake Fluid Level
fPlease see the chapter “EXERCISE EXTREME
CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VEHICLE”
on Page 206.
fUse only new (unused) Original Porsche
brake fluid.
Warning!
Brake fluid is hazardous to your health, and
may be fatal if swallowed.
Brake fluid also attacks paintwork.
fKeep brake fluid out of children’s reach.
fTake care while topping off brake fluid not to
soil the luggage compartment or items of lug-
gage. Example: 911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S
Checking the brake fluid level
The reservoir for the hydraulic braking and clutch
systems is located in the luggage compartment.
1. Open and remove cover flap A.
2. Regularly check the brake-fluid level on the
transparent expansion tank through the
window B.
The fluid level should always lie between the
minimum and maximum marks.
A slight decrease in the fluid level due to wear and
automatic readjustment of the disc brakes is
normal.
If, however, the fluid level falls markedly or below
the minimum mark, the braking system may have
developed a leak.
fHave the brake system checked without delay
at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Maintenance, Car Care 213
Changing the brake fluid
Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air over
time. This accumulation of water lowers the boil-
ing point and, under certain operating conditions,
can affect the braking performance.
Therefore have the brake fluid changed in accord-
ance with the change intervals stated in the
brochure “Maintenance”.
The warning lights on the instrument panel and
on the on-board computer indicate an insuffi-
cient brake fluid level.
If the warning light lights up on the instrument
panel and the warning message appears on
the on-board computer in combination with a
larger pedal travel, a brake circuit may have
failed.
If the warning lights should light up when
driving:
fStop immediately in a suitable place.
fDo not continue driving.
Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
Warning light USA
Warning light Canada
214 Maintenance, Car Care
Fuel Economy
Fuel economy will vary depending on where,
when and how you drive, optional equipment
installed, and the general condition of your
car.
A car tuned to specifications and correctly
maintained, will help you to achieve optimal
fuel economy.
fHave your vehicle tuned to specifications.
Air cleaner should be dirt free to allow proper
engine “breathing”.
Battery should be fully charged.
Wheels should be properly aligned.
Tires should be inflated at correct pressure.
fAlways monitor your fuel consumption.
fDrive smoothly, avoid abrupt changes in speed
as much as possible.
fAvoid jack rabbit starts and sudden stops.
fDo not drive longer than necessary in the lower
gears. Shifting into a higher gear early without
lugging the engine will help save fuel.
fProlonged “warm up” idling wastes gas. Start
the vehicle just before you are ready to drive.
Accelerate slowly and smoothly.
fSwitch off the engine if stationary for longer
periods.
fAny additional weight carried in the vehicle re-
duces fuel economy. Always keep cargo to a
minimum and remove all unnecessary items.
fOrganize your trips to take in several errands
in one trip.
fAll electrical accessories contribute to in-
creased fuel consumption.
fOnly switch on the air conditioning when neces-
sary.
fDo not drive with the Roof Transport System
mounted unless you need it.
The EPA estimated mpg. is to be used for
comparison purposes, actual mileage may
be different from the estimated mpg.,
depending on your driving speed, weather
conditions and trip length. Your actual
highway mileage will probably be less than
the estimated mpg.
fPlease observe all local and national speed
limits.
Operating your Porsche in other
Countries
Government regulations in the United States and
Canada require that automobiles meet specific
emission regulations and safety standards. There-
fore, cars built for the U.S. and Canada differ from
vehicles sold in other countries.
If you plan to take your Porsche outside the conti-
nental limits of the United States or Canada, there
is the possibility that
unleaded fuel may not be available;
unleaded fuel may have a considerably lower
octane rating. Excessive engine knock and se-
rious damage to both engine and catalytic con-
verters could result;
service may be inadequate due to lack of prop-
er service facilities, tools or diagnostic equip-
ment;
replacement parts may not be available or very
difficult to get.
Porsche cannot be responsible for the
mechanical damage that could result
because of inadequate fuel, service or parts
availability.
If you purchased your Porsche abroad and want to
bring it back home, be sure to find out about ship-
ping and forwarding requirements, as well as cur-
rent import and customs regulations.
Maintenance, Car Care 215
Fuel
Warning!
Fuel is highly flammable and harmful to
health.
fFire, open flame and smoking are prohibited
when handling fuel.
fAvoid contact with skin or clothing.
fDo not inhale fuel vapors.
To prevent damage to the emission control
system and engine:
fNever drive the tank completely out of fuel.
fAvoid high cornering speeds after the warning
lights have come on.
fPlease see the chapter “FUEL ECONOMY” on
Page 214.
Please see the chapter “EMISSION CONTROL
SYSTEM” on Page 218.
Please see the chapter “LEVEL GAGE” on
Page 122.
Check engine warning light
If the warning lights in the instrument panel and on-
board computer come on and remain on while
driving, it suggests:
a potential engine control problem and the
need for system service or
an improperly fastened tank cap or
refueling with engine running.
Opening the filler flap
The filler opening is under the filler flap in the front
right fender.
fWith the vehicle unlocked, press on the front
part of the filler flap (arrow) to open the flap.
The filler flap is centrally locked along with the oth-
er locks.
If there is a defect in the automatic unlocking
system:
fOpen the passenger door.
fPull the ring in the right-hand door aperture
(arrow).
216 Maintenance, Car Care
Refueling
Fuel tank capacity is listed under “Capacities”.
Porsche does not recommend the use of fuel ad-
ditives.
Fuel is highly flammable and harmful to
health.
fPlease see the chapter “CAPACITIES” on
Page 290.
1. Important: Stop the engine and switch off the
ignition.
2. Slowly unscrew the tank cap.
Hang the tank cap's plastic strap on the hook
on the inside wall of the filler flap.
3. Insert fuel-hose nozzle fully into the filler neck
with the handle of the fuel-hose nozzle facing
down.
4. Do not add further fuel once the correctly op-
erated automatic fuel-hose nozzle has
switched off.
Fuel could spray or could run over in warm
temperatures.
5. Replace the tank cap immediately after
refueling and turn it until you hear it and feel it
engage.
If you lose the tank cap, you must replace it
only with an original part to reduce the
possibility of a fire in the event of a collision.
Caution!
Risk of damage. Decorative film may fade if
it comes into contact with fuel.
fWipe off any emerging fuel immediately.
Fuel Recommendations
Your Porsche is equipped with catalytic convert-
ers and must use UNLEADED FUEL ONLY.
Your engine is designed to provide optimum per-
formance and fuel economy using unleaded premi-
um fuel with an octane rating of 98 RON
(93 CLC or AKI). Porsche therefore recom-
mends the use of these fuels in your vehicle.
Porsche also recognizes that these fuels may not
always be available. Be assured that your vehicle
will operate properly on unleaded premium fuels
with octane numbers of at least 95 RON
(90 CLC or AKI), since the engine’s “Electronic
Oktane™ knock control” will adapt the ignition tim-
ing, if necessary.
It is important to observe the regular service inter-
vals, and particularly the oil change intervals,
specified in the “Maintenance” booklet.
The use of UNLEADED FUEL ONLY is critically
important to the life of the catalytic
converters. Deposits from leaded fuels will
ruin the converters and make it ineffective
as an emission control device.
Cars with catalytic converters have a smaller fuel
tank opening, and gas station pumps have smaller
nozzles. This will prevent accidental pumping of
leaded fuel into cars with catalytic converters.
Maintenance, Car Care 217
Unleaded fuels may not be available outside the
continental U.S. and Canada. Therefore, we rec-
ommend you do not take your car to areas or
countries where unleaded fuel may not be availa-
ble.
Octane ratings
Octane rating indicates a fuel’s ability to resist det-
onation. Therefore, buying the correct octane gas
is important to prevent engine “damage”.
The RON octane rating is based on the research
method. The CLC (U.S. Cost of Living Council oc-
tane rating) or AKI (antiknock index) octane rating
usually displayed on U.S. fuel pumps is calculated
as research octane number plus motor octane
number, divided by 2, that is written as:
The CLC or AKI octane rating is usually lower than
the RON rating:
For example: 95 RON equals 90 CLC or AKI
Fuels containing ethanol
Do not use any fuels containing more than 10 per-
cent ethanol by volume.
We recommend, however, to change to a different
fuel or station if any of the following problems oc-
cur with your vehicle:
Deterioration of driveability and performance.
Substantially reduced fuel economy.
Vapor lock and non-start problems, especially
at high altitude or at high temperature.
Engine malfunction or stalling.
Portable Fuel Containers
Danger!
Portable fuel containers, full or partially
empty, may leak causing an explosion, or re-
sult in fire in case of an accident.
fNever carry additional fuel in portable contain-
ers in your vehicle.
Fuel Evaporation Control
Fuel tank venting
The evaporation chamber and the carbon canister
prevent fuel from escaping to the atmosphere at
extreme high outside temperatures, when driving
abruptly around curves and when the car is parked
at an incline or in any other nonlevel position.
Vapor control system and storage
When the fuel tank is filled, vapors are collected in
the evaporation chamber by a vent line leading the
vapors to the carbon canister where they are
stored as long as the engine does not run.
Purge system
When the engine is running, the fuel vapors from
the canister will be mixed with fresh air from the
ambient air of the canister. This mixture will be
directed to the intake air housing by the tank vent
line, mixed with the intake air and burned during
normal combustion.
RON+MON
2R+M
2
or
218 Maintenance, Car Care
Emission Control System
In the interest of clean air
Pollution of our environment has become a prob-
lem that is of increasing concern to all of us. We
urge you to join us in our efforts for cleaner air in
controlling the pollutants emitted from the auto-
mobile.
Porsche has developed an emission control sys-
tem that controls or reduces those parts of the
emission that can be harmful to our environment.
Your Porsche is equipped with such a system.
Porsche warrants the Emission Control System in
your new car under the terms and conditions set
forth in the Warranty Booklet.
You, as the owner of the vehicle, have the
responsibility to provide regular maintenance serv-
ice for the vehicle and to keep a record of all main-
tenance work performed. To facilitate record
keeping, have the service performed by author-
ized Porsche dealers. They have Porsche trained
technicians and special tools to provide fast and
efficient service.
To assure efficient operation of the Emission
Control System:
fHave your vehicle maintained properly and in
accordance with the recommendations de-
scribed in your Maintenance Booklet.
Lack of proper maintenance, as well as im-
proper use of the vehicle, will impair the func-
tion of the emission control system and could
lead to damage.
fDo not alter or remove any component of the
emission control system.
fDo not alter or remove any device, such as
heat shields, switches, ignition wires, valves,
etc., which are designed to protect your vehi-
cle’s emission control system.
In addition to serious engine damage, this can
result in a fire if excess raw fuel reaches the
exhaust system.
fDo not continue to operate your vehicle if you
detect engine misfire or other unusual operat-
ing conditions.
Parking
Warning!
Danger of fire resulting in serious personal
injury or death.
fDo not park or operate the vehicle in areas
where the hot exhaust system may come in
contact with dry grass, brush, fuel spill or oth-
er flammable material.
fIf your car catches on fire for any reason, call
the fire department.
Do not endanger your life by attempting to put
out the fire.
Undercoating
Danger!
Danger of fire resulting in serious personal
injury or death.
fDo not apply additional undercoating or rust-
proofing on or near the exhaust manifold,
exhaust pipes, catalytic converters or heat
shields. During driving the substance used for
undercoating could overheat and ignite.
Maintenance, Car Care 219
How Emission Control Works
When an automobile engine is running, it uses en-
ergy generated through the combustion of a mix-
ture of air and fuel. Depending on whether a car is
driven fast or slowly or whether the engine is cold
or hot, some of the fuel (hydrocarbons) may not
be burned completely, but may be discharged into
the engine crankcase or exhaust system. Additon-
al hydrocarbons may enter the atmosphere
through evaporation of fuel from the fuel tank.
These hydrocarbons (HC), when released into the
air, contribute to undesirable pollution.
In addition, carbon monoxide (CO) and oxides of
nitrogen (NOx) contribute to engine emissions.
They, too, are formed during the combustion proc-
ess and discharged into the exhaust system.
To reduce these pollutants, your Porsche is
equipped with a precisely calibrated fuel injection
system to assure a finely balanced air/fuel mixture
under all operating conditions.
Oxygen sensor
The oxygen sensor, installed in the exhaust pipe
continuously senses the oxygen content of the
exhaust and signals the information to an electron-
ic control unit. The control unit corrects the air/
fuel ratio, so the engine always receives an accu-
rately metered air/fuel mixture.
Crankcase ventilation
Through crankcase ventilation, undesirable emis-
sions from the engine crankcase are not permit-
ted to reach the outside atmosphere. These emis-
sions are recirculated from the crankcase to the
air intake system. From here the emissions mix
with the intake air and are later burned in the en-
gine.
Catalytic converters
The catalytic converters are efficient “clean-up”
devices built into the exhaust system of the vehi-
cle. The catalytic converters burn the undesirable
pollutants in the exhaust gas before it is released
into the atmosphere.
The exclusive use of unleaded fuel is critical-
ly important for the life of the catalytic con-
verters. Therefore, only unleaded fuel must
be used.
The catalytic converters will be damaged by:
push or tow starting the vehicle
misfiring of the engine
turning off the ignition while the vehicle is mov-
ing or
driving until the fuel tank is completely empty
by other unusual operating conditions.
fDo not continue to operate your vehicle under
these conditions, since raw fuel might reach
the catalytic converters. This could result in
overheating of the converters. Federal law pro-
hibits use of leaded fuel in this car.
220 Maintenance, Car Care
Washer Fluid
Capacity: Approximately 6.3 quarts (6.0 liters).
Washer fluid
The reservoir, with a blue screw cap, is in the front
luggage compartment, to the rear left.
Clean water is generally not enough to clean the
windshield and headlights. Depending on the
season, mix the water with the appropriate
additives. Follow the instructions for the mixture
ratio.
Only use window cleaner concentrate which meets
the following requirements.
Dilutability 1:100
– Phosphate-free
Suitable for plastic headlight lenses.
We recommend window cleaner concentrates
approved by Porsche. Your authorized Porsche
dealer will be pleased to advise you.
Summer filling
Water + window cleaner concentrate at the mixing
ratio indicated on the container.
Winter filling
Water + antifreeze protection + window cleaner
concentrate at the mixing ratio indicated on the
container.
fPlease note all the information on the contain-
ers of the window cleaner concentrate or the
antifreeze protection.
Topping off washer fluid
1. Please note all the information on the refill con-
tainer of the cleaning agent.
2. Open cap of the washer-fluid reservoir (arrow).
3. Top up washer fluid and close cap properly.
fDo not use engine coolant anti-freeze or any
other solution that can damage the car’s paint,
in the washer reservoir.
If less than 0.53 quarts (0.5 liter) remains, a
warning message appears on the on-board
computer.
fAdd washer fluid.
Warning light
Maintenance, Car Care 221
Power Steering
Power steering is assisted by hydraulic auxiliary
forces.
The hydraulic fluid reservoir is located in the en-
gine compartment.
Note
The flow noise heard at full steering lock is design-
related and does not indicate a defect in the steer-
ing system.
Warning!
Risk of accident resulting in serious personal
injury or death.
When the engine is stopped (e.g. when being
towed) or the hydraulic system fails, there is
no assistance for steering.
Therefore, substantially more force will have
to be exerted in order to steer.
fExercise great care when being towed.
fHave the fault remedied at your nearest author-
ized Porsche dealer.
Checking hydraulic fluid
fPlease see the chapter “EXERCISE EXTREME
CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VEHICLE”
on Page 206.
fOnly use hydraulic fluid authorized by Porsche.
Specification:
Please see the chapter “CAPACITIES” on
Page 290.
Check the fluid level with the engine stopped and
cold (approximately 68 °F/20 °C).
1. Open the engine compartment lid.
2. Open the reservoir cap.
3. Wipe measuring rod.
Close cap and reopen. The fluid level should lie
between the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.
Add hydraulic fluid if necessary.
4. Close cap carefully.
Close engine compartment lid.
Noticeable loss of fluid indicates leakage in the
system.
The cause should be remedied immediately at an
authorized Porsche dealer.
222 Maintenance, Car Care
Air Filter
A dirty air filter not only reduces engine perform-
ance, but can lead to premature engine wear.
Regular filter replacement is part of the routine
maintenance service.
fIn dusty conditions, check the filter element
more frequently and replace if necessary.
Combination Filter
The fresh air passing through the combination fil-
ter into the passenger compartment is virtually
free of dust, pollen, and unpleasant odors.
fIf the outside air is polluted by exhaust fumes,
press the circulating-air button.
A dirty filter can be the cause of reduced air flow:
fHave filter replaced by your authorized
Porsche dealer.
Regular filter replacement is part of the routine
maintenance service.
Fluids/Oils for Manual
Transmission and Porsche
Doppelkupplung (PDK)
The transmission fluids/oils have to be checked
and changed at the intervals listed in your Mainte-
nance Schedule.
fPlease see the chapter “CAPACITIES” on
Page 290.
Do not tow the car or run the engine without fluid/
oil in the transmission. The transmission may be
damaged by even a tiny speck of dirt, only a clean
funnel or spout must be used when adding fluid/
oil.
We recommend that you have the fluids/oils
changed at your Porsche dealer, who has the re-
quired lubricants and the necessary filling equip-
ment.
fIf you suspect an oil leak in the transmission,
have your authorized Porsche dealer check it
out immediately.
Maintenance, Car Care 223
Wiper Blades
Wiper blades that are in perfect condition are vital
for a clear view.
fReplace the wiper blades twice per year (be-
fore and after the cold season) or whenever
wiper performance deteriorates.
Caution!
Risk of damage if the wiper arm accidentally
falls back on to the window.
fAlways hold the wiper arm securely when re-
placing the wiper blade.
Risk of damage if wiper blades that are fro-
zen in place are loosened improperly.
fThaw the wiper blades before loosening them.
Maintenance note
fPeriodically clean the wiper blades with win-
dow cleaner, especially after the vehicle has
been washed in a car wash.
We recommend the Porsche window cleaner. If
they are very dirty (e.g. with insect remains),
they can be cleaned with a sponge or cloth.
If the wiper blades rub or squeak, this can be as a
result of the following:
If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car
wash, wax residues may adhere to the wind-
shield. These wax residues can be removed
only by using window cleaner concentrate.
The wiper blades may be damaged or worn.
fReplace damaged or worn wiper blades as
soon as possible.
fPlease see the chapter “WASHER FLUID” on
Page 220.
fPlease contact your authorized Porsche dealer
for further information.
Changing windshield wiper blades
fPlease read the separate instructions for fitting
wiper blades as supplied by the manufacturer.
fWe recommend that you get your authorized
Porsche dealer to replace the wiper blades.
Caution!
Risk of damage.
If the wiper blades are not changed properly,
they can come loose when the car is moving.
fCheck that the wiper blades are seated
securely. The wiper blades must engage
properly in the wiper arm.
224 Maintenance, Car Care
Car Care Instructions
fPlease see the chapter “EXERCISE EXTREME
CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VEHICLE”
on Page 206.
Regular and correct care helps to maintain
the value of your car and is also a
precondition for the New Vehicle Warranty
and the Anti Corrosion Warranty.
Your authorized Porsche dealer has specially
developed car-care products from the
Porsche program available either singly or
as complete car-care sets. They will be
pleased to help you select suitable products.
Whether you use Porsche products or other
commercially available cleaning agents first
make sure of their correct application.
A Porsche that is well-cared for can look like new
for years. It all depends on the amount of care the
owner is willing to give the car.
Warning!
Risk of serious personal injury or damage to
the vehicle or property.
Cleaning agents may be hazardous to your
health.
Most chemical cleaners are concentrates
which require dilution. High concentrations
might cause problems ranging from irritation
to serious injury as well as damage to your
vehicle.
fKeep cleaning agents out of reach from chil-
dren.
fObserve all caution labels.
fAlways read directions on the container before
using any product. These directions may con-
tain information necessary to avoid personal
injury.
fDo not use fuel, kerosene, naphtha, nail polish
remover or other volatile cleaning fluids. They
may be toxic, flammable or hazardous in other
ways. Only use spot removing fluids in a well
vented area.
fDo not clean the underside of chassis, fend-
ers, wheel covers, etc., without protecting
your hands and arms as you may cut yourself
on sharp-edged metal parts.
Moisture and road salt on brakes may affect brak-
ing efficiency.
fTest the brakes after each vehicle washing.
Decorative film
Caution!
Risk of damage due to separation of the
decorative film when cleaning your vehicle
with high-pressure cleaning equipment or
steam cleaners.
fDo not use high-pressure cleaning equipment
or steam cleaners for cleaning decorative film.
High-pressure cleaning units, steam
cleaners
Warning!
High-pressure cleaning units or steam clean-
ers can damage the following components:
–tires,
logos, emblems,
painted surfaces,
– alternator,
ParkAssist sensors.
fPlease observe the operating instructions from
the unit manufacturer.
fWhen cleaning with a flat-jet nozzle or the like,
maintain a minimum distance of 20 inches (50
cm).
fNever use high-pressure cleaning units or
steam cleaners with a round-jet nozzle. A high-
pressure cleaning unit or steam cleaner with
round nozzle will damage your vehicle.
fThe tires are particularly susceptible to dam-
age.
fDo not point the cleaning jet directly at any of
the aforementioned components.
Maintenance, Car Care 225
Washing
The best method of protecting your car from the
damaging effects of the environment is frequent
washing and the application of a preservative. The
underside of your vehicle should also be thorough-
ly washed for cinders, salt or sanding at winter’s
end.
The longer salt, road dust and industrial dust,
dead insects, bird droppings or substances from
trees (resin, pollen) are allowed to remain on the
bodywork, the more serious is their harmful ef-
fect.
New cars should be washed carefully with plenty
of clear water to protect the new paint work. Dark
paint finishes show up the smallest of surface
damage (e.g., scratches) more readily than lighter
colors.
Dark colors are also more susceptible to scratch-
ing because of the composition of their pigments
and require particularly careful paint care.
fDo not wash your car in bright sunlight or while
the bodywork is still hot.
fWhen washing by hand, use abundant water, a
soft sponge or wash brush, and Porsche car
shampoo.
fBegin by spraying the body thoroughly with wa-
ter to rinse away loose dirt.
fAfter washing, rinse the car with plenty of wa-
ter and then dry with a chamois leather.
Do not use the same chamois leather for dry-
ing as you use for cleaning the windshield and
windows.
Warning!
Moisture which gets on to the brakes during
a car wash can reduce braking efficiency or
make the brakes pull unevenly which could
increase the danger of an accident, causing
serious personal injuries or death.
fAfter washing the car, test the brakes and
steering and briefly brake the discs dry.
When doing this, take care not to hamper other
road users behind you (traffic conditions per-
mitting).
Automatic car washes
fPlease see the chapter “WIPER BLADES” on
Page 223.
Optional add-on parts or parts which project be-
yond the contours of the vehicle may be damaged
by design features (e.g. brushes) of automatic car
washes.
The following parts are particularly
susceptible to damage:
Convertible top (hot wax treatment cannot be
used, as the wax attacks the convertible top
material)
Windshield wipers (always switch them off to
prevent them wiping unintentionally in intermit-
tent or sensor operation)
External antennas (always unscrew)
Roof Transport System (always remove com-
pletely)
Rear spoiler
Wheels (the wider the rim and the lower the tire
height, the greater the risk of damage)
High-gloss wheels (to prevent these from get-
ting scratched, do not clean with the wheel-
cleaning brushes of the car wash).
fPlease consult the operator before using auto-
matic car washes.
fWash and dry by hand all points not reached by
a car wash, such as door and lid seams or
door sills.
Note
Automatic car washes spray water at odd angles
and high pressures, which are not seen in normal
driving. Therefore, water can sometimes find its
way into the passengers compartment during or
shortly after the car wash.
226 Maintenance, Car Care
Convertible top
fNever remove snow and ice using a sharp
edged object.
Incorrect care and treatment can damage the con-
vertible top and cause leaks. Any repair work can
be done by your authorized Porsche dealer.
Important note
No folding top is 100% leak proof.
Due to the constant changing of loads and strains
to which a car is subject to when driving on roads,
minor wind noise and seepage at joints between
the top, body and doors on convertible tops can-
not be completely sealed in certain areas. There-
fore small leaks are considered normal for these
models. In addition, your convertible top should
not be washed in a car wash. The top may experi-
ence damage by the brushes or may experience
leaks due to the high pressure water streams di-
rected in areas which would not encounter water
in normal driving conditions.
Cleaning
Caution!
Risk of damage due to the cleaning jet of the
high-pressure cleaning equipment or hot wax
treatment.
fDo not clean the convertible top with high-
pressure cleaning equipment.
fDo not use the hot wax treatment.
Do not wash the convertible top each time the car
is washed.
It is usually sufficient to spray or wash it with clean
water.
fBrush dust off the convertible top in the direc-
tion of the weave using a soft brush.
fOnly if there is heavy dirt, wet the convertible
top with lukewarm water and the Porsche
Wash-Shampoo & convertible-top cleaner, us-
ing a sponge or soft brush, and rub gently.
Rinse Wash-Shampoo & convertible-top clean-
er thoroughly off the convertible top with clean
water.
fAfter washing it, treat the convertible-top cover
at least once a year with the special Porsche
convertible-top care product.
Do not allow the convertible-top care product
to come into contact with paint or windows. If
it does, remove immediately.
fIf there is leakage in the convertible-top cover
or at its seams or folds, the special Porsche
convertible-top care product can be used.
fPlease note the information on the container.
fRemove bird droppings immediately since the
acid in them will make the rubber swell and the
convertible top will become leaky.
fOpen convertible top only when it is completely
dry, otherwise damp stains and scrub marks
may occur which cannot be removed.
fTry to remove spots from the convertible-top
cover by rubbing carefully with a soft rubber
sponge.
Door lock
fTo prevent the door lock from freezing during
the cold season, the lock cylinder should be
covered during a wash.
fShould the lock freeze, use an ordinary de-icer.
In many cases, a well warmed key can help.
Never use excessive force.
Maintenance, Car Care 227
Paint
To protect the paint on your vehicle in the best
possible way against mechanical and chemical
damage, you should
preserve it regularly,
polish it if necessary,
remove spots and stains, and
repair damaged paintwork.
fDo not apply care products containing silicone
to the convertible top and windows.
General information
fNever rub a dusty vehicle with a dry cloth,
because the grains of dirt will damage the
paintwork.
fDo not treat matt-painted components with
preservatives or polishes, otherwise the matt
effect will be lost.
Preservation
The paint surface becomes dull over time due to
weathering.
fPreserve paint regularly.
fApply paint preservative after washing the
vehicle and polish it smooth to preserve the
paintwork.
This keeps the paint shiny and elastic. Dirt is
prevented from adhering to the paint surface and
industrial dust is prevented from penetrating the
paint.
Polishing
Do not resort to using Porsche polish until it be-
comes evident that the normal preservatives no
longer produce the desired finish.
Spots and stains
fRemove tar stains, grease, oil spots and dead
insects as soon as possible with Insect Remov-
er. They can cause discoloration if allowed to
remain on the paintwork.
fWash the affected area immediately after treat-
ing it.
Minor paint damage
fHave minor paint damage, such as scratches,
scores or chips caused by flying stones, re-
paired immediately by your authorized
Porsche dealer before corrosion sets in.
However, if there are already traces of corrosion,
they must first be removed carefully and thorough-
ly. Coat the area with a rust-proofing primer and
finish off with a top coat. The paint code and color
number are found on the data bank in the Mainte-
nance booklet.
fPlease see the chapter “VEHICLE DATA BANK”
on Page 284.
Engine compartment
The engine compartment and the surface of the
engine are treated with a corrosion-inhibitor at the
factory.
If degreasing solvents are used to clean the en-
gine compartment or the engine is washed down,
the process almost invariably removes the corro-
sion-inhibiting coating. It is then absolutely neces-
sary to have a durable preservative applied to all
surfaces, body seams, joints and assemblies in
the engine compartment. This also applies when
corrosion-inhibitor parts are replaced.
Caution!
Risk of damage to the alternator.
fDo not point the cleaning jet directly at the al-
ternator, or cover the alternator.
Effective rust-proofing is particularly important
during the cold weather season. If the vehicle is
driven frequently in areas where salt has been
spread on the roads, the engine compartment
should be cleaned thoroughly and subsequently
sealed after the cold weather season to prevent
salt from causing any lasting damage.
228 Maintenance, Car Care
Windows
The road dust which settles on the windshield and
windows contains particles of tire rubber and oil
residue. The interior trim and upholstery release
particles, particularly in strong sunlight, which col-
lect on the insides of the windows. These deposits
are augmented by impurities in the air which en-
ters the car through the fresh air vents.
fClean all windows regularly, inside and outside,
with Porsche window cleaner.
fIf you use a chamois leather for the windows,
do not use it for paintwork as it will otherwise
pick up a certain amount of preservative or
polish and could smear the windows and thus
impair vision.
fRemove dead insects with Porsche insect re-
mover.
Note
Door windows feature a water-repellent (hydro-
phobic) coating which prevents soiling of the
windows.
This coating is subject to natural wear and can be
renewed.
fConsult an authorized Porsche dealer.
Wiper blades
Wiper blades that are in perfect condition are vital
for a clear view.
fPlease see the chapter “WIPER BLADES” on
Page 223.
fReplace the wiper blades twice per year (be-
fore and after the cold season) or whenever
wiper performance deteriorates or the blades
are damaged.
fPeriodically clean the wiper blades with
Porsche window cleaner, especially after the
vehicle has been washed in a car wash.
If they are very dirty (e.g. with insect remains),
they can be cleaned with a sponge or cloth.
If the wiper blades rub or squeak, this can be as a
result of the following:
If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car
wash, residues may adhere to the windshield.
These wax residues can be removed only by
using window cleaner concentrate.
The wiper blades may be damaged or worn.
Replace damaged or worn wiper blades imme-
diately.
fPlease see the chapter “WASHER FLUID” on
Page 220.
fPlease contact your authorized Porsche dealer
for further information.
Undercoating
As it is not possible to exclude the risk of damage
to this protective coating in day to day driving, it
is advisable to have the underside of the car in-
spected at certain intervals – preferably before
the start of winter and again in spring – and the un-
dercoating restored as necessary.
Your authorized Porsche dealer is familiar with the
bodyseal treatment procedures and has the nec-
essary equipment for applying factory approved
materials. We recommend that you entrust them
with such work and inspections.
Unlike conventional spray oils, undercoating and
rust-proofing compounds based on bitumen or
wax do not attack the sound-proofing materials ap-
plied at the factory.
Warning!
Danger of fire resulting in serious personal
injury or death.
fDo not apply additional undercoating or rust-
proofing on or near the exhaust manifold, ex-
haust pipes, catalytic converters or heat
shields. During driving the substance used for
undercoating could overheat and ignite.
fBefore applying fresh underseal, carefully re-
move any deposits of dirt and grease. Once it
has dried, the new undercoating compound
forms a tough protective coating which pro-
vides efficient rust-proofing of the floor panels
and components.
Maintenance, Car Care 229
fAlways apply a fresh coating of suitable pre-
servative to unprotected areas after cleaning
the underside of the body, the transmission,
the engine or carrying out repairs to under-
body, engine or transmission components.
Effective rust-proofing is particularly important
during the cold weather season. If your car is driv-
en frequently in areas where salt has been spread
on the roads, the whole engine compartment
should be cleaned thoroughly after the winter to
prevent salt from causing any lasting damage. A
full under-body wash should also be performed at
the same time.
Stainless steel exhaust tailpipes
Stainless steel exhaust tailpipes can discolor due
to soiling, strong heat, and combustion residues.
The original polish can be achieved again using
commercially available metal polishing paste or
metal polish.
Light alloy wheels
fPlease see the chapter “WASHING” on
Page 225.
Warning!
Danger of accident resulting in serious per-
sonal injury or death if cleaning agents (e.g.
wheel cleaning agents) come into contact
with the brake discs.
The resulting film on the brake discs can im-
pair braking performance.
fMake sure that no cleaning agent comes into
contact with the brake discs.
fIf cleaning agent has come into contact with
the brake discs, thoroughly clean the brake
discs with a strong jet of water.
fPaying attention to any road users behind you,
dry the brake discs by applying the brakes at
short intervals.
Metal particles (such as brass or copper in brake
dust) must not remain too long on alloy wheels.
Contact corrosion can cause pitting.
Cleaners with an oxide-removing effect or the
wrong pH value, as are commonly used for other
metals, as well as mechanical tools and products,
will damage the oxide layer and are therefore
unsuitable.
fUse only cleaners for alloy wheels
(pH value 9.5). Products with the wrong
pH value can destroy the protective layer
on the wheels.
We recommend Porsche cleaner for alloy rims.
fIf possible, wash the wheels every two weeks
with a sponge or washing brush. If the wheels
are exposed to road salt, grit or industrial dust,
weekly cleaning is necessary.
Door, roof, lid and window seals
Caution!
The lubricant coating on the inner door
seals, convertible top and hardtop seals may
be damaged by unsuitable cleaning and care
agents.
fDo not use any chemical cleaning agents or
solvents.
fDo not use any preservative agents.
fWash dirt (e.g. abrasion, dust, road salt and
grit) from all seals regularly using warm soapy
water.
fIf there is a risk of frost, protect the outer door
seals and lid seals against freezing into place
with a suitable care product.
Headlights, lights, interior and exterior
plastic parts, adhesive films
Use only clean water and a little dishwashing
detergent to clean light lenses, plastic headlight
lenses, plastic parts and surfaces.
Do not clean when dry.
Use a soft sponge or a soft, lint-free cloth. Gently
wipe the surface without applying too much
pressure.
An interior window cleaner can also be used to
clean plastic surfaces (always read the cleaning
instructions on the container). We recommend
Porsche interior window cleaner.
230 Maintenance, Car Care
fGently wipe the surface without applying too
much pressure.
fDo not clean when dry.
fNever use other chemical cleaners or
solvents.
fRinse cleaned surfaces with clear water.
Leather
Characteristics and special features
The natural surface markings of leather, e.g.
creases, healed scars, insect sting marks, struc-
tural differences and slight variations in shade and
grain add to the attractiveness of the natural leath-
er product.
Observe the following care instructions:
Caution!
The leather will be damaged by the use of
unsuitable cleaning and care agents and by
incorrect treatment.
fDo not use caustic cleaners or hard cleaning
aids.
fPerforated leather must under no
circumstances get wet on its reverse side.
fClean all types of leather regularly to remove
fine dust using a soft, damp, white woollen
cloth or a commercially available microfibre
cloth.
fRemove heavy contamination with a leather
cleaner.
Always read the instructions for use given on
the containers.
We recommend Porsche leather cleaner.
Treat cleaned leather only with a leather care pro-
duct.
We recommend the Porsche leather care product.
Cleaning airbags covers
Danger!
There is a danger of serious personal injury
or death if the airbag system is impaired by
improper cleaning work.
fDo not make any modifications whatsoever on
individual components such as the padded
covers of the steering wheel, passenger side
instrument panel, the front seats and the door
linings.
fLet your authorized Porsche dealer clean
these components.
Carpets and floor-mats
fUse only a vacuum cleaner or a medium stiff
brush.
fRemove stains and spots with Porsche stain
remover.
To protect carpets, the Porsche range of accesso-
ries includes mats of the correct size and with the
appropriate fastening.
Warning!
Risk of an accident resulting in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
fAlways check the movement of the pedals be-
fore driving and make sure that they are not ob-
structed by a floor-mat or any other object.
fSecure the floor-mat to prevent it from sliding
into positions that could interfere with the safe
operation of your vehicle - do not install them
loosely in the vehicle.
Your Porsche dealer will be glad to offer you
nonskid floor-mats of the correct size.
Cleaning fabric linings
fFabric linings on pillars, convertible top liner
and sun blinds, etc. must be cleaned only
using suitable cleaning agents or a suitable dry
foam and a soft brush.
Maintenance, Car Care 231
Alcantara
fDo not use a leather care product to clean
Alcantara.
For regular care it is sufficient to clean the cover
with a soft brush.
Heavy abrasion or rubbing when cleaning causes
a lasting change in the surface.
Cleaning when lightly soiled
fWet a soft cloth with water or a neutral soap
solution and wipe off the dirt.
Cleaning when heavily soiled
fWet a soft cloth with lukewarm water or
thinned white spirit and dab the dirt from the
outside in.
Cleaning Safety belts
fUse mild detergent to clean soiled belts.
fWhen drying, avoid direct sunlight.
fOnly use suitable cleaning agents.
fDo not tint or bleach the belts.
The belt fabric could be weakened, thus affec-
ting safety.
Storing your Porsche
If you intend to store your Porsche for a prolonged
period, please consult your authorized Porsche
dealer. The staff will be glad to advise you on the
most suitable and necessary methods.
fClean your vehicle thoroughly inside and out-
side.
Clean the engine compartment.
The under carriage and chassis components
should be free of dirt and salt deposits.
fFill up the fuel tank.
fChange the oil and oil filter, and run the engine
for several minutes.
fIncrease the tire pressure to 50 psi (3.5 bar).
It is not recommended to lift the vehicle, due to
the possibility of corrosion on shock absorber
piston shafts.
The vehicle should be moved slightly, approxi-
mately every four weeks, to prevent flat spot
on the tires.
Climate control
The air conditioning system should be in good
working condition and fully charged.
Windshield/Headlight washer
fCheck and correct antifreeze/cleaning solution
level as necessary.
Electrical system
fRemove the battery from the vehicle and store
it in a cool dry place, not on a cement floor.
When the battery is disconnected, the
alarm system is deactivated.
fRecharge the battery every 3 months. If the
battery remains in the vehicle with the cables
connected, it is necessary to check, remove
and recharge the battery every 2-3 weeks.
Do not fast charge the battery.
fPlease see the chapter “BATTERY” on
Page 261.
Vehicle interior
The interior must be dry, especially in the area of
the floor carpets. The use of drying agents (Silica-
Gel) is recommended in vehicles with leather inte-
rior and in areas with high humidity. The recom-
mended amount is 3 fabric bags of 1.1 lbs.
(500 grams) each placed on the floor carpets.
Windows, doors and lids must be closed. The air
vents should be opened.
232 Maintenance, Car Care
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 233
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Exercise Extreme Caution when Working
on your Vehicle ......................................... 234
Tires/Wheels ............................................ 235
Loading Information................................... 246
Wheel Bolts .............................................. 248
Changing a wheel...................................... 249
Flat Tire.................................................... 251
Lifting the Vehicle with a Lifting Platform or
Garage Lift ............................................... 254
Spacers 911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S ......... 255
Electrical System ...................................... 257
Battery..................................................... 261
Replacing the remote-control battery .......... 266
Emergency Starting with Jumper Cables ..... 267
Bulb chart................................................. 269
Lights, Replacing Bulbs.............................. 269
Headlights................................................ 270
Number Plate Light.................................... 277
Changing Light-Emitting Diodes and
Long-Life Bulbs ......................................... 277
Adjusting Headlights.................................. 278
Towing ..................................................... 280
234 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Exercise Extreme Caution when
Working on your Vehicle
Danger!
Ignoring the following instructions may
cause serious personal injury or death.
fThe engine compartment of any motor vehicle
is a potentially hazardous area. If you are not
fully familiar with proper repair procedures, do
not attempt the adjustments described on the
following pages.
This caution also applies to the entire vehicle.
fOnly work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well
ventilated area.
fEnsure that there are no open flames in the
area of your vehicle at any time when fuel
fumes might be present. Be especially cau-
tious of such devices such as hot water heat-
ers which ignite a flame intermittently.
fBefore working on any part in the engine com-
partment, turn the engine off and let it cool
down sufficiently. Hot engine compartment
components can burn skin on contact.
fBe alert and cautious around engine at all
times while the engine is running.
If work has to be performed with the engine
running, always set the parking brake, and
make sure the shift lever is in neutral position
or the PDK selector lever in position P or N.
fIn particular, be very careful to ensure that
items of clothing (ties, shirt, sleeves etc.), jew-
elry, long hair, hand or fingers cannot get
caught in the engine-compartment blower, fan,
belts or other moving parts.
The radiator and radiator fans are in the front
of the car.
The engine-compartment blower is mounted
on the engine-compartment lid.
The engine-compartment blower can start or
continue running as a function of temperature,
even with the engine switched off.
Carry out work in these areas only with the en-
gine off, the ignition switched off, and exercise
extreme caution.
fYour Porsche is equipped with an electronic ig-
nition system. When the ignition is on, high volt-
age is present in all wires connected with the
ignition system; therefore, exercise extreme
caution when working on any part of the engine
while the ignition is on or the engine is running.
fAlways support your car with safety stands if it
is necessary to work under the car.
Jacks are not suitable for this kind of work.
fWhen working under the car without safety
stands but with the wheels on the ground,
make sure the car is on level ground, the
wheels are blocked, and that the engine
cannot be started.
Remove the ignition key.
fDo not smoke or allow an open flame around
the battery or fuel.
Keep a fire extinguisher in close reach.
fIncomplete or improper servicing may cause
problems in the operation of the car. If in doubt
about any servicing, have it done by your au-
thorized Porsche dealer.
Improper maintenance during the warranty pe-
riod may affect your Porsche warranty cover-
age.
fSupplies of fluids, e.g. engine oil, brake fluid or
coolant, are hazardous to your health.
Keep these fluids out of children’s reach and
dispose of them in accordance with the appro-
priate regulations.
fSome countries require additional tools and
special spare parts to be carried.
Please make enquiries before driving abroad.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 235
Tires/Wheels
The original equipment tires and wheel rims on
your Porsche comply with all applicable Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
For your safety remember the following:
Wheel rims and wheel bolts are matched to fit
your Porsche.
If you intend to use other than original equip-
ment wheels, be sure that they conform to
Porsche specifications for your model.
Only tires with the same make and with the
same specification code (e.g. “N0”, “N1”...)
can be mounted.
The use of wheel rims and wheel bolts that do
not meet specifications of the original factory
installed equipment will affect the safe opera-
tion of your vehicle.
Before you plan on exchanging wheels, or
snow tires already mounted on the wheel rims,
consult your authorized Porsche dealer. Your
dealer has the technical information necessary
to advise you which wheel rims and wheel bolts
are compatible with the original factory instal-
lations.
Danger!
Risk of loss of control and serious personal
injury or death.
fIf while driving, your vehicle experiences a sud-
den vibration or ride disturbance, and/or you
suspect that possible damage to your tires or
vehicle has occurred, you should immediately
reduce your speed without excessive use of
the brakes.
fStop the vehicle as soon as possible, and in-
spect the tires.
If you cannot determine the cause for the dis-
turbance, have your vehicle towed to the near-
est Porsche or tire dealer to have your vehicle
or tire(s) inspected.
fContinuing to operate the vehicle without cor-
rection could result in a loss of control and
serious personal injury. Example
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and max-
imum section width.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal
Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specific govern-
ment test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
236 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
and a half (1-1/2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to var-
iations in driving habits, service practices and dif-
ferences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C and they represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under con-
trolled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
Warning!
The traction grade assigned to this is based on
braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and does
not include cornering (turned) traction, accelera-
tion, hydroplaning or peak traction characteris-
tics.
Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire’s resistance to the gener-
ation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperatures can cause the mate-
rial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of perform-
ance which all passenger car tires must meet un-
der the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of per-
formance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning!
The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not overload-
ed.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure, result-
ing in serious personal injury or death.
Tire pressures
Warning!
Incorrect tire pressure causes increased tire
wear and adversely affects road handling.
This could lead to tire failure, resulting in loss
of control, leading to serious personal injury
or death.
fAlways use an accurate tire pressure gage
when checking inflation pressures.
fDo not exceed the maximum tire pressure list-
ed on the tire sidewall.
Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE PLA-
TE” on Page 285.
fCold tire inflation pressure means: all tires
must be cold, ambient temperature maximum
(68 °F/20 °C), when adjusting the inflation
pressure.
Avoid sunlight striking the tires before measur-
ing cold pressures, since the pressures would
rise from temperature influence.
fValve caps protect the valve from dust and dirt,
and thus from leakage.
Always screw caps tightly down.
Replace missing caps immediately.
fUse only plastic valve caps.
fDo not use commercially available sealant or
tire inflating bottles. Only use Porsche
approved tire sealant.
fPlease see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURES FOR
COLD TIRES (68 °F / 20 °C)” on Page 289.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 237
Each tire, should be checked every 2 weeks when
cold (68 °F/20 °C) and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended in this Owner's Manual or
on the tire-pressure plate.
If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated in this Owner's Manual or on the tire-
pressure plate, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring (TPM)
that illuminates a low tire pressure message when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-in-
flated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
message illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly un-
der-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduc-
es fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPM is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s re-
sponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trig-
ger illumination of the TPM low tire pressure mes-
sage.
fOn vehicles with tire pressure monitoring:
Please see the chapter “TPM TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING” on Page 143.
When tires are warm, the tire pressure is
increased.
fNever let air out of hot tires.
This could cause the tire pressure to fall below
the prescribed value.
Insufficient tire filling pressure can cause tires to
overheat and thus be damaged – even invisibly.
Hidden tire damage is not eliminated by subse-
quently correcting the tire pressure.
Overloading
Danger!
Risk of damage to vehicle parts, loss of con-
trol and serious personal injury or death.
fDo not overload your vehicle. Be careful about
the roof load.
fIf loading the vehicle also correct the tire pres-
sure. Tire pressure for loaded vehicle can be
found on the tire pressure plate and in the
chapter technical data.
fNever exceed the specified axle load.
Overloading can shorten the service life of the
tires and car, as well as lead to dangerous ve-
hicle reactions and long braking distances.
Damage due to overloading is not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
fPlease see the chapter “LOADING INFORMA-
TION” on Page 246.
fPlease see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURES FOR
COLD TIRES (68 °F / 20 °C)” on Page 289.
Example of a tire pressure plate
Tire pressure plate
Information on the tire pressure plate
A Seating capacity
Maximum number of vehicle occupants, inclu-
ding the driver.
238 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
B Vehicle load limit
Is the maximum total weight limit specified of
the load (passengers and cargo) for the vehi-
cle. This is the maximum weight of passengers
and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle.
Please see the chapter “LOADING INFORMA-
TION” on Page 246.
C Tire size for the front axle
Check with your authorized Porsche dealer
about the current release status.
D Recommended tire pressure for the front axle
These values are for cold tires (68 °F/20 °C).
E Tire size for the rear axle
Check with your authorized Porsche dealer
about the current release status.
F Recommended tire pressure for the rear axle.
These values are for cold tires (68 °F/20 °C).
G In vehicles with collapsible spare wheel:
Size and tire pressure of the spare wheel.
Tire traction
Warning!
When driving on wet or slushy roads, a
wedge of water may build up between the
tires and the road. This phenomenon is
known as “hydroplane” and may cause par-
tial or complete loss of traction, vehicle
control or stopping ability.
fReduce speed on wet surface to prevent this.
Tire life
Tire life depends on various factors, i. e., road
surfaces, traffic and weather conditions, driving
habits, type of tires and tire care.
fInspect your tires for wear and damage before
driving off. If you notice uneven or substantial
wear, wheels might need alignment or tires
should be balanced or replaced.
Tire wear
The original equipment tires on your Porsche have
built-in tire wear indicators. They are molded into
the bottom of the tread grooves and will appear as
approximately 1/2 in. (12 mm) bands when the
tire tread depth is down to 1/16 of an in.
(1.6 mm).
When the indicators appear in two or more adja-
cent grooves, it is time to replace the tires. We
recommend, however, that you do not let the tires
wear down to this extent.
Worn tires cannot grip the road surface properly
and are even less effective on wet roads.
Snow tires lose their traction capability when their
tread depth falls below 5/32 in. (4 mm).
In the United States, state laws may govern the
minimum tread depth permissible. Follow all such
laws.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 239
Danger!
Driving on worn tires can result in loss of con-
trol of the vehicle and could cause serious
personal injuries or death.
fDo not drive with worn tires or tires showing
cuts or bruises as they may lead to sudden
deflation and loss of control which could cause
severe personal injury.
fSpecialized high performance tires on high
performance sports cars exhibit more wear
than those on a family sedan, or even a high
performance sedan.
Therefore, it is important to check your tire
pressure and condition at least every two
weeks.
If you notice that tires are wearing unevenly, con-
sult your Porsche dealer.
Uneven wear may not always be due to improper
wheel alignment. It can be the result of individual
driving habits such as cornering at high speeds. If
the tire pressure is not checked and adjusted
regularly, abnormal tire wear can also occur.
Tire care
fAvoid damaging tires and wheel rims.
fIf you must drive over a curb or other obstacle,
drive slowly and at an obtuse angle.
fCheck tires for uneven wear and damage
before driving off.
fRemove imbedded material.
fReplace worn or damaged tires immediately.
fKeep oil, fuel, brake fluid, etc. away from tires.
fReplace missing valve stem caps.
fKeep tires inflated correctly.
fWash tires when washing the vehicle. Also
clean inner side of wheels.
fDo not use abrasive cleaners when washing
the wheels.
fCheck wheel rims for corrosion.
fRemove road salt, if driving in winter.
Tire damage, puncture
High-pressure cleaning units can damage the
tires.
fPlease see the chapter “HIGH-PRESSURE
CLEANING UNITS, STEAM CLEANERS” on
Page 224.
fCheck tires for imbedded material, cuts, punc-
tures, cracks and bulges (side wall) before driv-
ing off.
In case of tire damage, where it is uncertain wheth-
er there is a break in the ply with all its conse-
quences or tire damage caused by thermal or me-
chanical overloading due to loss of pressure or
any other prior damage, we recommend that the
tire be replaced for safety reasons.
If one faulty tire is replaced it should be noted that
the difference in tread depth on one axle must not
exceed 30%.
Handling inconsistencies may result.
fPerform a visual inspection if necessary.
240 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death.
Driving the vehicle with low tire pressure
increases risk of a tire failure and resulting
loss of control. Furthermore, low tire pres-
sure increases rate of wear of the affected
tires.
fCheck tires – including sidewalls – regularly for
foreign bodies, nicks, cuts, cracks and bulges.
fAfter driving off road, examine tires for signs
of damage such as cuts, tears, bulges or for-
eign objects stuck in the tread. Replace a dam-
aged tire if necessary.
fCross curb edges slowly and at right angles if
possible.
Avoid driving over steep or sharp curbs.
fIn cases of doubt, have the wheel (particularly
the inner side) checked by an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Tire replacements
If in doubt, contact your Porsche dealer.
Use only tire makes and types approved by
Porsche.
If you do not use a Porsche recommended
replacement tire, make sure that you
purchase your new tires from a reputable tire
dealer and that the dealer complies with all
manufacturers warnings for those tires.
Only tires with the same make and with the
same specification code (e.g. “N0”, “N1”...)
can be mounted.
Before mounting new tires, check with your
Porsche dealer about the current release
status.
Use tires with “ZR” quality standards. There
are currently no standards concerning tire
strength at speeds above 150 mph (240 km/h).
Tires should be replaced no less than on one axle
at the time.
Only tires of the same make and type must be
used. Mixed tires are not permissible.
Initially, new tires do not have their full traction.
You should therefore drive at moderate speeds
during the first 60 - 120 miles (100 - 200 km).
If new tires are installed only on one axle, a notice-
able change in handling occurs due to the different
tread depth of the other tires.
This happens especially if only rear tires are re-
placed. However, this condition disappears as the
new tires are broken in.
fPlease adjust your driving style accordingly.
Installation of new tires should only be done by a
qualified tire technician.
Valves
Rubber valve stems must be replaced every time
a tire is replaced.
For metal valves, the installation and replacement
instructions must be observed.
fUse only genuine Porsche metal valves.
fProtect the valve inserts against soiling with
valve caps.
Soiled valve inserts can cause a gradual loss
of air.
fUse only plastic valve caps.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 241
Parking at the curb
Warning!
Hard impacts against curbs (or traffic
islands) are dangerous and may cause hid-
den tire damage which is not noticeable until
later. Such damage can result in accidents at
high speeds causing serious personal injury
or death.
Depending on the force of impact, the edge
of the rim can also be damaged.
fIf you are in doubt, have the wheel checked by
an expert, particularly if you suspect damage
on the inside.
fIf you must drive over a curb or other obstacle,
drive slowly and at an obtuse angle. Exercise
care when parking along curbs.
Wheel alignment, wheel balancing
As a precaution, have wheels with summer tires
balanced in the spring, and those with mud and
snow tires before winter.
Unbalanced wheels may affect car handling and
tire life.
Only the specified weights may be used for wheel
balancing.
Self-adhesive weights must not come into contact
with cleaning agents, since they could drop off.
Uneven tread wear indicates wheel imbalance. In
this event, the vehicle should be checked at an au-
thorized Porsche dealer.
Warning!
If, during a trip, uneven running or vibrations
occur that could be caused by damage to
tires or the car, the speed must be reduced
immediately, but without braking sharply.
If you continue your trip without having the
cause of the fault remedied, you might lose
control of your vehicle which could cause se-
rious personal injury or death.
fStop the vehicle and check the tires.
fIf no cause for the fault can be found, drive
carefully to the nearest authorized Porsche
dealer.
Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitoring
(TPM) sensors
Before changing wheels, make sure that the
wheels are compatible with your vehicle's TPM.
fCheck this with your authorized Porsche
dealer.
Removing and storing tires
fAfter changing, adjust tire pressure and torque
wheel bolts diagonally to 94 ftlb (130 Nm).
Tires must always remain on the same side of
the vehicle.
When wheels are removed, the direction of
rotation and position of each wheel should be
marked.
Example
FR (front right), FL, RR and RL.
Wheels must always be fitted in accordance with
their marking.
The perception that tire durability and perform-
ance are immune to the effects of storage and
age is unfounded.
Chemical additives, which make the rubber elas-
tic, lose their effectiveness in the course of time
and the rubber becomes brittle and cracks.
Therefore, the tires should be inspected from
time to time.
242 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Note
Under no circumstances should tires older than 6
years be used on your Porsche.
The age of the tire can be obtained from the “DOT”
code number. If, for example, the last four num-
bers read 1208, then the tire was produced in the
12th week of 2008.
fStore tires in a cool and dry place.
Snow tires
For a better grip on snow and ice, use radial M+S
tires with studs.
Check with your local Motor Vehicle Bureau for
possible restrictions.
Danger!
Risk of loss of control and damage to the
vehicle as well as serious personal injury or
death.
The standard tires profile and rubber mixture
are optimized for wet and dry driving condi-
tions, and may not prove favorable for snow
conditions.
fTherefore install M+S tires before driving in
such conditions.
Before mounting snow tires, consult with
your Porsche dealer. He has the technical
information necessary to advise you on
wheel and tire compatibility.
Snow tires should have the same load capacity as
original equipment tires and should be mounted on
all four wheels.
Snow tires with studs should be run at moderate
speeds when new in order to give the studs time
to settle.
Danger!
Tires with badly worn treads and studs are
very dangerous and could cause accidents
resulting in serious personal injuries or
death.
fMake sure they are replaced immediately.
fDo not drive a vehicle equipped with snow tires
at prolonged high speed.
Snow tires do not have the same degree of
traction on dry, wet or snowfree roads as a
normal tire.
Furthermore, snow tires wear rapidly under
these conditions.
Comply with all state and local laws
governing snow tire and tread depth
requirements.
Danger!
Risk of accident and serious personal injury
or death due to excessive speed.
fAlways check the maximum speed rating on
the tire sidewall on any tire on the vehicle.
fNever exceed the maximum speed rating of
the tires.
fFit winter tires to both axles well before the
cold season begins.
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased
to advise you.
Maintenance note
We recommend fitting snow tires on the vehicle at
temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C) since the driving
performance of summer tires is reduced at low
temperatures. Summer tires may be permanently
damaged at extremely low temperatures.
Winter tires lose their traction capability when their
tread depth falls below 5/32 in. (4 mm).
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 243
Snow chains
Caution!
Risk of damage to body, axle or brake com-
ponents.
fFit snow chains only to the rear wheels, and
only with the tire/rim combination listed in the
Technical Data.
To ensure adequate clearance between chain
and body, Porsche recommends only the use
of fine-link chains such as those approved by
Porsche.
fFollow instructions issued by the supplier of
the chains.
Different states and countries have varying statu-
tory requirements regarding maximum speed.
Check with local authorities for possible restric-
tions.
fRemove chains as soon as the roads are free
of ice and snow.
911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S
Fitting snow chains
The use of snow chains is not permitted when
5 mm spacers are mounted.
Caution!
Risk of damage to the wheel housings if the
5 mm spacers are not removed before fitting
snow chains.
fTo permit the fitting of snow chains, have the
5 mm spacers removed on all 4 wheels.
fTo fit/remove the spacers:
Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
fPlease see the chapter “SPACERS 911
CARRERA, 911 CARRERA S” on Page 255.
Tire designations
Due to new speed and load ratings for radial tires,
new designations have come into force for snow
tires for your Porsche.
The designation to be used for ZR tires is e.g.,
265/40 ZR 18 (Z = code letter for radial tires for
speeds above 150 mph / 240 km/h).
244 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Example of Inscription
Inscription on radial tire
ATire size
Example: P 295/30 ZR 19 100 Y
P - The tire is designed for Passenger vehicle.
This information is not included on all tires.
295 - Indication of tire width in mm
30 - Indication of tire height to tire width ratio
in percent
ZR - code letter for radial tires for speeds
above 150 mph / 240 km/h
There are currently no standards concerning
tire strength at speeds above 150 mph
(240 km/h).
R - Belt type code letter for radial
19 - Indication of rim diameter in inches
100 - Load capacity coefficient
Y - Speed code letter
XL (Extra Load) - Tire with increased load rat-
ing
B TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Example: DOT xx xx xxxx xxxx
–DOT
The DOT symbol indicates that the tires com-
ply with the requirements of the US Depart-
ment of Transportation and provides informa-
tion about:
first two-digit code means manufacturer’s iden-
tification mark.
second two-digit code means tire size.
third four-digit code means tire type code.
fourth four-digit code means date of manufac-
ture.
If, for example, the last four numbers read
0204, the tire was produced in the 2nd week
of 2004.
C Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers in the tread and sidewalls
and their material composition.
D Maximum permissible inflation pressure
The maximum permissible cold inflation pressure
to which a tire can be inflated.
fDo not exceed the permissible inflation
pressure.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 245
E Maximum Load rating
The maximum load in kilograms and pounds can
be carried by the tire. If you replace tires always
use a tire that has the same maximum load rating
as the factory installed tire.
FRadial
The identification indicates if the tire has radial
structure.
G Term of tubeless or tube tire
Identification for tubeless tires.
Speed code letter
The speed code letter indicates the maximum per-
missible speed for the tire.
This code letter is shown on the tire sidewall.
Tip on driving
Tires with a maximum speed rating that is lower
than the specified maximum vehicle speed may be
mounted only if they bear an M+S identification on
the tire sidewall.
fPlease note that in addition to the winter tires,
all-season and all-terrain tires are also subject
to speed limits and bear this identification.
Inscription on light alloy wheels
Maintenance note
fProtect the valve inserts against soiling with
valve caps.
Use only plastic valve caps.
Soiled valve inserts can cause a gradual loss
of air.
Note on operation
fThe rim width in inches A and the rim offset F
are visible from the outside.
The information is inscribed on the back of the
spokes near the tire valve.
A- Rim width in inches
B- Rim-flange contour code letter
C- Symbol for drop-center rim
D- Rim diameter in inches
E-Double hump
F- Rim offset in mm
T= up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H= up to 131 mph (210 km/h)
V= up to 150 mph (240 km/h)
W= up to 167 mph (270 km/h)
Y= up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
(Y) = up to 186 mph (300 km/h) as for
Y tires. Speeds of more than
300 km/h (186 mph) are also
possible at a maximum tire load
capacity of 85 % (confirmation from
tire manufacturer required for
speeds of more than 186 mph (300
km/h)).
246 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Loading Information
Definitions
The Curb weight - actual weight of your vehicle -
vehicle weight including standard and optional
equipment, fluids and emergency tools. This
weight does not include passengers and cargo.
The Gross Vehicle Weight is sum of the curb
weight and the weight of passengers and cargo
combined.
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maxi-
mum total weight of vehicle, passengers, luggage
and optional equipment.
The Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum
load limit for the front or the rear axle. This infor-
mation is located on the safety compliance sticker
located in the driver’s side door jamb.
For determining the compatibility of the tire and
vehicle load capabilities:
fPlease see the chapter “TECHNICAL DATA” on
Page 286.
The load capacity coefficient (e.g. “100”) is a min-
imum requirement.
The Gross Combined Weight Rating is the
maximum total weight rating of vehicle, passen-
gers and cargo.
The Vehicle Capacity Weight - Load Limit - is
the maximum total weight limit specified of the
load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This
is the maximum weight of passengers and cargo
that can be loaded into the vehicle. This informa-
tion can be found on the tire pressure plate.
The maximum loaded vehicle weight is the
sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle ca-
pacity weight and production options weight.
The load rating is the maximum load that a tire
is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure.
The maximum load rating is the load rating for
a tire at the maximum permissble inflation pres-
sure.
The cargo capacity is the permissible weight of
cargo, the substracted weight of passengers from
the load limit.
fNever exceed the permissible limits.
Danger!
Risk of loss of control, damage to the vehicle
and serious personal injury or death.
fNever exceed the specified axle loads.
Overloading can shorten the service life of the
tires and car, as well as lead to dangerous
vehicle reactions and long braking distances.
Damage due to overloading is not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 247
Example for determining the combined weight of
occupants and cargo
Vehicle Load Capacity
fThe combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed the weight shown on the
tire plate in the vehicle.
Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE PLA-
TE” on Page 285.
fNever exceed the number of passengers
shown on the tire pressure plate in the vehicle.
Determining the combined weight of
occupants and cargo:
fAdd the weight of all occupants and then add
the total luggage weight (figure).
Steps for determining correct load limit
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX
pounds" on your vehicle’s placard (depending
on the date of manufacture).
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your vehi-
cle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX
pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400
lbs. and there will be five - 150 lb passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 -
750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available car-
go and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
248 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Wheel Bolts
Danger!
Risk of wheel bolt breakage and wheel sepa-
ration, resulting in serious personal injury or
death.
fFollow all instructions concerning wheel bolts.
fAlways clean the wheel bolts before fitting.
fApply a thin coat of Optimoly TA (aluminum
paste) on the thread and between the bolt head
and movable spherical cap ring (arrows).
The bearing surface of the spherical cap
facing the wheel must not be greased.
fReplace damaged wheel bolts.
Only use the Original Porsche wheel bolts spe-
cially designed for this vehicle type.
Tightening torque
Tightening torque of wheel bolts:
96 ftlb./130 Nm
Wheel Securing Bolts
If the wheels have to be removed at the workshop,
please do not forget to hand over the wrench
socket for the wheel securing bolts along with the
car key.
The wrench socket for the wheel securing bolts is
in the tool box.
To loosen or tighten the wheel bolt with anti-theft
protection, a wrench socket with the appropriate
coding must be used between the wheel bolt and
the wheel-bolt spanner.
fWhen positioning the wrench socket, ensure
that it engages fully in the teeth of the wheel
bolt.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 249
Changing a wheel
Warning!
Risk of serious personal injury or death. The
car may slip off the jack.
fMake sure that no one is in the vehicle when
jacking up and changing a wheel.
fAlways place the car on stable supports if work
has to be carried out under the car.
Risk of damage to the brake discs of the
Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB).
fAlways screw in both assembly aids when
changing a wheel.
Note
The tools required for changing a wheel (e.g. jack,
wheel bolt wrench, assembly aids) are not sup-
plied with the car.
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to
advise you.
1. Apply the handbrake fully and engage 1st gear
or PDK selector-lever position P and remove
the ignition key.
2. Switch on the hazard warning lights if neces-
sary.
3. Secure the car against rolling away, e.g. by
means of wedges under the wheels on the op-
posite side.
This is particularly important on slopes.
4. Slightly slacken the wheel bolts of the wheel to
be changed.
5. Lift the car only at the specified jacking points.
6. Raise the car until the wheel lifts off the
ground.
Please see the chapter “LIFTING THE VEHICLE
WITH A LIFTING PLATFORM OR GARAGE LIFT”
on Page 254.
7. Remove 1 or 2 wheel bolts (see respective
illustration).
8. Screw in assembly aids instead of the wheel
bolts.
Screw in assembly aid for vehicles without Porsche
Ceramic Composite Brake
9. Remove the remaining wheel bolts.
Note on operation
fTo remove or mount the spacers:
Please see the chapter “SPACERS 911
CARRERA, 911 CARRERA S” on Page 255.
250 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Screw in two assembly aids for vehicles with Porsche
Ceramic Composite Brake
10.Take the wheel off and put a new wheel on.
Please see the chapter “WHEEL BOLTS” on
Page 248.
11.Insert wheel bolts and tighten by hand.
12.Remove assembly aids, screw in remaining
wheel bolts.
Initially tighten bolts only slightly in diagonally
opposite sequence so that the wheel
is centred.
13.Inflate the tire if necessary.
Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURES FOR
COLD TIRES (68 °F / 20 °C)” on Page 289.
14.Lower the car fully and remove the jack.
15.Tighten wheel bolts in diagonally opposite
sequence.
fImmediately after changing a wheel, use
a torque wrench to check the prescribed
tightening torque (96 ftlb./130 Nm).
Note on operation for vehicles with
Tire Pressure Monitoring
fOn vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring, the
settings on the on-board computer must be
updated after the wheel change.
fPlease see the chapter “TPM TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING” on Page 143.
Checking tire pressure with a
pressure gage
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.
2. Press the pressure gage onto the valve stem.
Note on operation
fDo not press too hard or force the valve stem
sideways, or air will escape.
If the sound of air escaping from the tire is
heard, reposition the pressure gage.
3. Read the tire pressure on the gage stem and
compare it to the permissble tire pressure.
This information can be found on the tire pres-
sure plate or in the chapter Technical Data.
Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURES FOR
COLD TIRES (68 °F / 20 °C)” on Page 289.
4. Remove the pressure gage.
fPlease see the chapter “TPM TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING” on Page 143.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 251
Flat Tire
Warning!
Failure to follow these instructions may result
in serious personal injury to you or to by-
standers.
fIf you have a flat tire, move a safe distance off
the road. Turn the emergency flasher on and
use other warning devices to alert other motor-
ists. Set the parking brake.
fDo not park your vehicle where it may contact
dry grass, brush or other flammable materials.
The hot parts of the exhaust system could set
such materials on fire, thereby causing both
property damage and serious personal injury
or death.
A tire sealant and compressor with pressure
tester are located in the luggage compartment.
fPlease observe the safety and operating in-
structions on the special sealant bottle with a
special Porsche part number and on the com-
pressor – these are essential.
Important note
Sealing the tire with the tire repair kit is only
an emergency repair. Even with the tire air-
tight, it may be used only for short journeys
in an emergency.
The maximum permitted speed is 50 mph
(80 km/h).
fDo not use commercially available sealant or
tire inflating bottles.
Use only the tire sealant located in the luggage
compartment.
Warning!
Risk of accident, resulting in serious
personal injury or death.
fHave tires replaced by a specialist workshop
as soon as possible.
fAvoid hard acceleration and high cornering
speeds.
252 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
A- Filler bottle
B- Filler hose
Tire sealant
The tire sealant can be used to seal small cuts,
especially in the tire tread.
Sealing the tire with the tire sealant is only an
emergency repair, so you can drive to the next
workshop. Even with the tire air-tight, it may be
used only for short journeys in an emergency.
The tire sealant and a compressor with pressure
tester can be found in the luggage compartment.
The tire sealant comprises:
A filler bottle
A sticker denoting the maximum permissible
speed for the driver’s field of vision
A filler hose
A valve turner and
A spare valve insert.
Danger!
Risk of accident, resulting in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
fUse the tire sealant only in the case of cuts or
punctures no larger than 0.15 in. (4 mm).
fNever use the tire sealant if the rim is dam-
aged.
Warning!
The sealant is highly flammable and harmful
to health.
fFire, naked flame and smoking are prohibited
when handling tire sealant.
fAvoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing due to
caustic chemical properties of the tire sealant.
fKeep tire sealant away from children.
fDo not inhale vapors, due to consequent harm
to personal health resulting in serious personal
injury or death.
In case of contact with the sealant:
fIf sealant gets on the skin or in the eyes,
thoroughly rinse the affected part of the body
off immediately.
fChange soiled clothing immediately.
fGet medical attention immediately in the event
of an allergic reaction.
fIf sealant was swallowed, thoroughly rinse out
the mouth without delay and drink plenty of
water.
Do not induce vomiting.
Get medical attention immediately.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 253
A- Filler bottle
B- Filler hose
C- Plug of the filler hose
D-Valve turner
E-Valve insert
F- Tire valve
Inserting sealant
1.Leave the object that caused the puncture in
the tire.
2.Remove sealant and the enclosed sticker from
the luggage compartment.
3.Adhere the sticker in the driver's field of vision.
4.Shake filler bottle A.
5.Screw filler hose B onto the filler bottle.
The filler bottle is now open.
6.Unscrew valve cap from tire valve F.
7.Remove valve insert E from the tire valve with
valve turner D.
Keep the valve insert in a clean and dry place.
8.Remove plug C of the filler hose B.
9.Push filler hose onto the tire valve.
10.Hold filler bottle higher than the level of the tire
valve and press it together forcefully until the
bottle is completely emptied into the tire.
11.Pull filler hose off the tire valve.
12.Twist the valve insert firmly into the tire valve
using the valve turner.
13.Connect the compressor to the cigarette light-
er and inflate the tire to the prescribed tire
pressure.
Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURES FOR
COLD TIRES (68 °F / 20 °C)” on Page 289.
14.Screw valve cap onto the tire valve.
15.Check the tire pressure after driving for around
10 minutes.
If the tire pressure is less than 22 psi (1.5 bar),
do not continue driving.
If a value of more than 22 psi (1.5 bar) is indi-
cated, correct the pressure to the prescribed
value.
16.Please consult your authorized Porsche
dealer.
Note on operation for vehicles with
Tire Pressure Monitoring
fOn vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring, the
settings on the on-board computer must be
updated after the wheel change.
Please see the chapter “TPM TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING” on Page 147.
Care Instructions
After drying, any sealant that emerges can be
peeled off like a film.
Warning!
Risk of accident, resulting in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
fHave the tire replaced by an authorized
Porsche dealer immediately.
fAvoid hard acceleration and high cornering
speeds.
fDo not exceed maximum speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
fPlease always observe the safety and opera-
ting instructions, which can be found in the
separate operating instructions for the sealant
and on the compressor.
254 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Lifting the Vehicle with a Lifting
Platform or Garage Lift
The car must be raised only at the illustrated jack-
ing points.
Caution!
Serious personal injury or death and/or seri-
ous damage to the engine or the vehicle may
occur, if you lift the vehicle improperly.
fNever lift the vehicle at any other place than
the jacking points.
fNever lift the vehicle by the engine, transmis-
sion or axles.
fDo not damage any sensitive components in
the vicinity of the jacking points.
Platform lift
Before the car is driven on to a lifting platform, it
must be ensured that there is enough space be-
tween the lifting platform and the vehicle.
Garage lift
A garage lift must be used only at the illustrated
jacking points.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 255
Spacers
911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S
fUse the spacers only together with wheels and
fastening parts approved by Porsche.
Before having spacers fitted, find out about the
current approval status.
Mounting an emergency spare wheel
If 5 mm spacers are mounted, these must not be
removed to mount an emergency spare wheel.
Fitting snow chains
The use of snow chains is not permitted when
5 mm spacers are mounted.
Caution!
Risk of damage to the wheel housings if the
5 mm spacers are not removed before fitting
snow chains.
fTo permit the fitting of snow chains, have the
5 mm spacers removed on all 4 wheels.
Note on operation
fTo fit/remove the spacers:
Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
fPlease see the chapter “CHANGING A WHEEL”
on Page 249.
Removing the spacers
1. Unscrew both countersunk screws (M6x16) on
the wheel hub.
2. Remove the spacer.
3. Fasten the brake disc with the short M6x12
countersunk screws, part No.:
900.269.047.09.
Tightening torque 7.5 ftlb. (10 Nm).
4. For wheel mounting without a spacer, 5 mm
shorter wheel bolts (part No.:
997.361.203.01) must be used.
Tightening torque: 96 ftlb. (130 Nm).
Mounting the spacers
256 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
1. Remove wheel.
2. Unscrew both countersunk screws (M6x12) on
the break disc.
3. Fasten the spacer with the long M6x16
countersunk screws.
Tightening torque 7.5 ftlb. (10 Nm).
4. Fit wheel. To do this use the longer wheel
bolts for fastening the wheels.
Tightening torque: 96 ftlb. (130 Nm).
fPlease see the chapter “CHANGING A WHEEL”
on Page 249.
Required scope of parts if the spacers are
removed
Short countersunk screws (M6x12)
Part No: 900.269.047.09
1 set short wheel bolts
Part No: 997.361.203.01
Short anti-theft protection
Part No: 996.361.057.01
fFor information on the spacers: Please see the
chapter “SPACERS 911 CARRERA, 911
CARRERA S” on Page 255.
Long wheel bolt
X = bolt length approx. 49 mm
Arrows = spherical cap ring
Wheel bolt identifying features
For identification purposes, the movable spherical
cap ring is galvanised in red on the long wheel
bolts.
The long wheel bolts must only be used together
with 5 mm spacers fitted.
The short wheel bolts are not marked in colour.
The short wheel bolts must only be used without
5 mm spacers fitted.
fTightening torque for both wheel bolts:
96 ftlb. (130 Nm).
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 257
Electrical System
In order to avoid damage and faults in electrical or
electronic systems, electrical accessories should
be installed at your authorized Porsche dealer.
fOnly use accessories authorized by Porsche.
Warning!
Risk of short circuit and fire, resulting in
serious personal injury or death.
Replacing fuses or relays with the engine
running or the ignition on could cause elec-
trical shock.
fDisconnect the negative terminal on the
battery during all work on the electrical
system.
Please see the chapter “BATTERY” on
Page 261.
Relays
Defective relays should be changed only by an
authorized workshop.
In storage tray between the front seats
Sockets
Electrical accessories should preferably be
connected to the 12 V sockets.
fPlease observe the maximum power
consumption.
Note on operation
The tire filling compressor must be connected to
the cigarette lighter.
In the passenger’s footwell
Note on operation
The sockets and thus the connected electrical
accessories function even if the ignition is
switched off or the ignition key is withdrawn.
If the engine is not running and the accessories
are switched on, the vehicle battery will be dis-
charged.
Do not operate additional accessories for more
than 5 minutes when engine is off. Continuing to
do so may drain the battery such that it may go
completely dead.
Maximum power consumption for both sock-
ets together: 70 W.
258 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Alarm system, central locking
The status of the central locking and alarm system
is not changed by disconnecting the battery.
When the battery is disconnected, the alarm
system ceases to function.
Central locking overload protection
If the central locking system is operated more
than ten times within a minute, further operation is
blocked for 30 seconds.
Load switch-off after 2 hours or 7 days
If the ignition key is removed, loads which are
switched on or are in standby mode (such as the
luggage compartment light, interior light) are
automatically switched off after approx. 2hours.
The Radio/PCM is automatically switched off after
approx. 10 minutes.
If the vehicle is not started or unlocked with the
remote control within 7days, the remote control
standby function is switched off (to save the
vehicle battery).
1. In this case, unlock the driver’s door with the
key at the door lock.
Leave the door closed in order to prevent the
alarm system from being triggered.
2. Press button 1 on the remote control.
The remote control is now activated again.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 259
Replacing fuses
In order to prevent damage to the electrical sys-
tem due to short circuits and overloads, the indi-
vidual circuits are protected by fuses.
The fuse box is located in the driver’s footwell.
A - Plastic gripper
B - Spare fuses
1. Switch off the load with the defective fuse.
2. Pull off plastic cover at the finger hole (arrow).
The fuse plan and instructions for
emergency unlocking of the luggage
compartment lid can be found on the inner
side of the cover.
3. Remove the corresponding fuse from its slot
using the plastic gripper A in order to check it.
A blown fuse can be identified by the melted
metal strip.
4. Replace only with fuses of the same rating.
We recommend using genuine Porsche fuses
for replacement.
Note
fIf a fuse blows repeatedly consult an author-
ized Porsche dealer.
fNever try to “repair” fuses: you may cause se-
rious damage to other parts of the electrical
system.
260 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Emergency unlocking of the luggage
compartment lid
If the battery is discharged, the luggage compart-
ment lid can be opened only with the aid of a donor
battery.
Note
The engine cannot be started with this method.
fPlease see the chapter “EMERGENCY
STARTING WITH JUMPER CABLES” on
Page 267.
Unlocking lid
1. Use the key to unlock the vehicle at the door
lock.
2. Remove the plastic cover from the fuse box.
3. Pull out positive terminal C (red) in the fuse box
using the plastic gripper A (yellow).
A - Plastic gripper (yellow)
C - Positive terminal (red)
4. Use a jumper cable to connect the positive
terminal of the donor battery to the positive
terminal C in the fuse box.
Note
If the vehicle was locked, the alarm horn will sound
when the negative cable is connected.
5. Use the black jumper cable to connect the
negative terminal of the donor battery to the
door arrester D.
6. Press button 2 on the remote control for
approx. 2 seconds to unlock the luggage
compartment lid.
The alarm system is switched off.
7. Disconnect the negative cable first, then the
positive cable.
8. Push positive terminal C into the fuse box and
push on the plastic fuse box cover.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 261
Battery
The battery is located in the luggage compart-
ment under a black plastic cover.
fPlease see the chapter “EMERGENCY OPERA-
TION – PULLING OUT THE IGNITION KEY” on
Page 76.
fPlease see the chapter “EMERGENCY UNLO-
CKING OF THE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LID”
on Page 260.
Warning!
Risk of short circuit, fire and damage to al-
ternerator and electronic control units, re-
sulting in serious personal injury or death.
fObserve all warning notes on the battery.
fDisconnect the negative terminal on the bat-
tery during all work on the electrical system.
fDo not lay tools or other metal objects on the
battery as they could cause a short circuit
across the battery terminal.
Hydrogen gas generated by the battery
could cause an explosion, resulting in
serious personal injury or death.
fDo not expose the battery to an open flame,
electrical spark or a lit cigarette.
fDo not wipe battery with a dry cloth.
Risk of serious personal injury or death and
damage to the fabric, metal or paint.
fWear eye protection.
fDo not allow battery acid to come in contact
with your skin, eyes, fabric or painted
surfaces.
fIf you get electrolyte, which is an acid, in your
eyes or on your skin, immediately rinse with
cold water for several minutes and call a doc-
tor.
fSpilled electrolyte must be rinsed off at once
with a solution of baking soda and water to
neutralize the acid.
Battery posts, terminals and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive harm.
fAlways protect your skin by washing thorough-
ly with soap and water.
Risk of explosion as a result of static charge,
resulting in serious personal injury or death.
fDo not wipe the battery with a dry cloth.
fEliminate potential electrostatic charge by
touching the vehicle before touching the bat-
tery.
Charge state
A well-charged battery prevents starting problems
and has a longer service life.
Traffic density, requirements regarding noise, ex-
haust gas and fuel consumption reduce the engine
speed and, hence, the alternator output.
However, the large number of electrical loads has
markedly increased the demand for electrical
power.
In order to avoid discharging the battery
unintentionally:
fSwitch off unnecessary electrical loads in city
traffic, on short trips or in a line or traffic.
fAlways remove the ignition key from the igni-
tion switch when leaving the car.
fAvoid frequent operation of the convertible top
and operation of the Porsche Communication
Management system when the engine is not
running.
fIn the cold season in particular or if the vehicle
is used primarily for short journeys, it may be
necessary to recharge the battery from time to
time.
262 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Battery care
fEnsure that battery is securely mounted.
fKeep terminals and connections clean and
properly tightened.
Corrosion can be prevented by coating the ter-
minals and connections with petroleum jelly or
silicone spray.
fEnsure that vent caps are securely tightened to
prevent spillage.
Checking the electrolyte fluid level
The acid level should be checked more frequently
by a qualified specialist workshop during the sum-
mer months and in predominantly warm countries.
Battery charging
Automotive batteries loose their efficiency when
not in use.
The charge available in your battery can be meas-
ured with a battery hydrometer.
We recommend that the battery voltage be tested
by your authorized Porsche dealer who has the ap-
propriate equipment.
If the car is not driven for prolonged periods, the
battery must be charged at least every 6 weeks.
A discharged battery allows rapid formation of sul-
fates, leading to premature deterioration of the
plates.
Warning!
Hydrogen gas generated by the battery
could cause an explosion, resulting in
serious personal injury or death.
fCharge battery in a well ventilated area.
fNever charge a frozen battery. It may explode
because of gas trapped in the ice. Allow a fro-
zen battery to thaw out first.
fIf you get electrolyte, which is an acid, in your
eyes or on your skin, immediately rinse with
cold water for several minutes and call a doc-
tor.
Slow battery charging
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to
advise you about a suitable charger.
1. Always observe the instructions of the charger
manufacturer.
Depending on the type of charger, the battery
may have to be disconnected.
In this case, always disconnect the negative
lead first, and then the positive lead – risk of
short circuit!
Reconnect the leads in reverse order.
2. Before charging, cold batteries must be
warmed up indoors.
3. Frozen batteries must be thawed out first
before being charged.
4. When charging, ensure that there is adequate
ventilation.
5. Connect the charger to the battery.
Only plug into the mains and switch the
charger on when it is connected up correctly.
6. Switch on the charger.
7. After charging, switch off the charger first and
then disconnect it.
fPlease see the chapter “PUTTING VEHICLE
INTO OPERATION” on Page 263.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 263
Winter operation
The capacity and ability of the battery to store
power decreases at low outside temperatures.
Moreover, the battery is more heavily loaded in
winter months, e.g. by the heated rear window,
more frequent use of additional lights, the fans
and the windshield wipers, etc.
fHave the battery checked before the start of
winter.
Maintenance note
Keep the battery well charged to prevent it
from freezing.
A discharged battery can freeze at 23 °F (--5 °C),
but a fully charged battery only freezes at -- 40 °F
(--40 °C).
A frozen battery must always be thawed before
connecting jump leads.
Replacing battery
The service life of the battery is subject to normal
wear; it depends greatly on care, climatic condi-
tions, and driving conditions (distances, loads).
fOnly use an original Porsche battery, with the
correct part number, as a replacement.
fPlease observe the disposal instructions for
batteries.
Putting vehicle into operation
After the battery is connected or after an exhaus-
tively discharged battery is charged, the multi-
functional PSM light lights up on the instrument
panel and a message appears on the on-board
computer to indicate a fault.
This fault can be remedied with a few simple
steps:
1. Start the engine.
2. With the vehicle stationary, perform a few
steering movements to the left and right and
then drive a short distance in a straight line
until the multifunctinal PSM light goes out and
the message on the on-board computer
disappears.
3. If the warnings do not disappear, then:
Drive carefully to the nearest authorized
Porsche dealer.
Have the fault remedied.
4. After the warnings disappear:
Stop the vehicle in a suitable place.
fPerform adaptation of the power windows:
Please see the chapter “STORING END
POSITION OF THE WINDOWS” on Page 26.
264 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Removing the battery
The required tool is in the tool kit.
The battery is located in the luggage compart-
ment under a black plastic lid.
Warning!
Risk of damage to alternator and electronic
control units.
fDo not disconnect the battery while the engine
is running.
This also applies to cars equipped with a bat-
tery main switch.
fNever drive the car with a disconnected bat-
tery.
Risk of caustic burns from escaping acid.
fKeep vent caps on to avoid spillage.
fDo not tilt the battery when removing and in-
stalling it.
1. Switch off engine and all electrical loads.
2. Open turn-locks A.
Remove plastic lid.
3. Pull off central vent hose C.
Danger!
Risk of short circuit and explosion, resulting
in serious personal injury or death.
fImportant: disconnect the negative () ground
wire first, and then the positive (+) cable.
4. Important: disconnect the negative () ground
wire first, and then the positive (+) cable -
danger of short circuit!
5. Unscrew fastening screw B.
6. Remove battery.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 265
Installing the battery
1. Put battery in and push it all the way to the
stop.
2. Screw in fastening screw B.
Danger!
Risk of short circuit and explosion, resulting
in serious personal injury or death.
fImportant: connect the positive (+) cable first,
and then the negative () ground wire.
3. Important: connect the positive (+) cable first,
and then the negative () ground wire -
danger of short circuit!
4. Push on central vent hose C. Fitting the plastic lid
1. Insert the two outer hooks of the plastic lid into
the eye mounts of the lid opening.
2. Lower the lid.
3. Using both hands, push the lid into the eye
mounts without using force (if too much force
is used, the hooks may jam and the panel will
warp).
Make sure that the lid is correctly seated.
4. Turn the turn-locks so that they point in
longitudinal direction.
5. Press the turn-locks down until they audibly
engage.
266 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Replacing the remote-control
battery
The battery should be changed when the range of
the radio remote control becomes smaller or
when the light-emitting diode no longer flashes
when the remote control is operated.
1. Using your finger nail or a small screwdriver,
carefully lift off the cover of the key grip
(arrow).
2. Replace the battery (paying attention to the
polarity).
Replacement battery – Lithium CR 2032,
3volts.
3. Replace the cover and press together firmly.
Please observe the disposal instructions for
batteries.
Note
fPlease dispose batteries in compliance with
any and all government regulations.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 267
Emergency Starting with Jumper
Cables
If the battery is discharged, e.g. in winter or after
the car has been parked for a long time, the bat-
tery of another car can be used for starting with
the help of jumper cables.
Make sure the voltage of both batteries is the
same. Both batteries must be 12 volt types.
The capacity (Ampere hours, Ah) of the booster
battery must not be substantially less than that of
the discharged battery.
The discharged battery must be correctly con-
nected to the vehicle’s electrical system.
fPlease see the chapter “BATTERY” on
Page 261.
fPlease see the chapter “EMERGENCY UNLO-
CKING OF THE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LID”
on Page 260.
Note
fDo not try to start the car by pushing or tow-
ing. Damage to the catalytic converters and
other components of the car may result.
Warning!
Risk of short circuit, damage and explosion,
resulting in serious personal injury or death.
fUse only jumper cables of adequate diameter
cross-section and fitted with completely insu-
lated alligator clips.
fFollow all warnings and instructions of the
jumper cable manufacturer.
fWhen connecting jumper cables, make sure
that they cannot get caught in any moving
parts in the engine compartment.
The jumper cables must be long enough so
that neither vehicles nor cables touch another.
fThe vehicles must not be in contact, otherwise
current might flow as soon as the positive ter-
minals are connected.
fThe cable clamps must not be allowed to con-
tact each other when one end of the jumper ca-
bles are connected to a battery.
fEnsure that tools or conductive jewelery (rings,
chains, watch straps) do not come into contact
with the positive jumper cable or the positive
battery post.
fImproper hook-up of jumper cables can ruin
the alternator.
Danger of caustic burns from escaping acid.
fDo not lean over the battery.
Danger of gas explosion.
fImproper use of booster battery to start a
vehicle may cause an explosion, resulting in
serious personal injury or death.
fKeep sources of ignition away from the bat-
tery, e.g. open flame, burning cigarettes or
sparking due to cable contact or welding work.
fA discharged battery can freeze even at 23 °F/
–5 °C.
Before connecting jumper cables, a frozen
battery must be thawed out.
268 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Connect jumper cables in the following
sequence:
Always observe the sequence below:
1. Connect the positive lead (red) to the
positive terminal of the discharged battery
first, then connect it to the positive terminal of
the donor battery.
2. First connect the negative cable (black) to
the negative terminal of the donor battery, then
connect it to a suitable grounding point on the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
This grounding point must lie as far as possible
from the battery.
For example, a solid metal part or the engine
block are suitable grounding points.
If no suitable grounding points are to be found
on either vehicle, the negative cable must
carefully be connected directly to the negative
terminal of the battery.
If a suitable grounding point is to be found only
on the donor vehicle, the negative cable must
first be connected to the terminal of the
discharged battery, then to the grounding point
of the donor vehicle.
3. Run the engine of the donor car at a higher
speed.
4. Start the engine.
An attempted start using jumper cables should
not last more than 15 seconds. Then allow a
waiting period of at least one minute.
fNote
Before disconnecting the jumper cables, elec-
trical loads such as the heated rear window
and the heating fan blower should be switched
on (the vehicle’s lights must not be switched
on). This reduces voltage peaks which may oc-
cur when disconnecting the jumper cables.
With the engine running, remove both jumper
cables in reverse order.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 269
Bulb chart
Type, rating
Low beam Philips, D2S 35W
Additional high beam without cornering light H11, 55W
Additional high beam with cornering light H7 LL, 55 W
Turn signal indicator light, side WY5W
License plate light C5W
Lights, Replacing Bulbs
Warning!
Risk of short circuit.
fAlways switch off the relevant consumer when
changing bulbs.
Risk of serious personal injury or death.
The Bi Xenon headlights are under high
voltage when installed.
fBe careful during all work in the area of the Bi
Xenon headlights.
Risk of damage. Bulbs of a higher wattage
can damage the lamp housing.
fOnly the bulbs shown in the chart may be used.
fNew bulbs must be clean and free from oil,
grease and fingerprints. Therefore, never
touch bulbs with your bare hands.
Use a cloth or soft paper while replacing bulbs.
270 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Headlights
Caution!
Risk of damage to headlights due to exces-
sive temperatures and abrasion.
fTo ensure optimum ventilation, do not cover
the gap between headlight and body
(e.g. “stone guards” or films).
fUse soapy water only to clean light lenses and
plastic headlight lenses.
In no case may chemical cleaners or other vol-
atile cleaning fluids be used.
fTo prevent scratches, do not rub with a dry or
merely moist cloth, tissue or insect sponges.
Removing headlights
1. Unscrew plastic nut A.
Detach the side carpeting.
2. Remove rubber plug B from the unlocking
opening.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 271
3. Place socket wrench (tool kit) on the unlocking
spindle.
The handle of the wrench should point horizon-
tally to the rear.
4. Turn socket wrench approx. 180° A. The
headlight is unlocked and pushed forward
slightly during this process.
5. Turn socket wrench back until it is pointing
vertically downward B and leave in position.
6. The headlight is now unlocked and can be
pulled forward out of the fender.
Installing
1. Insert headlight into the guide rails and push
fully into the fender.
2. Push headlight to the rear and at the same
time turn the socket wrench until it points
horizontally to the rear C.
The headlight locking device must perceptibly
and audibly engage.
3. Insert the rubber plug into the unlocking
opening and secure the carpet.
Check the function of all lights.
Low beam, high beam and additional high
beam
Opening the lid of the headlight housing
1. Unscrew the 4 screws A.
2. First lift release tab B, then push both release
tabs C upwards and take off lid.
272 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Changing bulb for low beam and high beam
(without cornering light)
1. Turn the plug counter-clockwise (bayonet lock)
and pull it off.
2. Disengage both fixing loops A.
3. Replace defective bulb B.
When doing so, ensure bulb is seated properly.
4. Engage both fixing loops A, push on plug and
turn right as far as the stop.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 273
Changing bulb for additional high beam
(without cornering light
1. Turn the bulb holder.
Turn it counter-clockwise on the left headlight
and clockwise on the right headlight.
Take bulb holder out of the headlight housing.
2. Pull both plug release tabs apart.
Pull plug out of the bulb holder.
3. Replace the defective bulb with bulb holder.
4. Reassemble in reverse order.
Closing lid of headlight housing
1. Push on lid until it perceptibly engages.
2. Fasten lid with the 4 screws.
274 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Changing bulb for low beam and high beam
(with cornering light)
1. Undo the 3 screws on the control unit and
remove the control unit.
2. Turn the plug counter-clockwise and pull it off. 3. Disengage both fixing clips.
4. Replace defective bulb.
When doing so, ensure bulb is seated properly.
5. Engage both fixing clips, push on plug and turn
right as far as the stop.
6. Fit control unit and screw tight.
7. Push on housing cover until it perceptibly
engages.
8. Fasten housing cover with the 4 screws.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 275
Changing bulb for additional high beam
(with cornering light)
1. Turn cover counter-clockwise and take off.
2. Pull off plug. 3. Disengage fixing clip.
4. Replace defective bulb.
5. Engage fixing clip, insert plug and close
housing cover.
276 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Changing bulb for side marker light
1. Remove the cap in the wheel housing liner with
a screwdriver.
2. Insert the screwdriver into the opening in the
wheel housing liner parallel to the turn signal
housing (in direction of travel).
By pressing with the screwdriver, disengage
the securing spring of the turn signal housing.
3. Swivel out the indicator light and undo bulb
holder (bayonet lock).
4. Remove the bulb from the holder and replace
it. Insert holder.
Check operation of the light.
5. Insert the turn signal’s retaining lugs A into the
side section at the front.
Push in turn signal until the securing spring B
is felt to engage.
6. Press the cap into the wheel housing liner.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 277
Number Plate Light
Changing bulb
1. Unscrew both screws A and take off the light
lens.
2. Remove defective bulb from between the
contact springs and replace.
3. Reassemble in reverse order.
Check operation of the light.
Changing Light-Emitting Diodes
and Long-Life Bulbs
The following lights are equipped with light-
emitting diodes (LEDs) or long-life bulbs and
cannot be replaced individually. Replacement also
involves a greater amount of installation work.
Side light, front,
Daytime driving lights,
Tail lights and
Additional brake lights
fHave the defective light replaced at an autho-
rized Porsche dealer.
278 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Adjusting Headlights
fPlease see the chapter “LIGHTS, REPLACING
BULBS” on Page 269.
Adjustment
The adjustment is made with the vehicle ready to
drive and the fuel tank completely filled.
The driver’s seat must be loaded by a person or a
165 lbs. (75 kg) weight and the tire pressures
must meet the prescribed values.
After being loaded, the car must be rolled a few
meters so that the suspension can settle.
For checking the headlight adjustment, the verti-
cal position of the cutoff of the lowbeam (see fig.)
has to be projected on a vertical screen (wall) in
distance of 24.6 ft. (7.5 m) from the front lens of
the headlamp.
The correct position of the cutoff is 2.0 in. (5 cm)
at 24.6 ft. or 7.5 m (0.4°) below a horizontal line,
x cm from ground to the center of the headlamp
lens.
Lateral adjustment of the headlights should be
carried out at a specialist workshop with an optical
adjustment unit.
Distance
Visual aim shall be performed at not less than
24.6 ft./7.5 m (this value is a rounded down con-
version from the 25-foot distance typical of field
aim using a screen). The 24.6 ft./7.5 m distance
is measured from the headlamp lens to the view-
ing screen.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 279
Floor
The surface upon which the vehicle rests is flat
and approximately level.
Screen
The screen upon which headlamp beams are pro-
jected is perpendicular to the floor and the vehi-
cle’s longitudinal axis, flat, uniformly light in color,
unobstructed, and wide and high enough to ac-
commodate the vehicle beam patterns to be
aimed.
The screen should be wide enough to provide at
least 3.3 ft. (1 m) of space outboard of the vehi-
cle’s headlamp spacing.
Adjustment screws
fDetach side carpeting in luggage compart-
ment.
Unscrew plastic nut A.
Open the cover of the appropriate adjustment
screw.
The setting is adjusted by turning the hexagon
socket screws right or left, as appropriate.
B - Headlight vertical adjustment
Vertical adjustment (screw B)
fturn clockwise = beam moves down
turn counter-clockwise = beam moves up
Note
fDo not alter the lateral adjustment.
280 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Towing
Certain state statutes and local ordinances prohib-
it towing with a chain, rope or even a tow bar.
In addition, damage to your vehicle may result
from improper procedures.
Consult your authorized Porsche dealer for de-
tails.
Vehicle towing
Flat bed towing is the preferred type of towing to
be used on Porsche vehicles.
Under certain circumstances, wheel lifts may be
used when the vehicle will not roll.
The vehicle must be towed with all four
wheels off the ground, otherwise damage to
the vehicle may result. PDK selector lever emergency release
In the event of an electronics failure, the selector
lever must be released for towing.
1. Lift up the rubber mat in the oddments tray.
2. Insert a screwdriver in the opening and press
down until you feel it reach the limit position.
The selector lever can now be moved to
position N.
Towing hook
The towing hook A is contained in the tool box in
the luggage compartment.
Caution!
Risk of damage to the vehicle.
fUse the towing hook only for an emergency to
remove the vehicle off the road. The towing
hook is to be used only to pull the vehicle onto
the flat bed, tractor or towing aparatus if the
vehicle will roll freely. Under no circumstances
is the vehicle to be secured using the towing
hook.
fNever use the towing hook to tow this or any
other vehicle.
fBear in mind the limited ground clearance of
your car on uneven surfaces.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service 281
Fitting towing hook
When fitting on the rear of the vehicle, the license
plate must be removed.
1. Press the lower edge of the appropriate
plastic cover into the bumper until the cover
disengages.
2. Pull cover out of the bumper and let it hang by
its thread.
3. Completely screw in the towing hook A.
Removing towing hook
1. Unscrew the towing hook A.
2. Insert plastic cover at the lower edge of the
opening.
3. Fold the cover up and press on its upper edge
to engage it in the bumper.
When removing on the rear of the vehicle, the
license plate must be mouted.
282 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Pulling vehicle onto flat bed
1. Position wooden ramps at the base of the flat
bed to reduce the angle of the pull.
2. Reel in the hoist cable and check the underside
of the vehicle for any interference.
Tieing down vehicle on flat bed
1. Carefully feed towing straps through the open-
ing in the rear wheels.
Make sure metal parts of straps do not dam-
age rim.
Make sure the strap is flat over the rim bead.
Make sure brake backing plate is not dam-
aged.
2. Secure straps to rear of flat bed.
3. Reel in hoist cable only far enough to tension
tie-down straps.
4. Carefully feed towing straps through the open-
ing in the front wheels.
Make sure metal parts of straps do not dam-
age rim.
Make sure the strap is flat over the rim bead.
Make sure brake backing plate is not dam-
aged.
5. Secure straps to front of flat bed.
6. Release tension on hoist cable, but do not dis-
connect.
Use hoist cable as a safety cable.
Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 283
Vehicle Identification, Technical Data
Vehicle Identification.................................. 284
Technical Data .......................................... 286
Diagrams ................................................. 299
284 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data
Vehicle Identification
When ordering spare parts or making inquiries,
please always quote the vehicle identification
number.
Vehicle data bank
The vehicle data bank is attached to the inside of
the “Maintenance” booklet.
It contains all important data about your vehicle.
Note
This data bank cannot be re-ordered if it is lost or
damaged.
This label contains the following information:
1. Vehicle Identification No.
2. Type/Type description
3. Engine code/Transmission code
4. Paint No./Interior
5. Optional equipment
Vehicle identification number
In accordance with Federal Safety Regulations,
the vehicle identification number of your car is lo-
cated at the bottom left of the windshield frame
and can be seen from the outside.
The vehicle identification number is in the luggage
compartment under the battery cover and at the
bottom left behind the windshield.
Removing the battery cover
fPlease see the chapter “BATTERY” on
Page 261.
Safety compliance sticker
The safety compliance sticker is your assurance
that your new Porsche complies with all applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards which
were in effect at the time the vehicle was manufac-
tured.
fThe sticker also shows the month and year of
production and the vehicle identification
number of your car (perforations) as well as
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating.
Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 285
Tire pressure plate
The tire pressure plate is attached to the left-hand
door aperture.
Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the underside
of the crankcase.
286 Technical Data
Technical Data
Engine data
911 Carrera, 911 Carrera 4,
911 Targa 4 911 Carrera S, 911 Carrera 4S,
911 Targa 4S 911 Carrera S, 911 Carrera 4S,
911 Targa 4S
Power kit Carrera
Type MA 102 MA 101 MA 101S
Horizontally opposed engine,
liquid cooled Horizontally opposed engine,
liquid cooled Horizontally opposed engine,
liquid cooled
Number of cylinders 6 6 6
Bore 3.82 in./97 mm 4.02 in./102 mm 4.02 in./102 mm
Stroke 3.21 in./81.5 mm 3.05 in./77.5 mm 3.05 in./77.5 mm
Cubic capacity 220.5 cu. in./3614 cm3 231.9 cu. in./3800 cm3231.9 cu. in./3800 cm3
Net-horsepower 345 hp/254 kW 385 hp/283 kW 408 hp/300 kW
at crankshaft speed 6500 rpm 6500 rpm 7300 rpm
Net torque 288 ft. lb./390 Nm 310 ft. lb./420 Nm 310 ft. lb./420 Nm
at crankshaft speed 4400 rpm 4400 rpm 4400 - 5800 rpm
Engine oil consumption up to 1.5 liters/1000 km
(1.6 quarts/622 miles) up to 1.5 liters/1000 km
(1.6 quarts/622 miles) up to 1.5 liters/1000 km
(1.6 quarts/622 miles)
Technical Data 287
Tires, Rims, Tracks 911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S
Tire Rim Rim offset Track
Summer tires* front 235/40 ZR 18 (91Y) 8 J x 18 H2 57 mm 58.5 in./1486 mm
rear 265/40 ZR 18 (101Y) XL 10.5 J x 18 H2 60 mm 60.4 in./1534 mm
or front 235/35 ZR 19 (87Y) 8 J x 19 H2 57 mm 58.5 in./1486 mm
rear 295/30 ZR 19 (100Y) XL 11 J x 19 H2 67 mm 59.7 in./1516 mm
or front 235/35 ZR 19 (87Y) 8.5 J x 19 H2 55 mm 58.5 in./1486 mm
rear 305/30 ZR 19 (102Y) XL 11.5 J x 19 H2 67 mm 59.7 in./1516 mm
Snow tires front 235/40 R 18 91V M+S 8 J x 18 H2 57 mm 58.5 in./1486 mm
rear 265/40 R 18 97V M+S** 10.5 J x 18 H2 60 mm 60.4 in./1534 mm
or front 235/35 R 19 87V M+S 8 J x 19 H2 57 mm 58.5 in./1486 mm
rear 295/30 R 19 100V XL M+S 11 J x 19 H2 67 mm 59.7 in./1516 mm
The load capacity coefficient (e.g. “91”) and maximum speed code letter (e.g. “Y”) are minimum requirements.
Snow chains Can be mounted only on the rear wheels; maximum speed 30 mph (50 km/h).
Use only Porsche authorized fine-link cross-type or edge chains.
Snow chain clearance can be guaranteed only on the tire + rim combination marked** without spacers.
Please see the chapter “SPACERS 911 CARRERA, 911 CARRERA S” on Page 255.
Tire and rim sizes Extensive tests are performed before specific tires and wheels are approved by Porsche. Your Porsche dealer has informa-
tion about approved tires and wheels and is happy to assist you.
If aftermarket tires and/or wheels are installed which are not approved by Porsche, the vehicle’s driveability, stability while
in motion and handling characteristics might be impaired. Since Porsche has no data on such combinations, Porsche cannot
stand behind the safety or durability of these aftermarket combinations.
* 911 Carrera S: Summer tires 19-inch only
288 Technical Data
Tires, Rims, Tracks 911 Carrera 4, 911 Carrera 4S, 911 Targa 4, 911 Targa 4S
Tire Rim Rim offset Track
Summer tires* front 235/40 ZR 18 (91Y) 8 J x 18 H2 57 mm 58.6 in./1488 mm
rear 295/35 ZR 18 (99Y) 11 J x 18 H2 51 mm 60.9 in./1548 mm
or front 235/35 ZR 19 (87Y) 8 J x 19 H2 57 mm 58.6 in./1488 mm
rear 305/30 ZR 19 (102Y) XL 11 J x 19 H2 51 mm 60.9 in./1548 mm
or front 235/35 ZR 19 (87Y) 8.5 J x 19 H2 55 mm 58.6 in./1488 mm
rear 305/30 ZR 19 (102Y) XL 11.5 J x 19 H2 50 mm 60.9 in./1548 mm
Snow tires front 235/40 R 18 91V M+S 8 J x 18 H2 57 mm 58.6 in./1488 mm
rear 295/35 R 18 99V M+S** 11 J x 18 H2 51 mm 60.9 in./1548 mm
or front 235/35 R 19 87V M+S 8 J x 19 H2 57 mm 58.6 in./1488 mm
rear 295/30 R 19 100V XL M+S** 11 J x 19 H2 51 mm 60.9 in./1548 mm
The load capacity coefficient (e.g. “91”) and maximum speed code letter (e.g. “Y”) are minimum requirements.
Snow chains Can be mounted only on the rear wheels; maximum speed 30 mph (50 km/h).
Use only Porsche authorized fine-link cross-type or edge chains.
Snow chain clearance can be guaranteed only on the tire + rim combination marked**.
Tire and rim sizes Extensive tests are performed before specific tires and wheels are approved by Porsche. Your Porsche dealer has information
about approved tires and wheels and is happy to assist you.
If aftermarket tires and/or wheels are installed which are not approved by Porsche, the vehicle’s driveability, stability while in
motion and handling characteristics might be impaired. Since Porsche has no data on such combinations, Porsche cannot stand
behind the safety or durability of these aftermarket combinations.
* 911 Carrera 4S, 911 Targa 4S: Summer tires 19-inch only
Technical Data 289
Danger!
Installation of sizes not authorized by
Porsche may have a dangerous effect on
the driving stability and could result in
serious personal injury or death.
fBefore mounting new tires, check with your
Porsche dealer about the current release status.
Tire Pressures for cold tires (68 °F / 20 °C)
Summer and snow tires 911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S
Summer and snow tires 911 Carrera 4, 911 Carrera 4S, 911 Targa 4, 911 Targa 4S
These tire filling pressures apply only to the tire makes and types approved by Porsche.
Please see the chapter “TIRES/WHEELS” on Page 235. Please see the chapter “TPM TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING” on Page 143.
partially loaded
(up to 2 persons without luggage) fully loaded
(as of 2 persons with luggage)
18 inch wheels front 34 psi (2.3 bar) 37 psi (2.5 bar)
rear 38 psi (2.6 bar) 44 psi (3.0 bar)
19 inch wheels front 34 psi (2.3 bar) 37 psi (2.5 bar)
rear 40 psi (2.7 bar) 44 psi (3.0 bar)
partially loaded
(up to 2 persons without luggage) fully loaded
(as of 2 persons with luggage)
18 inch wheels front 34 psi (2.3 bar) 37 psi (2.5 bar)
rear 37 psi (2.5 bar) 44 psi (3.0 bar)
19 inch wheels front 34 psi (2.3 bar) 37 psi (2.5 bar)
rear 37 psi (2.5 bar) 44 psi (3.0 bar)
290 Technical Data
Capacities
Use only fluids and fuels authorized by Porsche. Your authorized Porsche dealer will gladly advise you.
Your Porsche has been designed so that it is not necessary to mix any additives with oils or fuels.
Engine Oil change quantity with oil filter approx. 7.9 quarts / 7.5 liters
Please see the chapter “ENGINE OIL” on Page 208.
Coolant approx. 7.63 - 8.32 U.S. gallons / 28.9 - 31.5 liters
Manual transmission
and differential approx. 3.17 quarts / 3.0 liters transmission oil Mobilube PTX Formula A (SAE 75W-90) GL 4.5
Porsche Doppelkupplung
Wheel set approx. 3.12 quarts / 2.95 liters ATF transmission oil Mobilube PTX Formula A (SAE 75W-90) GL 4.5
Porsche Doppelkupplung
Clutch/hydraulic fluid approx. 5.49 quarts / 5.2 liters Pentosin Gear Oil FFL 3
Fuel tank 911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S: approx. 16.9 U.S. gallons / 64 liters
911 Carrera 4, 911 Carrera 4S, 911 Targa 4, 911 Targa 4S: approx. 17.7 U.S. gallons / 67 liters
Fuel quality Your engine is designed to provide optimum performance and fuel economy using
unleaded premium fuel with an octane rating of 98 RON (93 CLC or AKI).
Porsche therefore recommends the use of these fuels in your vehicle.
Porsche also recognizes that these fuels may not always be available. Be assured that your vehicle
will operate properly on unleaded premium fuels with octane numbers of at least 95 RON (90 CLC or AKI),
since the engine’s “Electronic Oktane™ knock control” will adapt the ignition timing, if necessary.
Power steering approx. 1.35 quarts / 1.27 liters hydraulic fluid Pentosin CHF 11 S ® or Pentosin CHF 202 ®
Brake fluid 0.48 quarts / 0.45 liters; use only Original Porsche brake fluid
Windshield washer approx. 6.3 quarts / 6 liters with headlight washer
Technical Data 291
Weights Coupé
911 Carrera Manual transmission Porsche Doppelkupplung
Empty weight (depending on equipment) 1415 kg to 1515 kg 1445 kg to 1545 kg
3120 lbs. to 3340 lbs. 3186 lbs. to 3406 lbs.
Maximum gross weight 4012 lbs./1820 kg 4079 lbs./1850 kg
Maximum axle load, front* 1709 lbs./775 kg 1709 lbs./775 kg
Maximum axle load, rear* 2601 lbs./1180 kg 2601 lbs./1180 kg
Maximum useful load, Roof Transport System** 165 lbs./75 kg 165 lbs./75 kg
911 Carrera S Manual transmission Porsche Doppelkupplung
Empty weight (depending on equipment) 1425 kg to 1520 kg 1455 kg to 1550 kg
3142 lbs. to 3351 lbs. 3208 lbs. to 3417 lbs.
Maximum gross weight 4034 lbs./1830 kg 4101 lbs./1860 kg
Maximum axle load, front* 1709 lbs./775 kg 1709 lbs./775 kg
Maximum axle load, rear* 2601 lbs./1180 kg 2601 lbs./1180 kg
Maximum useful load, Roof Transport System** 165 lbs./75 kg 165 lbs./75 kg
* The maximum gross weight must not be exceeded.
Note: If additional accessories are installed, the useful load will be correspondingly less.
** Use only Original Porsche Roof Transport System.
292 Technical Data
Weights Coupé
911 Carrera 4 Manual transmission Porsche Doppelkupplung
Empty weight (depending on equipment) 1470 kg to 1565 kg 1500 kg to 1595 kg
3241 lbs. to 3450 lbs. 3307 lbs. to 3516 lbs.
Maximum gross weight 4123 lbs./1870 kg 4189 lbs./1900 kg
Maximum axle load, front* 1819 lbs./825 kg 1819 lbs./825 kg
Maximum axle load, rear* 2690 lbs./1220 kg 2690 lbs./1220 kg
Maximum useful load, Roof Transport System** 165 lbs./75 kg 165 lbs./75 kg
911 Carrera 4S Manual transmission Porsche Doppelkupplung
Empty weight (depending on equipment) 1480 kg to 1570 kg 1510 kg to 1610 kg
3263 lbs. to 3461 lbs. 3329 lbs. to 3527 lbs.
Maximum gross weight 4145 lbs./1880 kg 4211 lbs./1910 kg
Maximum axle load, front* 1819 lbs./825 kg 1819 lbs./825 kg
Maximum axle load, rear* 2690 lbs./1220 kg 2690 lbs./1220 kg
Maximum useful load, Roof Transport System** 165 lbs./75 kg 165 lbs./75 kg
* The maximum gross weight must not be exceeded.
Note: If additional accessories are installed, the useful load will be correspondingly less.
** Use only Original Porsche Roof Transport System.
Technical Data 293
Weights Cabriolet
911 Carrera Manual transmission Porsche Doppelkupplung
Empty weight (depending on equipment) 1500 kg to 1575 kg 1530 kg to 1605 kg
3307 lbs. to 3472lbs. 3373 lbs. to 3538 lbs.
Maximum gross weight 4145 lbs./1880 kg 4211 lbs./1910 kg
Maximum axle load, front* 1709 lbs./775 kg 1709 lbs./775 kg
Maximum axle load, rear* 2690 lbs./1220 kg 2690 lbs./1220 kg
911 Carrera S Manual transmission Porsche Doppelkupplung
Empty weight (depending on equipment) 1510 kg to 1580 kg 1540 kg to 1610 kg
3329 lbs. to 3483 lbs. 3395 lbs. to 3549 lbs.
Maximum gross weight 4167 lbs./1890 kg 4233 lbs./1920 kg
Maximum axle load, front* 1709 lbs./775 kg 1709 lbs./775 kg
Maximum axle load, rear* 2690 lbs./1220 kg 2690 lbs./1220 kg
* The maximum gross weight must not be exceeded.
Note: If additional accessories are installed, the useful load will be correspondingly less.
294 Technical Data
Weights Cabriolet
911 Carrera 4 Manual transmission Porsche Doppelkupplung
Empty weight (depending on equipment) 1555 kg to 1625 kg 1585 kg to 1655 kg
3428 lbs. to 3583 lbs. 3494 lbs. to 3649 lbs.
Maximum gross weight 4255 lbs./1930 kg 4321 lbs./1960 kg
Maximum axle load, front* 1819 lbs./825 kg 1819 lbs./825 kg
Maximum axle load, rear* 2690 lbs./1220 kg 2690 lbs./1220 kg
911 Carrera 4S Manual transmission Porsche Doppelkupplung
Empty weight (depending on equipment) 1565 kg to 1630 kg 1595 kg to 1660 kg
3450 lbs. to 3594 lbs. 3516 lbs. to 3660 lbs.
Maximum gross weight 4277 lbs./1940 kg 4343 lbs./1970 kg
Maximum axle load, front* 1819 lbs./825 kg 1819 lbs./825 kg
Maximum axle load, rear* 2690 lbs./1220 kg 2690 lbs./1220 kg
* The maximum gross weight must not be exceeded.
Note: If additional accessories are installed, the useful load will be correspondingly less.
Technical Data 295
Weights Targa
911 Targa 4 Manual transmission Porsche Doppelkupplung
Empty weight (depending on equipment) 1530 kg to 1605 kg 1560 kg to 1635 kg
3373 lbs. to 3538 lbs. 3439 lbs. to 3605 lbs.
Maximum gross weight 4211 lbs./1910 kg 4277 lbs./1940 kg
Maximum axle load, front* 1819 lbs./825 kg 1819 lbs./825 kg
Maximum axle load, rear* 2690 lbs./1220 kg 2690 lbs./1220 kg
911 Targa 4S Manual transmission Porsche Doppelkupplung
Empty weight (depending on equipment) 1540 kg to 1610 kg 1570 kg to 1640 kg
3395 lbs. to 3549 lbs. 3461 lbs. to 3616 lbs.
Maximum gross weight 4233 lbs./1920 kg 4299 lbs./1950 kg
Maximum axle load, front* 1819 lbs./825 kg 1819 lbs./825 kg
Maximum axle load, rear* 2690 lbs./1220 kg 2690 lbs./1220 kg
* The maximum gross weight must not be exceeded.
Note: If additional accessories are installed, the useful load will be correspondingly less.
296 Technical Data
Driving Performance Coupé
At DIN empty weight and half load, without performance-inhibiting extra equipment
Powerkit Carrera
911 Carrera Manual transmission PDK transmission
Top track speed 179.6 mph (289 km/h) 178.3 mph (287 km/h)
Acceleration 0 - 60 mph 4.7 seconds 4.5 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 60 mph with Sport + 4.3 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (62 mph) 4.9 seconds 4.7 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (62 mph) with Sport + 4.5 seconds
911 Carrera S Manual transmission PDK transmission Manual transmission PDK transmission
Top track speed 187.7 mph (302 km/h) 186.4 mph (300 km/h) 190.8 mph (307 km/h) 189.5 mph (305 km/h)
Acceleration 0 - 60 mph 4.5 seconds 4.3 seconds 4.4 seconds 4.2 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 60 mph with Sport + 4.1 seconds 4.0 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (62 mph) 4.7 seconds 4.5 seconds 4.6 seconds 4.4 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (62 mph) with Sport + 4.3 seconds 4.2 seconds
911 Carrera 4 Manual transmission PDK transmission
Top track speed 176.5 mph (284 km/h) 175.2 mph (282 km/h)
Acceleration 0 - 60 mph 4.8 seconds 4.6 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 60 mph with Sport + 4.4 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (62 mph) 5.0 seconds 4.8 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (62 mph) with Sport + 4.6 seconds
911 Carrera 4S Manual transmission PDK transmission Manual transmission PDK transmission
Top track speed 184.5 mph (297 km/h) 183.3 mph (295 km/h) 187.7 mph (302 km/h) 186.4 mph (300 km/h)
Acceleration 0 - 60 mph 4.5 seconds 4.3 seconds 4.4 seconds 4.2 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 60 mph with Sport + 4.1 seconds 4.0 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (62 mph) 4.7 seconds 4.5 seconds 4.6 seconds 4.4 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (62 mph) with Sport + 4.3 seconds 4.2 seconds
Technical Data 297
Driving Performance Cabriolet, Targa
At DIN empty weight and half load, without performance-inhibiting extra equipment
Powerkit Carrera
911 Carrera Manual transmission PDK transmission
Top track speed 179.6 mph (289 km/h) 178.3 mph (287 km/h)
Acceleration 0 - 60 mph 4.9 seconds 4.7 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 60 mph with Sport + 4.5 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (62 mph) 5.1 seconds 4.9 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (62 mph) with Sport + 4.7 seconds
911 Carrera S Manual transmission PDK transmission Manual transmission PDK transmission
Top track speed 187.7 mph (302 km/h) 186.4 mph (300 km/h) 190.8 mph (307 km/h) 189.5 mph (305 km/h)
Acceleration 0 - 60 mph 4.7 seconds 4.5 seconds 4.6 seconds 4.4 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 60 mph with Sport + 4.3 seconds 4.2 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (62 mph) 4.9 seconds 4.7 seconds 4.8 seconds 4.6 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (62 mph) with Sport + 4.5 seconds 4.4 seconds
911 Carrera 4, 911 Targa 4 Manual transmission PDK transmission
Top track speed 176.5 mph (284 km/h) 175.2 mph (282 km/h)
Acceleration 0 - 60 mph 5.0 seconds 4.8 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 60 mph with Sport + 4.6 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (62 mph) 5.2 seconds 5.0 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (62 mph) with Sport + 4.8 seconds
911 Carrera 4S, 911 Targa 4S Manual transmission PDK transmission Manual transmission PDK transmission
Top track speed 184.5 mph (297 km/h) 183.3 mph (295 km/h) 187.7 mph (302 km/h) 186.4 mph (300 km/h)
Acceleration 0 - 60 mph 4.7 seconds 4.5 seconds 4.6 seconds 4.4 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 60 mph with Sport + 4.3 seconds 4.2 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (62 mph) 4.9 seconds 4.7 seconds 4.8 seconds 4.6 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (62 mph) with Sport + 4.5 seconds 4.4 seconds
298 Technical Data
Dimensions
911 Carrera, 911 Carrera S 911 Carrera 4, 911 Carrera 4S
911 Targa 4, 911 Targa 4S
Length 175.83 in./4466 mm 175.83 in./4466 mm
Width 71.2 in./1808 mm 72.9 in./1852 mm
With with door mirrors 76.9 in./1952 mm 76.9 in./1952 mm
Height 51.6 in./1310 mm 51.6 in./1310 mm
Wheelbase 92.5 in./2350 mm 92.5 in./2350 mm
Ground clearance
at maximum gross weight 4.45 in./113 mm 4.49 in./114 mm
Turning circle 35.8 ft./10.9 m 35.8 ft./10.9 m
Vehicles with PASM
Height 51.2 in./1300 mm 51.2 in./1300 mm
Ground clearance
at maximum gross weight 911 Carrera: 4.21 in./107 mm
911 Carrera S: 4.33 in./110 mm 911 Carrera 4, 911 Targa 4: 4.13 in./105 mm
911 Carrera 4S, 911 Targa 4S: 4.25 in./108 mm
Vehicles with Sports chassis
Height 50.79 in./1290 mm 50.79 in./1290 mm
Ground clearance
at maximum gross weight 3.94 in./100 mm 3.9 in./99 mm
Technical Data 299
Diagrams
MA 102, Engine diagram at full power, 911 Carrera, 911 Carrera 4, 911 Targa 4
300 Diagrams
MA 101, Engine diagram at full power, 911 Carrera S, 911 Carrera 4S, 911 Targa 4S
Index 301
A
ABS (antilock brake system) ..........................61
Warning light ........................................62
Adaptive sports seat.....................................31
Adjusting Headlights....................................278
Advanced Airbag...........................................45
Air conditioning compressor................106, 108
Air conditioning system...............................106
Air distribution....................................106, 108
Air filter......................................................222
Air intake....................................................109
Airbag
Advanced.............................................45
Cleaning covers..................................230
Deactivation device...............................49
Function...............................................45
Maintenance.........................................48
Warning light ..................................48, 56
Airbag Systems............................................44
Alarm system.......................................23, 100
Deactivating passenger compartment
monitoring............................................24
Fault indication......................................24
Function indication ................................23
Not active ..........................................258
Alcantara, cleaning .....................................231
Antenna .............................................100, 225
Antifreeze ..................................................207
Antifreeze in coolant ...................................207
Antilock brake system (ABS)..........................61
Warning light ........................................62
Ashtray........................................................89
Assembly aids for wheel changes.................249
Audio operation ......................................98, 99
Auto-button, air conditioning.........................106
Automatic
Air conditioning system........................106
Anti-glare mirrors ..................................28
Car washes ........................................225
Door locking...................................18, 22
Garage door.........................................78
Headlight adjustment.............................81
Speed control.........................86, 87, 116
Transmission......................................170
Automatic locking retractor............................53
Automatic speed control..............................116
Indicator light......................................116
Average consumption..........................127, 157
Average speed ...................................127, 157
B
Backrest
Adjustment...........................................30
Release................................................30
Battery.......................................................261
Care...................................................262
Charge state.......................................261
Charging ............................................262
Putting vehicle into operation ...............263
Remote control...................................266
Removing...........................................264
Replacing ...........................................263
Warning light.......................................124
Winter operation..................................263
Before driving off........................................8, 9
Belts............................................................41
Cleaning.............................................231
Height adjustment.................................43
Tensioner ............................................ 41
Warning light........................................ 42
Blower adjustment...................................... 109
Blower speed adjustment............................ 107
BrakeBreak in............................................... 10
Pads ................................................... 60
Pedal................................................... 59
Wear................................................... 60
Brake fluid
Changing........................................... 213
Checking level.................................... 212
Level................................................. 212
Warning light...................................... 213
Brake light................................................. 277
Brake light, additional................................. 277
Brakes ...................................................... 212
Brake circuit division warning light....... 213
Brake warning light............................. 125
Fluid.......................................... 212, 290
Fluid warning light............................... 213
Function .............................................. 58
New brake pads or linings..................... 60
Pads ................................................... 10
Parking brake....................................... 57
Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake
(PCCB) .................................................. 4
Roller brake tester................................ 63
Test stand ........................................... 68
Break in brakes............................................ 10
Break in hints............................................... 10
Bulbs, replacing......................................... 269
302 Index
C
Cabriolet....................................................181
Capacities..................................................290
Car care ....................................................224
Car telephone.............................................100
Car washes................................................225
Carpet.......................................................230
Catalytic converters....................................219
Cautions ............................................206, 234
Central locking .....................................19, 258
Automatic relocking ..............................19
Emergency operation............................20
Fault indication......................................21
Overload protection ......................21, 258
Central locking button...................................21
Central vents..............................................109
Central warning light ...................................125
Changing bulb ............................................277
Changing light-emitting diodes (LEDs)...........277
Changing wheels ........................................249
Check engine
Warning light ......................................125
Check engine warning light..........................125
Opening the oil filler cap......................209
Checking pressure......................................250
Child restraint systems..................................50
Anchorages..........................................55
Direction of installation..........................51
Child seat bracket.........................................54
Chime..........................................................80
CHRONO Stopwatch....................................136
Cigarette lighter............................................90
Circulating-air button...................................107
Clock.................................................123, 156
Clothes hook................................................91
Clutch..................................................62, 168
Clutch pedal.................................................62
Combination filter........................................222
Comfort seat................................................31
Coming home mode......................................81
Communication management.........................98
Compact disc
Player ..................................................99
Storage................................................92
Compartment monitoring...............................23
Compressor.................................................96
Convertible top...........................................181
Care ..................................................226
Closing...............................................182
Emergency operation..........................183
Opening .............................................182
Preconditions for operation..................182
Coolant..............................................120, 207
Checking............................................207
Level..................................................207
Temperature gage ..............................120
Topping off.........................................207
Warning light.......................................120
Cooling system...................................120, 207
Warning light.......................................120
Cornering light
Indicator light......................................119
Crankcase ventilation..................................219
Cruise control.................................86, 87, 124
Cupholder ....................................................88
D
Data bank...................................................284
Daytime driving lights....................................80
Changing bulbs...................................277
On-board computer .............................156
Defrosting windows...............................29, 107
Diagnostic socket .........................................11
Dimensions.................................................298
Direction indicator light, front.......................277
Door ............................................................18
Handles................................................18
Locks...........................................18, 226
Mirror...................................................28
Mirror heating.......................................29
Mirrors.................................................27
Windows.........................18, 26, 181, 228
Drive-Off Assistant.......................................169
Driving
Hints ......................................................8
Performance.......................................296
Winter ................................................175
Driving off
Drive-Off Assistant...............................169
Launch Control....................................173
Drop-center rim...........................................245
Dynamometer testing....................................63
E
Electrical system.........................................257
Emergency flasher switch..............................79
Emergency operation
Central locking......................................20
Convertible top ...................................183
Ignition key...........................................76
Index 303
Lids ...................................................260
Lifting/Sliding roof ..............................179
Tank flap............................................215
Emergency service.....................................234
Emergency starting with
jumper cables.....................................267, 268
Emission control system .............125, 218, 219
Engine
Checking the oil level...........................153
Diagram.............................................299
Exhaust..................................................5
Number..............................................285
Oil consumption............................10, 208
Oil level..............................................208
Oil level indicator ................................153
Oil pressure........................................124
Oil temperature...................................116
Oils............................................208, 290
Speeds ................................................10
Starting................................................77
Stopping ..............................................78
Engine compartment
Blower .........................................78, 120
Blower fan..........................................120
Care ..................................................227
Lid.................................................93, 94
Lid warning light....................................93
Engine oil
Change..............................................210
Consumption........................................10
Performance class..............................211
Recommendation................................210
Topping off.........................................209
Viscosity ............................................211
Exhaust
Pipes .....................................................5
System.................................................57
Tailpipes, stainless steel......................229
External antenna.........................................100
F
Fabric linings..............................................230
Filler flap....................................................215
Filling pressure, tire.....................................289
Fire extinguisher .........................................102
Flat tire ......................................................251
Floor mats..................................................230
Fluids.........................................................222
Fluids and fuels...........................................290
FM reception ................................................98
Fog light, rear...............................................80
Footbrake.....................................................58
Four-wheel drive............................................63
Fresh air intake...........................................109
Front lid .................................................93, 94
Fuel ...................................................122, 215
Containers......................................5, 217
Economy............................................214
Evaporation control.............................217
Fuels containing ethanol.......................217
Level gage .........................................122
Level warning light ..............................122
Recommendation........................216, 217
Recommendations ..............................216
Tank ..................................................216
Function keys ...............................................39
Fuses, replacing .........................................259
G
Garage
Door ................................................... 78
Door opener ...................................... 103
Lift.................................................... 254
Gear display ...................................... 112, 114
Gear shift indicator..................................... 119
Glass rear hatch......................................... 200
Glass rear hatch (Targa)
Unlocking ............................................ 16
Glass roof.................................................. 200
Glove compartment...................................... 92
Gong....................................... 14, 75, 80, 129
Ground clearance........................................... 5
H
Handbrake................................................... 57
Hardtop..................................................... 194
Putting on.......................................... 196
Removing .......................................... 194
Head restraints............................................ 30
Headlights................................................. 270
Adjusting ................................... 278, 279
Beam adjustment ................................. 81
Cleaning system........................... 83, 220
Flasher................................................ 82
Heated rear window ..................................... 29
Heated rear window/Door mirror heating ..... 110
Heater....................................................... 106
High beam
Indicator light..................................... 119
Lever................................................... 80
High-pressure cleaning units........................ 224
Home mode................................................. 81
304 Index
HomeLink...................................................103
Hoods....................................................93, 94
Horn................................................12, 19, 21
Hot exhaust pipes...........................................5
I
Ignition key...................................................74
Emergency operation............................76
Ignition lock..................................................74
Withdrawing ignition key,
PDK transmission................................172
Immobilizer ..................................................15
Indicator lights....................................112, 114
INFO Warning messages .............................132
Instrument
Illumination.........................................116
Lights ..................................................80
Panel .................................112, 114, 158
Interior lights................................................71
Interior mirror...............................................28
J
Jumper cables............................................267
K
Key codes....................................................15
Key-operated airbag deactivation device.........49
Keys......................................................15, 16
L
LATCH System.............................................54
Launch Control...........................................173
Leather care ..............................................230
License plate light.........................................80
Lids.............................................................94
Emergency unlocking ..........................260
Lifting vehicle .............................................254
Lifting/sliding roof.......................................178
LightDaytime driving.....................................80
Flasher...................................80, 82, 119
Low beam ......................................80, 82
Sensor for instrument illumination.112, 114
Switch............................................80, 82
Light alloy wheels
Inscription ..........................................245
Lights
Care ..................................................229
Headlight beam adjustment....................81
LIMIT Acoustic warning signal for speed limit.129
Load switch-off ...........................................258
Loading information ....................................246
Locking........................................................19
Conditions............................................21
Locking retractor..........................................53
Low beam....................................................82
Lowering......................................................56
Luggage carrier..................................291, 292
Luggage compartment............................95, 97
Lid.......................................................93
Lid warning light....................................93
Unlocking lid.........................................16
Luggage compartment/
engine compartment lid, warning lights...........93
Luggage rack.............................................204
M
Maintenance...............................................206
Make-up mirror .............................................40
Maximum permitted engine speeds ................10
Manual transmission............................168
Mirror
Folding in..............................................28
Heating ........................................29, 110
Inside...................................................27
Mirrors...................................................27, 73
Anti-glare..............................................28
Multi-functional steering wheel........................39
N
Navigation....................................................98
Selection field, on-board computer .......142
Notes on
Car care.............................................224
Maintenance .......................................206
Number plate light.................................80, 277
O
Octane rating......................................216, 217
Odometer...................................................117
Off delay ......................................................81
Oil..............................................................208
Change...............................................210
Checking level.....................................153
Consumption.........................................10
Level checks.......................................208
Level indicator ....................................153
Pressure.............................................124
Recommendation ................................210
Index 305
Temperature.......................................116
Topping off engine oil..........................209
OIL Display and measurement of the
engine oil level............................................153
On-board computer.....................................126
Basic settings.............................127, 155
Calling on-board computer functions.....127
Functions and display possibilities........127
General information.....................156, 157
Language versions..............................155
Operation, controls .............................126
Selecting a radio station......................142
Setting the clock.................................156
Switching daytime driving lights on/off..156
Switching on navigation.......................142
Tire pressure warnings........................149
Warnings and messages......................158
On-board literature..........................................2
Operating voice control...............................126
Operating your Porsche in other Countries....214
Orientation light............................................71
Outside temperatur indicator .......................123
Oxygen sensor ...........................................219
P
PaintCare ..........................................224, 227
Data...................................................285
ParkAssistant ...............................................72
Parking
PDK transmission................................175
Parking aids...........................................72, 73
Parking brake...............................................57
Warning light ........................................58
Parking light ...........................................80, 82
Particle filter...............................................222
Passenger compartment monitoring...............23
PDK transmission........................................170
Drive-Off Assistant...............................169
Driving in winter ..................................175
Faults.................................................171
Kickdown............................................173
Launch Control....................................173
Manual selection mode........................174
Reduced driving program.....................176
Selector lever emergency release ........280
Selector lever positions.......................172
Shifting gears on the steering wheel.....173
Sport mode........................................172
Transmission fluid...............................222
Warning messages..............................176
Pen holder....................................................92
Plastic parts...............................................229
Care...................................................229
Platform lift.................................................254
Porsche Active Suspension Management
(PASM).........................................................69
Sport mode..........................................69
Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB).......4
Porsche Communication Management (PCM)...98
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK)....................170
Drive-Off Assistant...............................169
Driving in winter ..................................175
Faults.................................................171
Kickdown............................................174
Launch Control....................................170
Manual selection mode........................174
Reduced driving program.....................176
Selector lever emergency release ....... 280
Selector lever position................ 170, 172
Shifting gears on the steering wheel .... 173
Sport mode ....................................... 172
Transmission fluid .............................. 222
Porsche Stability Management (PSM)............. 66
Information light................................... 68
Porsche traction management (PTM) ............. 63
Power steering fluid level.................... 221, 290
Power windows.................................... 18, 181
Practical tips.............................................. 234
Putting vehicle into operation ...................... 263
R
Radiator fan......................................... 78, 208
Radio reception............................................ 98
Rain sensor ........................................... 83, 85
Range on remaining fuel ..................... 127, 157
Reading light................................................ 71
Rear hatch................................................. 200
Rear lid ................................................. 93, 94
Rear seat backrests..................................... 37
Rear spoiler................................................. 69
Automatic mode................................... 70
Manual control ..................................... 70
Rear view mirrors................................... 27, 28
Rear window defogger.......................... 29, 110
Rear window heating .................................. 110
Rear window wiper....................................... 84
Recirculating-air button............................... 107
Refuelling .................................................. 216
Relays....................................................... 257
Remote control............................................ 16
Readiness............................................ 17
306 Index
Replacing battery................................266
Standby funktion...................................17
Synchronization....................................17
Replacement key..........................................15
Replacing bulbs..........................................269
Replacing wiper blades ...............................223
Retractable rear spoiler.................................69
RimsDiameter............................................245
Dimensions ................................287, 288
Rim width...........................................245
TPM sensors ......................................241
Roller blind.................................................200
Rollover Protection System............................56
Roof Transport System ...............204, 291, 292
Running in....................................................10
S
Safety belts..................................................41
Cleaning.............................................231
Height adjustment.................................43
Tensioner.............................................41
Warning light ........................................42
Safety compliance sticker ...........................284
Sealing set.................................................252
Seals.........................................................229
Care ..................................................229
Seat Adaptive sports seat.............................31
Adjustment...........................................30
Comfort seat........................................31
Heating................................................35
Memory ...............................................33
Position................................................30
Sports bucket seat................................32
Sports seat ..........................................31
Standard seat.......................................31
Ventilation.............................................36
Seat memory
Operating with the remote control ..........34
Operation with person buttons................33
Selector lever position.........................112, 114
Selector lever position indicator,
PDK transmission........................................171
Service ......................................................133
SET Basic setting on on-board computer ......155
Shift indicator.............................................119
Shifting gears
Drive-Off Assistant...............................169
Manual transmission............................168
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK)............170
Side light, front...........................................277
Side marker light ..................................80, 276
Side vents..................................................109
Sliding glass roof........................................200
Sliding roof.................................................178
Snow chains...............................................243
Snow tires..................................................242
Socket.......................................................257
Spacers.....................................................255
Spare key.....................................................15
Speed code letter.......................................244
Speed control...............................................87
Automatic.............................................86
Indicator light......................................116
Speed limit.........................................129, 244
Speedometer .............................................118
Spoiler.........................................................69
Sport Chrono Plus package
CHRONO stopwatch ............................136
Sport mode ..........................................64
Sport mode..................................................68
PDK transmission................................172
Switching on/off....................................64
Switching PASM on/off..........................69
Sport plus mode...........................................64
Sport tires......................................................4
Sports bucket seat........................................32
Sports chassis............................................298
Sports exhaust system..................................57
Sports seat ..................................................31
Sport-type running gear...............................298
Stability management system ........................66
Standard seat...............................................31
Starter switch...............................................74
Starting........................................................75
Starting engine .............................................77
Steam cleaners...........................................224
Steering column
Locking................................................75
Steering lock................................................74
Steering wheel
Adjustment ...........................................37
Function keys........................................39
Heating ................................................38
Lock.....................................................75
Multi functional......................................39
PDK shift buttons ................................170
Stopping engine............................................78
Stopwatch..................................................136
Storage options............................................91
Storage possibilities......................................91
Index 307
Storing your Porsche ..................................231
Sun visors....................................................40
Suspension management ..............................69
T
Tachometer................................................119
Tail light.....................................................277
Tank..........................................215, 216, 290
Ventilation system...............................217
Targa.........................................................200
Technical data............................................286
TEL Telephone information ..........................133
Telephone..................................................100
Temperature setting ...........................106, 107
Temperature, outside indicator....................123
Test stand, measurements............................68
Theft protection............................................14
Tire Care ..................................................239
Damage.............................................239
Designations.......................................243
Pressure plate....................................237
Replacements.....................................240
Traction .............................................238
Wear..................................................238
Tire filling compressor ..................................96
Tire pressure
Compressor.........................................96
Tire pressure monitoring
Warning light ......................................151
Wheels...............................................241
Tire pressure monitoring (TPM)....................143
Tires....................................10, 235, 287, 288
Care ..................................................235
Checking pressure..............................250
Dimensions.................................287, 288
Inscription...........................................244
Loading information.............................246
New tires..............................................10
Pressure ....................................236, 289
Pressure monitoring............................143
Pressure plate ....................................285
Removing and storing..........................241
Sealant.................................96, 251, 252
Sidewall..............................................244
Size ...................................................244
Snow tires..........................................242
Sport .....................................................4
Tool kit.........................................................96
Tools .....................................................95, 96
Towing...............................................280, 282
Towing hook...............................................280
Towing lug....................................................96
TPM Tire pressure monitoring......................143
Track.................................................287, 288
Traction management ...................................63
Transmission
Drive-Off Assistant...............................168
Fluid...........................................222, 290
Manual transmission............................168
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) ....168, 170
Trip Odometer............................................117
Trunk entrapment .........................................97
Turn signal
Indicator light......................................119
Turn signals..........................................82, 119
U
Undercoating..................................... 218, 228
V
Valves....................................................... 240
Vanity mirror................................................ 40
Vehicle
Care.................................................. 224
Dimensions........................................ 298
Engine number................................... 285
Identification ...................................... 284
Identification label............................... 284
Identification number .......................... 284
Lifting................................................ 254
Load capacity .................................... 247
Performance...................................... 296
Putting into operation ......................... 263
Safety compliance sticker................... 284
Washing ............................................ 225
Vehicle identification number....................... 284
Ventilation.................................................. 106
Vents ................................................ 106, 109
Viscosity, engine oil.................................... 211
Voice control, button.................................. 126
Voice control, PCM..................................... 126
W
Warning lights and messages...................... 158
Washer
Fluid.......................................... 220, 290
Fluid warning light............................... 220
Lever................................................... 83
Washing .................................................... 225
308 Index
Welcome Home Function...............................81
Wheel ..................................10, 235, 287, 288
Alignment...........................................241
Balancing...........................................241
Bolts..................................................248
Care ..................................................235
Changing............................................251
Checking pressure..............................250
Inscription ..........................................244
Loading information ............................246
Securing bolts....................................248
Security wheel bolts........................15, 96
Sidewall .............................................244
Size...................................................244
Tire pressure..............................236, 289
Tire pressure plate..............................285
Tire sealant ................................251, 252
Wheels
Assembly aids for wheel changes.........249
Care ..................................................229
TPM sensors ......................................241
Windows............................................181, 228
Anti-crushing protection.........................26
Care ..................................................228
Opening/Closing...................................26
Washer nozzles ....................................83
Washer system.....................83, 220, 290
Windshield
Washer nozzles ....................................83
Wiper blades, changing .......................223
Wiper/washer lever...............................83
Windshield wipers.................................83, 223
Replacing...........................................223
Windstop....................................................190
Installing.............................................190
Removing...........................................193
Winter operation
Battery...............................................263
Coolant ..............................................207
Engine oil ...........................................208
Jumper cables............................267, 268
Locks.................................................226
Seals .................................................229
Snow chains.......................................243
Tires..................................242, 287, 288
Washer fluid........................................220
Wiper blades.......................................223
WiperBlades................................................223
Lever ...................................................83
Rear.....................................................84
Wiper blades
Care ..................................................228
Changing............................................223


Produkt Specifikationer

Mærke: Porsche
Kategori: Personbil
Model: 911 Carrera

Har du brug for hjælp?

Hvis du har brug for hjælp til Porsche 911 Carrera stil et spørgsmål nedenfor, og andre brugere vil svare dig